CX Series

Operator's Manual

ORIGINAL INSTRUCTIONS SECTION

CONTENTS
Valid for the following tractor mod- TRACTOR IDENTIFICATION
els with cab INTRODUCTION, GUARANTEE 1
CX90-CX100-CX110 SAFETY NOTES
CX100SWB 2
CX105SWB
Restyling COMMANDS
CAB
3
INSTRUMENTS AND PROGRAMMING

4
OPERATION

5

TYRES, WHEELS, BALLASTING

6
REGULAR SERVICE INTERVALS

7
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
9

Argo Tractors S.p.A.

42042 Fabbrico [RE] Italia
via G. Matteotti, 7
t. +39.0522.656111 - f. +39.0522.656476
[email protected] Publication N. 6504619M2
www.argotractors.com Release 12/2010

1
 WARNING
IMPROPER OPERATION OF THIS TRACTOR CAN CAUSE INJURY OR DEATH.
BEFOR USING THE TRACTOS, MAKE SURE THAT EVERY OPERATOR:
- Is instructed in safe and proper use of the tractor.
- Reads and understands the Manual(s) pertaining to the tractor.
- Reads and understands ALL safety decals on the tractor.
- Clears the work area of other persons.
- Learns and practices safe use of the tractor controls in a safe, clear area before operating on a job site.

It is your responsibility to observe pertinent laws and regulations and follow all instructions on tractor operation and
maintenance as quoted in this Operator's Manual.

This manual was compiled in compliance with the the ISO 3600 standards and the here contained instruc-
tions comply the requirements of the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC in force in the European Community.
For tractors sold or used outside the European Community, local laws will prevail.

Main protections on the tractors discussed in this manual.

CX - CX SWB - CAB DE LUXE LOW PROFILE

ROPS (protection against overturning) YES YES
FOPS (protection against objects falling from above) YES NO
OPS (protection against penetration of objects from sides) NO NO
Protection against hazardous chemicals CLASS 1 CLASS 1

This operation and service manual is valid for all countries and all models. It contains photos, notes and
directions both for standard and optional equipment. Therefore it can give details for parts not installed on
your tractor with respect to the local laws in force and according to ordered optional equipment.
The tractor is supplied complete with safety devices according to national or international laws. For your
own safety, please always use correctly such devices and check them for function. If you have any doubts con-
cerning their operation or use, do not hesitate to ask your Dealer for details.

Units Of Measurement
WARNING: Any warranties for modified operation
units (safety frame, electric and hydraulic systems All units of measurement used in this manual are metric
a.s.o) expire if cabs are mounted that are not ap- unless otherwise stated.
proved by the tractor's maker. Moreover, noise levels Use the following table to convert from metric to impe-
and compliance with the approvals cannot be veri- rial units.
fied in this case.

mm x 0.03937 = inches

kg x 2.2 = pounds

Bar x 14.5038 = PSI

CALIFORNIA
Statement 65 Litres x 0.22 = British gallons
Warning
Litres x 0.264 = US gallons
Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constitu-
ents are known to the State of California to N (Newton) x 0.225 = pound/foot
cause cancer, birth defects, and other repro-
ductive harm. Nm x 0.738 = pound/foot

Nm x 8.85 = pound/inch

°C x 1.8 (=32) = °F

km/h x 0.62 = MPH

2
 Contents
Table of contents Page n.
Section 1 Contents................................................................................................... 3
Tractor identification................................................................................. 6
Introduction.............................................................................................. 7
Warranty, pre-delivery inspections and installation................................. 7
Warranty claim.......................................................................................... 7
Spare parts warning................................................................................. 8
If you move............................................................................................... 8
Post-warranty service............................................................................... 8
Safety........................................................................................................ 8
Section 2 Safety Notes............................................................................................. 9
Regular use............................................................................................... 9
Safety alert symbols and terms............................................................. 10
Safety - tractor and implement.............................................................. 10
Safety - Introduction .............................................................................. 10
Safety - Advice for the operator............................................................. 10
Safety - Danger, Warning and Caution................................................... 11
Safety - Decals........................................................................................ 11
Safety - Following a safety program...................................................... 11
Safety frame........................................................................................... 12
Safety - Cab............................................................................................ 12
Safety precautions................................................................................. 13
Check your equipment........................................................................... 15
Cleaning the tractor................................................................................ 16
Save the environment............................................................................ 16
Safety - Tractor maintenance................................................................. 16
Safety - Starting up................................................................................. 17
Working in safety.................................................................................... 19
Correct manoeuvres............................................................................... 19
Working in safety.................................................................................... 19
Beware of other people......................................................................... 20
Risk of overturning................................................................................. 21
To avoid side overturning....................................................................... 21
To avoid back overturning...................................................................... 23
Dangerous operations............................................................................ 25
Implements and attachments................................................................ 26
Road transport........................................................................................ 27
Road circulation rules............................................................................. 27
Safety - After use.................................................................................... 28
Additional notes..................................................................................... 29
Risks from noise..................................................................................... 31
Positions of safety decals - All markets ................................................ 32
Positions of safety decals - Only North American markets................... 36
Section 3 Cab controls........................................................................................... 39
Tractor Access........................................................................................ 41
Operator's Seat....................................................................................... 42
Safety Belts............................................................................................ 46
Passenger Seat....................................................................................... 47
Steering column adjustment.................................................................. 48
Controls.................................................................................................. 49
Shuttle controls...................................................................................... 51
Operating Controls on Right-Hand Console........................................... 52
Operating Controls in Cab - Air Conditioning......................................... 56
Section 4 Instruments and Programming............................................................. 61
Instrument Cluster.................................................................................. 62
Warning Lamps...................................................................................... 63
LCD Display............................................................................................ 64
Menu Display......................................................................................... 65
Accessory Menu.................................................................................... 78
Clock Settings........................................................................................ 90

3
Contents

Section 5
Operation................................................................................................ 91
General Operation.................................................................................. 92
Before Starting The Engine.................................................................... 92
Run In Procedure.................................................................................... 92
Starting Procedure.................................................................................. 93
Cold Temperature Operation.................................................................. 94
Parking The Tractor................................................................................. 97
Main Switch (if equipped)...................................................................... 98
Operating the Transmission .................................................................. 99
Creeper Operation................................................................................ 106
Tractor Transport.................................................................................. 107
Drawbar................................................................................................ 108
Height Adjustable Trailer Hitches......................................................... 112
Auto Hitch (if equipped)....................................................................... 115
Implement/Trailer Drawbar Dimensions.............................................. 119
Trailer Brakes........................................................................................ 120
Auxiliary Electrical Power Sockets....................................................... 122
Implement Cable Access..................................................................... 124
Rear Power Takeoff.............................................................................. 125
Front Power Takeoff.............................................................................. 130
Rear Three-Point Hitch Preparation...................................................... 131
Rear Three-Point Hitch Operation........................................................ 138
Operating in Position Control............................................................... 143
Operating in Draft Control.................................................................... 145
Shock Absorber Ride Control............................................................... 147
Differential Lock Control....................................................................... 148
4 WD control........................................................................................ 149
Front Power Lift.................................................................................... 151
Remote Valves...................................................................................... 154
Remote Hydraulics Operation.............................................................. 156

Section 6
Tyres, Wheels, Ballasting..................................................................... 159
Tyre Inflation Specifications................................................................. 160
Tyre pressures, Load Capacities and Service....................................... 162
Wheel removing procedure.................................................................. 165
Front Wheels Toe-In.............................................................................. 166
Four-Wheel Drive Front Axle - Steering Stops...................................... 168
Front Wheel Tread Widths, Four-Wheel Drive...................................... 169
Front Wheel Bolt Torques..................................................................... 170
Front To Rear Tyre Size Combinations.................................................. 171
Front Wheel Fenders............................................................................ 173
Rear Wheel Tread Adjustment............................................................. 174
Rear Wheel Bolt Torques...................................................................... 176
Tractor Ballast....................................................................................... 177

4
 Contents

Section 7
Maintenance......................................................................................... 185
Recommendations Before You Service............................................... 186
Service Access..................................................................................... 187
Lubricants and fuels............................................................................. 188
Service/Hour meter.............................................................................. 190
Service Indicator Lamps and Gauges.................................................. 191
First service operations........................................................................ 191
Routine maintenance guide................................................................. 192
10 Hours or Daily Service..................................................................... 194
50 Hour Service.................................................................................... 197
100 Hour Service.................................................................................. 200
250 Hour Service.................................................................................. 205
500 Hour Service.................................................................................. 209
1000 Hour Main Service....................................................................... 216
2000 Hour Main Service....................................................................... 226
General Maintenance................................................................... 228, 229
Putting the Tractor Into Storage........................................................... 230

Section 8
Electrical system.................................................................................. 233
Batteries............................................................................................... 234
Fuses.................................................................................................... 237

Section 9
Technical specifications....................................................................... 241
Engine................................................................................................... 242
Electrical system.................................................................................. 244
General Specifications......................................................................... 245
Travel Speed......................................................................................... 248
Approximate Tractor Dimensions......................................................... 253
Noise Levels......................................................................................... 254
Vibration levels..................................................................................... 255
‘CE’ Declaration of Conformity............................................................. 256
Issue of authorization...........................................................................257
Weights................................................................................................257

Alphabetical index................................................................................ 259

5
Tractor identification

Machine identification data

The tractor and its main components are identified
by serial numbers and/or manufacturing codes. Here
under the positions of the various identification data
are illustrated. (Fig.1-3)

NOTE: Identification data should be communicated to your

Dealer for requests of spare parts or service.

Tractor identification plate (Fig.1-1)

(1 - Fig.1-3)
The manufacturer’s plate is placed on the right-hand
Fig.1-1 Tractor identification plate
side on the front of the tractor and features the follow-
ing data:
- Manufacturer
- Machine type
- Number of authorization for road circulation
- Frame number
- Manufacturing year
- Weights
- Rated engine power in kW
- CE mark

Other data are indicated on the authorization certifi-

cate.

Tractor identification number

The vehicle identification number is punched both on the
data plate and on the right-hand front side of the weight
frame. (2 - Fig.1-3.)

Tractor identification data

The engine has its own serial number stamped on the
engine data plate (3 - Fig.1-3).

IMPORTANT: Keep with care this operation and maintenan-

ce manual on your tractor. Before driving or operation your Fig.1-2
tractor, it is mandatory to read this manual very carefully,
with special attention to the chapter concerning safety
rules. Keep the manual always ready at hand in the manual
storage compartment for easier reference (Fig. 1-2).

Fig.1-3

6
Introduction
INTRODUCTION Also compliance with and strict adherence to the ope-
ration service and maintenance conditions specified by
NOTE: This manual is distributed with tractors all over the Manufacturer are substantial part of the intended
the world. The equipment indicated as standard or use.
optional may vary according to the country where the
tractor operates. Please ask your Dealer for full details of If the tractor must be used in very heavy-duty condi-
the equipment available in your country. tions (e.g. deep water or extremely muddy soils), you
should ask your Dealer for specific instructions, to avoid
The purpose of this book is to enable the owner and invalidating the guarantee.
driver to operate the tractor in a safe manner. Provided
that the instructions are followed carefully, the equip- For the operation, service and maintenance of this trac-
ment will give years of service in our tradition. tor you need to know perfectly its specific features and
to be precisely informed about the pertaining safety
If you should not understand any part of this booklet, standards (injury prevention).
please do not hesitate to ask your Dealer for advice, as
these instructions must be correctly understood and Customers are strongly advised to turn to an official De-
complied with. It is advisable to perform a daily mainte- aler in connection with any problem regarding service
nance routine and to keep a register to record the work and adjustments.
hours of the machine.

When new parts are required it is important that only

WARRANTY, PRE-DELIVERY IN-
genuine service parts are used. Authorized Dealers sup- SPECTIONS AND INSTALLATION
ply genuine parts and can give advice regarding their The Company, when selling new goods to their Dealers,
fitment and use. . Customers are therefore required to gives a warranty that, subject to certain conditions,
buy their service parts only from an authorized Dealer. guarantees that the goods are free from defects in ma-
terial and workmanship. As this manual is published for
worldwide diffusion, it is impossible to give a precise
and detailed description of the terms and clauses of
the warranty granted in each country for retail sale. The
buyers of new tractors should therefore ask their Dealer
for full details.

According to the Company’s policy of continuous

improvement to its machines, changes in their technical
features may be made at any time without notice. The
Company accepts no responsibility for discrepancies
which may occur between the specifications of its
machines and the descriptions thereof contained in its
These tractors are designed exclusively for normal
publications.
an typical agricultural operations, following the
operating instructions contained in this manual.
A Dealer is required to carry out certain activities when
THE TRACTOR IS UNSUITABLE FOR USE IN FORE-
supplying a new tractor. These consist of a full pre-
STAL OPERATIONS.
delivery inspection to ensure that the tractor supplied
It may become suitable for such use if a forestal kit
is ready for immediate use, and full instruction in the
is installed which is CE marked and approved and
basic principles of operation and maintenance of the
whose installation is approved by the manufactu-
tractor. These instructions will cover instruments and
rer.
controls, routine maintenance and safety precautions.
The installation and modification of the tractor
All persons who will be concerned with the operation
must be carried out with the highest technical
and maintenance of the machine should be present for
standards by specialised workshops with qualified
these instructions.
personnel. Such workshops must be able to gua-
rantee and attest the risk analysis provided for
in the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC concerning NOTE: The Manufacturer will not accept responsibility
the foreseen and predictable use of the tractor for for any claim resulting from the fitment of non-approved
forestal work and environment, in order to carry parts or attachments, or unauthorized modification or
out all required adaptations of the tractor. This alteration.
specific forestal kit must protect the driver’s seat
from falling and penetrating objects.

Use in any other way is considered as contrary to the

intended use. The Manufacturer of the tractor accepts
no liability for any damage or injury resulting from misu-
se; any resulting risks must be borne solely by the user.

7
 Introduction

WARRANTY CLAIM POST-WARRANTY SERVICE

A correct installation, followed by a regular maintenance, During the warranty period it is advisable to let your Dealer
can do much to prevent malfunctions or breakdowns. If perform every repair and servicing. In this way the Dealer
operation problems should be however encountered du- is able to keep under control operation and performances
ring the warranty period, the warranty should be claimed of your new tractor.
with the following procedure.
In order to obtain the best performances from your tractor,
The Dealer by whom you purchased the tractor should it is important to go on with regular checks and servicing
be promptly informed, stating model and serial number. even after the warranty is expired. Make use of your local
It is most important that there should be no delay, and Dealer for all major tractor services: a trained engineer will
you should realise that, even where the original failure is spot any problems between one service and the next.
covered by warranty, if the failure is not repaired imme-
diately, warranty cover may not apply. Our engineers are regularly trained and updated on the
product, servicing techniques and the use of modern
You should give your Dealer as many information as service tools and diagnostic equipment. They receive
possible, for instance work hours, current type of work regular Service Bulletins, have all Workshop Manuals and
and warning signs. other such technical information to ensure that the repair
It should be noted that normal maintenance services such or service is to the standard required.
as tuning, brake/clutch adjustments, and the supply of
materials used to service the tractor (oil, filters, fuel and
antifreeze) are not covered by terms of the warranty. SAFETY
The safety of the operator is one of the main concerns in
designing and developing a new tractor. Designers build
SPARE PARTS WARNING in as many safety features as possible. However, every
The fitment of parts of inferior quality may not only impair year many accidents occur which could have been avoided
machine performances, but also be dangerous for opera- by a few seconds thought and a more careful approach
tor’s health and safety. The manufacturer of the tractor will to handling farm machinery and implements. Therefore
not take the responsibility for any loss, damage or liability you are required to read through and implement the
resulting from the fitment of such parts, and, if fitted safety instructions detailed in the Safety Notes section
during the normal warranty period, the manufacturer’s of this book.
warranty may be invalidated.

IF YOU MOVE
The Dealer by whom you bought your tractor is sole CAUTION: In some of the illustrations used
responsible for the protection given by your warranty. in this Operator Instruction Book, panels or
We recommend that any repair of your machine should guards may have been removed for clarity.
be made by the Dealer. If you, however, move to another Never operate the tractor without these com-
area or the tractor must momentarily operate in an area ponents in position. If the removal of panels
far from the original Dealer, you should ask your Dealer or guards is necessary to make a repair, they
for name and address of the Dealer nearest to the new MUST be replaced before operation.
work site, so that the warranty is transferred to the latter.
If you moved from the area of your original Dealer without
any arrangements with the new Dealer, the latter will give
you assistance for emergencies, but will charge normal
prices, unless:

a. You make it clear that the warranty has not expired,

and

b. the Dealer making the repair can make the due arran-
gements with the original Dealer.

8
 Safety notes

Chapter 2
Safety notes
2

REGULAR USE

This is an agricultural tractor, whose function consists essentially in traction power. It is therefore specially designed to
push, pull, carry or operate some interchangeable implements for agricultural purpose, or to tow agricultural trailers.

This machine must be driven and operated by an operator suitably instructed, firmly seated and wearing a fastened seat
belt.

This machine is NOT designed:

- To be driven or operated standing or from outside the cab or the operator’s seat, or without a fastened seat belt.
- To lift persons.
- To transport persons, within or outside the cab or the operator’s seat, in any condition (work or road transport).
- To be used in hazardous atmosphere.
- To be used in forestry.
- To be equipped with front loaders if the tractor is not provided with a suitable structure to protect the operator’s seat
from falling and projected objects.

More basic rules

- Keep the cab doors closed while the machine is being used.
- The machine must be used only by a skilled operator who knows perfectly controls and driving technique.
- External controls of hitch and electro-hydraulic power take-off (if equipped) must be operated standing on one side
outside the tractor and keeping oneself out of the overall width of mudguards. It is expressly forbidden to operate the
controls from the rear of the tractor or standing on the inner side of wheels.

WARNING: Improper use of the machine, specially on rough terrain or slopes, can make it tilt over. Pay
particular attention in case of rain, snow, ice or anyway on slippery ground. It may be necessary to step
out of the tractor to check personally ground quality. In the described conditions, always keep the load
as close as possible to the tractor and the ground.

WARNING: Do not try to get off the moving tractor, even if it is overturning, to avoid being crushed un-
der it, but remain seated with the well fastened seat belt and hold firmly the steering wheel.

9
Safety notes

SAFETY ALERT SYMBOLS AND TERMS

This safety symbol means WARNING! BEWARE! YOUR SAFETY IS IN DANGER!

This alert symbol draws your attention on important warnings on the implement, in the manual or anywhere else. Pay
great attention whenever you see this symbol: there is a great danger of serious or deadly injuries. Follow the instruc-
tions given in the warning.

WHY IS SAFETY IMPORTANT FOR YOU?

« ACCIDENTS CAN MAIM and KILL «
« ACCIDENTS COST A HIGH PRICE «
« ACCIDENTS can be AVOIDED «

SAFETY - TRACTOR AND IMPLEMENT

• The tractor is a source of mechanical and hydraulic power.
• This Operator’s Manual is compiled to cover safe working practices that are associated with the basic trac-
tor operation.
• It does not cover all operation and safety instructions relevant to all known implements and attachments that
may be fitted to your tractor in the future.
• All implements connected to the tractor must bear the CE mark (Europe only). All equipment must be accom-
panied by a operation and maintenance handbook, to be read before assembling and using the equipment.
• It is essential that operators use and understand the relevant Operator’s Manual which accompany such im-
plements and attachments not treated in this book.

SAFETY - INTRODUCTION SAFETY - ADVICE FOR THE OPERA-

This safety section of your Operator Instruction Book is TOR
intended to point out some of the basic safety situations It is YOUR responsibility to read and understand the sa-
that may be encountered during the normal operation and fety section in this manual before operating your tractor.
maintenance of your tractor, and to suggest possible ways You must follow these safety instructions that take you
of dealing with these situations. This section is NOT a step by step through your working day. DO NOT USE THE
replacement for other safety practices featured in other MACHINE IF YOU HAVE ANY DOUBTS:
sections of this book.
In reading this section, you will note that illustrations have
Additional precautions may be needed according to the been used to highlight certain situations. Each illustration
implements used and to work conditions in the field or is numbered and the same number appears in the text in
in repair or maintenance areas. The Manufacturer of the parenthesis. This reference number is at the end of the
tractor has no direct control over application, operation, written text concerning the picture and is composed of
inspection, lubrication or maintenance of utility tractor. two digits separated by a dash: the first digit before the
Implementation of correct safety practices in such areas dash identifies the section, the second one the progres-
is therefore YOUR own responsibility. sive number of the picture in the section. (e.g. Fig.2-34
= Figure 34 of Section 2).

Remember that YOU are the only key to safety. Good

safety practices not only protect you, but also the people
around you. Study the features in this manual and make
them a working part of your safety program.

10
 Safety notes

Keep in mind that this safety section is written only for this SAFETY - FOLLOWING A SAFETY
type of machine. Practice all other usual and customary
safe working precautions, and above all - REMEMBER -
PROGRAM
SAFETY IS YOUR RESPONSIBILITY. YOU CAN PREVENT Safe use of the tractor
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH. Only qualified and authorized operators are able to use
farming tractors in safety. To be qualified you must under-
stand the written instructions supplied in this Operator
SAFETY - DANGER, WARNING AND Instruction Book, have training in the work area, and know
CAUTION the safety rules and regulations for the job.
Whenever you see the words and symbols shown below, Some regulations stat, for instance, that no one younger
used in this book and on decals, you MUST take note of than 18 may use machines with engines (according to
their instructions as they relate to personal safety. European directives). Tractors are such machines. It is
your responsibility to know these regulations and comply

DANGER: The symbol and the word DANGER
with them in the area or the situation in which the tractor
is used.
2
indicate an imminently hazardous situation Such regulations include, without limitation, the following
which, if not avoided, will result in DEATH instructions for a safe use of the tractor.
OR VERY SERIOUS INJURY.

WARNING: The symbol and the word WAR- WARNING: The operator must not be under
NING indicate a potentially hazardous influence of alcohol or drugs that can im-
situation. If the instructions or procedures pair his/her coordination or alert conditions.
are not correctly followed, it could result in An operator under prescription for narcotic
DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY IN EXTREME drugs needs a medical certificate stating if
CASES. he/she is able to use the tractor safely.

Take the following precautions:
CAUTION: The word CAUTION indicates a limited risk
situation which, if not avoided, will result in MATERIAL
• Do not allow children or unauthorized persons to drive
or use your tractor. Keep others away from your area
DAMAGES AND/OR MINOR INJURIES. of work.

IMPORTANT: The word IMPORTANT is used to identify

• Fasten your seat belt if the tractor is fitted with an
upright safety frame or a cab.
special instructions or procedures which, if not strictly
observed, could result in damage to, or destruction of the • Whenever possible, do not operate the tractor near
machine, of the work carried out or its surroundings. ditches, pits or holes in the ground. Slow down when
steering, driving on slopes or driving over rough, slip-
pery or muddy terrain.
NOTE:The word NOTE is used to indicate points of parti-
cular interest for more efficient and convenient repair or • Keep clear from slopes too steep to operate safely.
operation.
• Drive carefully, specially on headlands, on road and
around trees.
SAFETY - DECALS • Never let anyone else get on to the tractor or the
implement.
WARNING: DO NOT remove or efface Dan-
ger, Warning, Caution or Instruction decals. • Hitch only to the drawbar and recommended hitch
points. Never hitch above the central line of the rear
Any lost or effaced Danger, Warning, Caution or Instruction axle.
decals must be replaced. Replacement decals are availa-
ble from your Dealer in the event of loss or damage. The
• Operate the tractor smoothly, with no sudden turns,
starts or stops. Apply the parking brake whenever the
actual location of these Safety Decals is illustrated at the tractor is stopped.
end of this section.
If a second-hand tractor has been purchased, refer to • Do not modify or remove any part of the equipment,
and do not use couplings not designed for your trac-
the illustrations at the end of this section to ensure that tor.
all the safety warning decals are in the correct position
and readable.

11
Safety notes

SAFETY - CAB
The safety cab is designed on purpose for this tractor
series and complies with all law requirements concerning
safety and noise level. (Fig.2-1)

The safety cab complies with international safety stan-

dards prescribed by laws in force. It must NEVER be drilled
or modified in order to install accessories or implements.
The cab components MUST NOT be welded, nor repaired
if damaged. Never attach tow chains or ropes to the cab
main frame.

DE LUXE CAB
WARNING: Tractors equipped with De Luxe
cab have a protection (FOPS) against objects
and loads that might fall from above in typi-
Fig.2-1
cal work conditions, but not against objects
and loads that might be projected into the
area normally occupied by the operator.

LOW PROFILE CAB

WARNING: Tractors equipped with Low Pro-
file cab have no protection (FOPS) against
objects and loads that might fall from above
in typical work conditions, as well as no
protection against objects and loads that
might be projected into the area normally
occupied by the operator.

• Seat belts must always be worn and adjusted snugly Fig.2-2

(Fig.2-2).
• From time to time, check the seat belt for damage and
replace it if worn or damaged (Fig.2-2).

WARNING: Always fasten your safety belt.

12
 Safety notes

PRECAUTIONS FOR WORKING IN

SAFETY
Protect yourself
Wear all protective clothing and any personal protection
devices called for by the work conditions. Never take any
risks (Fig. 2-3).
You need the following protective clothing:
- A hard hat.
- Safety goggles or mask.
- Hearing protection.
- Respirator or filter mask.
- Clothing for bad weather.
- Reflective clothing.
- Heavy-duty gloves (neoprene for chemicals, leather for
2
rough work).
- Safety shoes. Fig.2-3

DO NOT wear loose clothing, jewellery or other items

and tie up long hair that could get entangled in controls
or moving parts.

A first aid kit should be available on any work site

(Fig.2-5). - Use safety goggles
- Use a protective mask
WARNING: The tractor is designed and built to avoid - Use protective headsets on all tractors without cab.
any fire risks during normal operation. Therefore, it - Use heavy-duty gloves.
is not provided of a self-extinguishing system or a fire - Use safety footwear.
extinguisher on board as a standard. The tractor is - Use a hard hat.
anyway designed to install a 1 kg dust fire extinguisher
complying with UNI EN 3/7 2004 standard. The fire
extinguisher must be mounted in the reserved and
indicated position (Fig.2-4a & Fig.2-4b) First aid box
The fire extinguisher with its support can be bought If the tractor’s owner or safety manager provides the
as a kit by our Dealers or authorized workshops. The tractor with a first aid box, we recommend storing the
kit consists in a fire extinguisher, support, fastening box in a suitable place when the tractor is not used for a
means, directions for its mounting and a decal to be long time, owing to its highly perishable content.
applied in the indicated area. The decal, when applied,
declares that the tractor may not be used if the ire
extinguisher is not in its place.
It is up to the owner of the farm or to the person
responsible for safety at the farm to judge the oppor-
tunity of using the tractor in areas at high fire risk.
They are also responsible for use of the tractor with
the extinguisher duly mounted.

Fig.2-5
The fire extinguisher position changes according to tractor model

Fig.2-4a Fig.2-4b

13
Safety notes

Know your equipment

Know your tractor. Know how to operate all equipment
on your machine and the implements and attachments
used with it. Know the purpose of all the controls, gauges
and dials. Know the rated load capacity, speed range,
braking and steering characteristics, turning radius, and
operating clearances.

Keep in mind that rain, snow, ice, loose gravel, soft

ground, etc. can change the way your tractor operates..
Under poor conditions, slow down and be extra careful,
engage four-wheel drive, if fitted.

Study the DANGER, WARNING or CAUTION safety Fig.2-6

signs on your tractor and the information signs also.

READ THIS OPERATOR INSTRUCTION BOOK BEFORE

STARTING THE ENGINE.

STUDY IT BEFORE YOU START WORK (Fig. 2-6).

IF THERE IS SOMETHING YOU DO NOT UNDERSTAND,

ASK SOMEONE SPECIALISED (e.g. your Dealer) FOR
EXPLANATION.

IMPORTANT: This manual covers general safe practices

for agricultural tractors. It must always be kept with the
tractor. For further copies contact your Dealer.

Use all available protective devices

Keep all protective devices in place and securely fastened.
Make certain all guards, shields and safety signs are pro-
perly installed, as specified, and are in good condition.

In order to guarantee safety for all bystan-

ders and for yourself, always keep your
tractor in top service condition and check
that the following devices are provided:
• Safety belts complying with law requirements of the • Means to access the driver’s seat.
• Driver’s seat.
various countries.
• Power take-off shields. • Controls.
• Shields against heat. • Operator’s manual.
• Shields and guards against shearing and pinching. • Slow Moving Vehicle emblem (SMV). Additional
• Rear view mirrors. safety guards, lights or decals and a back-up alarm
• Anti-deflagration shields on tubes, if required. (Fig.2-38 and 2-39) (North America).
• Dust filters in the cab
• Decals and pictograms. Know which devices are required for safe operation of
your tractor. Use them. Make sure they are in place and
in good condition. Never remove or disconnect any safety
device.

14
 Safety notes

Check the equipment WARNING: Diesel fuel or hydraulic fluid under

Before you begin your working day, take time to check pressure can penetrate the skin or eyes and
your tractor and ensure that all systems are in good ope- cause serious personal injury, blindness or
rational condition. death. Fluid leaks, under pressure, may not
be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood
• DO NOT smoke while refuelling the tractor. Keep any to find leaks. Never use your bare hand. Wear
type of open flame away (Fig. 2-7).
safety goggles for eye protection. If any fluid
• Check for loose, broken, missing, or damaged parts. is injected into the skin, it MUST be surgically
removed within a few hours by a doctor fami-
Have everything put into good repair. Make certain
all safety devices are in place. liar with this type of injury (Fig. 2-8).

• Check the seat belts for damage: Damaged belts Before applying pressure to the fuel or hydraulic system,
MUST be replaced.

• Ensure that implements and attachments are properly

be sure all connections are tight and that lines, pipes,
and hoses are not damaged. Before disconnecting fuel 2
installed and that the tractor and implement PTO RPM or hydraulic lines, be sure to relieve all pressure.
ratings match.
Make sure that all hydraulic lines are correctly installed
• Check the tires for cuts, bulges and correct pres- and not tangled.
sure. Replace worn or damaged tyres. Check foot
and parking brakes for proper operation. Adjust if
necessary. WARNING: Liquid cooling systems build up
pressure as the engine gets hot. Before remo-
• Stop the engine and wait for it to cool before refuel- ving the radiator cap, stop the engine and let
ling. the system cool.
• Check the engine oil level and add oil if required.
• Check the engine cooling system and add coolant as
• Perform all maintenance procedures outlined in the required.
maintenance and adjustment section of this manual. 

• Check that the PTO drive locking devices are

latched.

• Check that the tractor PTO shield and driveline guards

are in place and operating properly.

• Check the tractor and implement hydraulic system.

Have any leaks or damaged parts repaired or rene-
wed.

• HYDRODYNAMIC SYSTEMS: HOSES Hoses are an

important component in modern machines. Hoses
can change their characteristics in the course of time
because of pressure, vibrations, weather etc. Laws
in force prescribe that hoses are replaced within 6
years from their construction. WE RECOMMEND
COMPLIANCE WITH THIS RULE.

Fig.2-7

WARNING: When auxiliary control valves

are used, their quick couplings can reach
high temperatures. Therefore, safety glo-
ves suitable for such temperatures must be
worn every time the connected implements
are connected to or disconnected from the
couplings.

Fig.2-8

15
Safety notes
Clean the tractor SAFETY - TRACTOR MAINTENAN-
• Keep work surfaces and engine compartments cle- CE
an.
CAUTION: With exception of normal service, as explai-
• Before cleaning the machine, always lower imple- ned in the Maintenance section, all other servicing or
ments to the ground, place transmission in neutral, reparations must be carried out by properly skilled
engage the parking brake, shut off the engine and personnel in authorised workshops.
remove the key.

• Clean steps, pedals and floor. Remove grease or • DO NOT carry out maintenance operations while the
oil. Brush away dust or mud. In winter, scrape away engine is hot or the tractor is moving (Fig.2-9).
snow and ice. Remember - slippery surfaces are
dangerous. WARNING: Hot parts of the machine are suita-
• When plastic parts need to be cleaned (such as con- bly guarded, wherever possible. This does not
exclude, however, that great care should be
sole, instrument panel, monitors, indicators etc), do
not use petrol, paraffin, diluents etc. used when working on the machine, to avoid
They could cause discoloration, cracking or warping burns or scalding.
of the cleaned parts..
These parts should ONLY be cleaned with water, • Before any adjustments or servicing on the electrical
neutral soap and a soft cloth. system, disconnect the battery by operating the mas-
ter disconnect switch (if equipped) or disconnecting
• Remove and store implements, keys, hitches etc. in the cables of the battery. See the section concerning
battery servicing.
their proper places.
• To prevent fire or explosion, do not go with free flames
Protect the environment near the battery or cold starting device. Carefully fol-
• It is illegal to pollute drains, water courses or soil. low the directions for the use of coupling cables to
avoid sparks that may cause an explosion.
Use authorized waste disposal facilities, including
civic amenity sites and garages providing facilities
for disposal of used oil. If in doubt, contact your local • Consult your Dealer for any repairs or adjustments;
authority for advice. such works should be carried out by specialised
workmanship.
• To get to know the correct methods to dispose of • Check regularly that all nuts and bolts are securely
oils, filters, tyres etc. contact your Dealer or the local tightened, specially the nuts in wheel hubs, disks or
agency for waste recycling. rims. Tighten to the prescribed driving torques.

• Only for North America: • Check the oil level at regular intervals and top up
if required.
The safety sheets of each material give information
on chemicals contained in a product, procedures to
use it safely, first-aid and procedure to be followed
• Check the brakes regularly, top up the reservoir
and/or adjust where necessary. Make sure that the
in case of leakage or spills. In all North America such brakes are evenly adjusted, especially when using
safety sheets are available at the Dealer's. a trailer.
Before any maintenance on the machine, refer to
the above mentioned safety sheets for fluids, oils WARNING: When it is necessary to carry out
etc. used in this machine. The sheets inform about service, filling up, cleaning or adjustment
risks and safe maintenance procedures. We strongly operations in places at an height above 1.5
recommend to follow these indications during any
maintenance operations. m (e.g. engine coolant reservoir or cab air
filters, work light lamps etc.) a stable and safe
• Disposal of the tractor: The tractor is made up of mean (e.g. a ladder) is required to reach the
service point.
parts subject to rules and laws for their disposal.
When the tractor is not used any more, it must be
disposed of through proper agencies according to WARNING: Work and road lights can be very
such rules. Do not pollute the environment with the hot and dangerous if on since a long time.
tractor or its parts. Take care to avoid contacts that could cause
burns. If work on these lights is needed, turn
them off and let them cool down.
Always use safety gloves suitable for high
temperatures.

Fig.2-9
16
 Safety notes

If the tractor must be lifted for servicing, take it to a sui-

tably equipped workshop.
Carry out the following operations before any operation
about the tractor: engage the four-wheel drive, the first
gear and the parking brake and put chocks to the wheels
touching the ground.
Before lifting the tractor, avoid its swinging by means of
wooden wedges applied to the front axle (Fig.2-9b): the
chocks must avoid any swinging of the tractor.
Use jack lifts of suitable capacity and apply them at the
centre of the front and rear axles (Fig. 2-9b and Fig.2-9c)
paying due attention to weight distribution.
No decals for the lifting point are applied on the tractor, as
they would be too difficult to apply in the available spaces
2
and would be all too easily removed or effaced during
normal operation of the tractor. Apply the jack lift to the
lifting points (Fig. 2-10a ) according to the type of operation Fig.2-9b
and following the safety procedures given before.

Fig.2-9c
SAFETY - STARTING UP
Warn bystanders before starting the engine.
Before starting, walk around the whole tractor and any
attached equipment. Make sure that no one is under, on,
or close to the tractor or equipment. Let other workers
and bystanders know you are starting up and don’t start
until everyone is clear of the tractor, implements and
towed equipment.

Make sure that everyone, particularly children, is in a

safe position before starting the engine.

Mount and dismount safely.

Always use ‘three point contact’ with the machine, and
face the machine when you mount it. Three point contact Fig.2-10a
means both hands and one foot or one hand and both
feet are in contact with the machine at all times during
mounting and dismounting.

Clean your shoes and wipe your hands before climbing on.
Use handrails, grab handles, ladders or steps (as provided)
when mounting or dismounting.

NEVER use control levers as a hand hold and NEVER step

on foot controls when mounting or dismounting.

NEVER try to go on or off the moving tractor.

17
Safety notes

Safety at starting

WARNING: Make sure that there is enough
ventilation before starting the engine. Never
start the engine in an enclosed space. Exhaust
fumes may cause asphyxiation (Fig.2-10b).

Make sure that the tractor dual brake pedals are locked
together at all times unless you are making turns in the
field which require independent use of the brakes. Make
sure the brakes are properly adjusted so that both brakes
engage at the same time.

Adjust the seat and fasten your seat belt (if applicable, Fig.2-10b
according the description in this book),

Always start the engine from the operator’s seat, after

depressing the clutch pedal, with all the transmission
levers and PTO and auxiliary spool valve control levers
in neutral.

DANGER: The engine must be started with

the ignition key only from the driver’s seat.
DO NOT attempt to start the engine by
shorting across the terminals of the starter
motor. If the starter circuit is bypassed to
neutral, the tractor could start with an en-
gaged gear, with danger of serious injury or
death to bystanders (Fig.2-11).

Fig.2-11

Follow recommended starting procedures.

Follow the starting procedures recommended in the
Operation section of this Operator Instruction Book. This
includes normal starting, cold starting, and the use of
starting fluids.

Overhaul the controls.

After engine ignition, overhaul all instruments and lights.
Be sure that all are operating correctly. If the machine
does not respond properly to controls, DO NOT use it
until the fault is mended.

Make sure that the starter motor solenoid valve fuse is Fig.2-12
always installed.

Starting fluid

CAUTION: Do not inject fluids (ether) to make the

engine easier to start in cold weather. The tractor is
equipped with a cold weather starting system (Fig.2-
12).

Before starting the tractor, make sure that there are no

persons or hindrances in its operating range (Fig.2-13).

Fig.2-13

18
 Safety notes
DIRECTIONS TO AVOID IMPROPER USE OF THE TRACTOR

WORKING IN SAFETY
Do not start the tractor without ensuring a perfect com-
WARNING: An unbalanced tractor could over- mand of speed and steering controls (Fig.2-14).
turn and cause injury or death. If required, put
ballast weights on their front support and on
rear wheels as described in this section of the
Operation chapter. Ballast weights must be used
according to the manufacturer’s directions.
NEVER add extra counterweights to compen-
sate for an overload. It is better to reduce the
load.
2
WARNING: Keep all parts of your body inside
the operator's compartment while operating
the tractor.

Follow the rules when using your tractor.

Make sure your tractor is ready for the job it must do.
Know the rated load capacities of your tractor and never
exceed them. Be certain that any equipment or imple-
ments you intend to use DO NOT exceed the load rating
of your tractor. Be sure the tractor and implement PTO
rev/min match. Fig.2-14

Keep in mind that tractors normally operate on uneven,

unpaved, and often bumpy or sloping surfaces. Operating • Before starting, inspect the work area to establish
the best and safest procedure. Plan your work
conditions can reduce the amount of weight you should so that you drive as straight as possible forward.
carry or pull. Beware of trenches, pits, ditches, slopes, trunks
or stumps, ponds etc. Watch for any possibly
dangerous condition. If you are using a front loader
Follow safe operating practices or foldable implements or implements with high
• Operate the controls smoothly - don't jerk the steering components, watch out for obstacle in the tractor's
wheel or other controls. way.

• DO NOT get on or off a moving tractor. Keep a firm WARNING: Accidental contact with high-volta-
grip on the steering wheel at all times, with the thumbs ge lines causes death. In case of contact with
clear of the spokes when driving the tractor.
high-voltage conductors DO NOT leave the
• Make sure you have adequate clearance in all direc- tractor, but move the tractor and/or the loader
tions for tractor, cab, asfety frame and implement. in such a way as to eliminate the contact and
• NEVER play games with a tractor or equipment. reach a safe distance (Fig.2-15).

• NEVER attempt to work the controls except from the

operator's seat.

• Before getting off the tractor, always disengage the 

PTO, lower all attachments and implements to the  
ground, place the tractor in neutral, engage parking  
brake, shut off the engine and remove the key.


DO NOT touch, lean on, or reach through any implement


mechanism or permit others to do so.



Stay alert. Should something break, come loose, or fail to

operate in your equipment, stop work, shut off the engi-
ne, inspect the machine and have repairs or adjustments
made before resuming operation.

Fig.2-15

19
Safety notes

Beware of other people

• Think about what you are going to do. Never al-
low persons that are not qualified or suitably skilled
to operate your tractor. They could be a danger for
themselves or for others.

WARNING: Your tractor is designed to be ope-

rated by one person. DO NOT allow others to
ride on the tractor or the implement (Fig.2-
16). Never allow anyone to ride on the imple-
ments or other equipment including trailers,
except on certain harvesting equipment, spe-
cifically designed for riders during the actual
harvest operation only (not during transport).
Such equipment must have provision for a
safe riding area. NEVER allow children on a
tractor.

WARNING: Make sure you can safely control

speed and driving direction of the tractor Fig.2-16
before moving it. Start slowly until you are
sure everything is operating regularly. After
starting, turn the steering right and left to
check for correct operation. Check steering
and brake system for operation. If differential
is locked, DO NOT operate at high speed or
turn the tractor until the differential lock is
disengaged.

• Keep others away from your operation area. Never

allow anyone to stand or pass under a raised imple-
ment (Fig.2-17).

• DO NOT lift objects that cannot be contained safely

in the bucket, get the appropriate attachment. Never
allow anyone to stand on the safety frames or fend-
ers.

• When using a loader, avoid sudden stops, starts,

turns, or changes of direction. Keep loads as near
as possible to the ground during transport.
Fig.2-17
• Never stand (or allow anyone else to stand) in front
of, under, or behind loaded or loading equipment.
Never drive a tractor up to someone standing in
front of a fixed object.

WARNING: NEVER lift a load over anyone

(Fig.2-17).

• Keep others away from articulation joints, hitches, WARNING: Footstep tractors equipped with
drawbar, lift arms, PTO drives, cylinders, belts, pul- just a safety frame are never equipped with
leys, and other moving parts. Keep safety guards in an approved sun roof at the factory. If the
place. owner wants to mount a device as protection
from sun or rain, such device must not be a
danger during normal operation or in case of
overturning. Sun roofs normally available on
the market are no protection for the driver
against falling or penetrating objects. The
decal associated to the sun roof indicates that
WARNING: NEVER stand, or allow anyone else it is not a protection against objects falling
to stand between the tractor and implement from above (FOPS).
unless the engine is turned off and the par-
king brake is engaged, a gear is engaged and
all attachments or implements are lowered
to the ground.

20
 Safety notes

Risk of overturning
For your safety, tractors must be equipped with original
safety belts (Fig.2-18).

In case of overturning, hold firmly the steering wheel e DO

NOT try to get off the seat until the tractor has come to
a stop. If the doors are locked, leave the tractor through
the duly indicated emergency exits (Fig.2-18).

To avoid side overturns

• Set the wheel track at the widest setting suitable for
the job being done. 2
• Lock the brake pedals together before driving at
transport speeds.

• Reduce speed to match operating conditions. If the

tractor is equipped with a front-end loader, carry the
bucket and load as low as possible.
Fig.2-18
• Make wide slow turns at reduced speed. DON'T let
your tractor bounce. You may loose steering con-
trol.

• DON'T pull a load too heavy for your tractor. It could

run away on the down slope or the tractor could
jackknife around a towed load.

• DON'T brake suddenly. Apply brakes smoothly and

gradually.

• When going down a slope use the throttle to slow

the tractor engine and use the same gear you would
use to up the slope. Shift into gear before you start
downhill.

• Engage four-wheel drive (if equipped); this will give

greater stability.

WARNING: NEVER disengage the clutch or

attempt to shift gear after you have started Fig.2-19
downhill.

• It is always preferable to travel straight up or down a

steep slope rather than across it.

• Do not overload a front implement or a trailer. Use

suitable counterweights to keep the tractor stable
(Fig.2-20).

• If a load is towed at transport speed, the drawbar

must be locked in central position.

• NEVER use the tractor to round up animals or cat-

tle.

Fig.2-20

21
Safety notes

• Avoid crossing steep slopes if possible. If you

must do so, avoid any holes or depressions on the
downhill side. Avoid any stumps, rocks, bumps or
raised areas on the uphill side. When operating near
ditches or banks, always keep your tractor behind
the shear line (A, Fig.2-22). Avoid ditches, embank-
ments and river banks which might cave in (Fig.2-21).

Fig.2-21 Fig.2-22

• If it is necessary to cross a steep slope, avoid tur-

ning uphill, slow down and make a wide turn. Travel
directly up or down the slope, never across it. When
travelling up or down a slope, keep the heavy end of
the tractor pointed uphill. (Fig.2-23).

• When travelling across a slope with side mounted

implements, keep the implement on the uphill side.
Don't raise the implements. Keep them as low to the
ground as possible when crossing a slope.

• Avoid crossing steep slopes if possible. If you must

do so, avoid any holes or depressions on the downhill
side. Avoid any stumps, rocks, bumps or raised areas
on the uphill side (Fig.2-25).

Fig. 2-25

Fig. 2-24

Fig. 2-23

22
 Safety notes

To avoid rear overturns

WARNING: Hitching to the rear axle, or any
other point above the swinging drawbar, can
cause a rear overturn.

• DO NOT pull anything using the top link connection,

or from any point above the centre line of the rear
axle. Always use an approved drawbar, and only use
a drawbar pin that locks into place.

• High hitching can cause rear overturn, which may

cause serious injury or death. Hitch loads to the
drawbar only.

• If the transversal drilled drawbar mounted on the 2

three-point linkage is used for towing operations on Fig. 2-26
the field, the lower links must be kept in the lowered
position.

• Use front counterweights to increase tractor stability

when towing a heavy load or to counter balance a
heavy rear mounted implement (Fig.2-26).
• DO NOT overload your tractor and DO NOT ballast it
beyond its carrying capacity. Never add ballast weight
to conterbalance an overload. Reduce the load instead
(Fig.2-27).

WARNING: Overload is ALWAYS dangerous.

Check the load capacity of your tractor and
NEVER exceed it (Fig.2-28). See the Technical
Specifications section.

Fig. 2-27

Fig.2-28

23
Safety notes

• Start slowly and increase your speed gradually. DO

NOT rev the engine or drop the clutch. If the tractor
is attached to a heavy load, or immovable object,
improper clutching may cause overturn (Fig.2-30 and
2-31).

• If the front part of the tractor begins lifting, disengage

the clutch at once (Fig.2-29).

• If your tractor is bogged down in mud or frozen to

the ground, DO NOT attempt to drive forwards. The
tractor can rotate around its rear wheels and overturn
(Fig.2-29). Lift any attached implement and attempt
to BACK OUT. If this is not possible, tow it out with
another vehicle.

• If you get stuck in a ditch, BACK OUT, if possible. If

you must go forward, do it slowly and carefully.
Fig.2-29
• When driving on a slope, with or without an implement
mounted on the back, you should drive in reverse when
moving uphill and forward when moving downhill.

• A tractor with a loaded front-end should be backed

down the slope and travel forward uphill. Keep the
loader bucket as low as possible. (Fig.2-31b)

• Always keep the tractor in gear when going downhill.

Never let the tractor coast with clutch disengaged or
transmission in neutral.

Fig.2-30

Fig.2-31

Fig.2-31b

24
 Safety notes

General operating hazards

• Ensure that the PTO shield (1) is in place and that the
cap (2) is fitted when the PTO driveline is not in use
(Fig. 2-32).

• Before connecting, disconnecting, cleaning or

adjusting implements driven by the power take-off,
disengage the PTO, turn the engine off, remove the
ignition key and make sure that the PTO shaft is at
standstill (Fig.2-33).

• Ensure that all the PTO driveline guards are in place

and observe all safety signs (Fig. 2-33).

• Make sure that everyone stands clear of the tractor 2

before engaging the PTO. During stationary use of
your tractor, always shift the gear lever, the reverse
shuttle and the ranges to neutral, engage the parking
brake and secure the wheels of tractor and implement
with wooden wedges or chocks.

• When operating mobile PTO driven equipment, never

leave the tractor seat until the PTO drive is disengaged,
the transmission is in neutral, the parking brake is Fig.2-32
engaged, the engine shut off and the key removed.

• DO NOT use PTO adaptors, reducers or extensions as

they extend the PTO coupler and universal joint out
beyond the protection offered by the PTO shield.

• The top link and lift rods must not be extended beyond
the point where threads begin to show.

DANGER: NEVER attempt to unplug the

hydraulic connections, or adjust an imple-
ment with the engine running or the PTO
drive in operation. There is a great danger of
serious or deadly injuries (Fig.2-34).

• When using chemicals, carefully follow the chemical

manufacturer's instructions for use, storage and dispo-
sal. Also follow the chemical application equipment
manufacturer's instructions.

• When operating under poor visibility conditions, or Fig.2-33

in the dark, use your tractor field lights and reduce
your ground speed. (DO NOT use your field lights
when travelling on a roadway because rear pointed
white lights are illegal except when reversing and
may confuse following drivers).

• Operate your tractor with the wheels set at the widest

setting possible, consistent with the particular task
you are performing. To adjust wheel settings refer to
Maintenance and Adjustment section.

• Reduce your speed when operating over rough or

slippery ground and when foliage restricts your view
of hazards.

• DO NOT make sharp turns at high speed.

Fig.2-34

25
Safety notes
Implements and attachments

WARNING: Use exclusively front loader ap-

proved by the tractor’s manufacturer, with CE
mark and parallelogram type. The installation
and modification of the tractor must be car-
ried out with the highest technical standards
by specialised workshops with qualified
personnel. Such workshops must be able to
guarantee and attest the risk analysis provi-
ded for in the Machinery Directive 2006/42/
EC concerning the foreseen and predictable
use of the tractor with front loader, in order
to carry out all required adaptations of the Fig.2-35
tractor. Use the front loader and all supplied
equipment as prescribed by the loader’s ope-
WARNING: When a tractor with safety frame
rator manual.
is equipped with a front loader, there is a re-
sidual risk due to incorrect and improper us
IMPORTANT: Keep the loader’s operation manual together
of the implement. The risk is due to objects
with the tractor’s manual, always at hand in the storage
falling from above. THE OPERATOR HAS NO
compartment of the tractor. Before driving or operation
PROTECTION AGAINST SUCH DANGER.
your tractor, it is mandatory to read this manual very ca-
refully, with special attention to the chapter concerning To reduce the risk:
safety rules. - Use only loaders equipped with load self-leveling
system, commonly defined as parallelogram type.
WARNING: Use of the front loader and of the - Use only implements that are specifically dedi-
tractor equipped with front loader, if not cor- cated to the work to be done. Strictly follow all
rectly carried out, and handling not secured directions and warnings mentioned by the loader
loads constitute a serious danger for the ope- handbook.
rator and everyone standing by, due to possi- - Use the tractor and implement carefully. Drive on
ble objects falling from above. (Fig. 2-35) flat ground and avoid holes, ditches and trenches.
Do not turn, start or stop abruptly.
• Three-point hitch and side mounted implements make - If a front loader is mounted, it is advisable to use
a much larger arc when turning than towed equipment.
Make certain to maintain enough clearance for safe a tractor with cab or with a 4-post frame with FOPS
turning. safety system. The loader installer should carefully
• To use mounted, semi-mounted or towed equipment analyze all risks and make all required adjustments.
and trailers it is required to use exclusively CE marked
implements, after reading their operation handbooks
carefully, giving maximum attention to risks connected
with their association to the tractor.
• Implements must be hitched to the tractor by means
of the three-point linkage. It is therefore necessary to
check couplings for compatibility according to their
classes.
The implement has to be fitted with suitable supports
in order to avoid tipping or accidental shifting during
hitching.
Always check three-directional fastening to the tractor
of the mounted or semi-mounted implement, to avoid
dangerous swinging and shaking during transport and
work that could jeopardize the stability of the tractor-
implement assembly.
• The cardan shaft must be always CE-marked and
suitable to tractor-implement coupling. Follow all
directions of the operation manual, concerning both
the fastening according to connection direction and
safety rules to avoid rotation of protections (chains)
and overlaying of the telescopic tubes. Also keep
articulation angles.
• Hitch loads to the drawbar only. Towing or attaching
Fig. 2-36
to other locations may cause the tractor to overturn
(Fig.2-36)
• Improper use of the drawbar, even if correctly posi-
tioned, can cause a rear overturn.
• DO NOT overload an attachment or towed equipment.
Use proper counterweights to maintain tractor stability.
Hitch heavy loads to the drawbar only.

26
 Safety notes

• Check for correct coupling between tow hook and

trailer. See the Towing Attachments chapter.
• Use ballast weight as recommended. NEVER add more
ballast to compensate a higher load than allowed.
Reduce load.
• Only North American markets. A safety chain will
help control drawn equipment should it be acciden-
tally separated from the drawbar while transporting.
Using the proper adaptor parts, attach the chain to
the tractor drawbar support or other specified anchor
location. Provide only enough slack in the chain to
permit turning. See your Dealer for a chain with a
strength rating equal to, or greater than the gross
weight of the towed machine (Fig.2-37).
2
Fig.2-37
Road transport
Before operating your tractor on a public road, a number
of precautions must be taken.

• Family yourself - and comply - with all local bye-laws,

and national laws appropriate to your tractor.
• Lock both brake pedals together.
• Raise all implements to their transport position and
lock them in place.
• Place all implements into their narrowest transport
configuration.
• Disengage the PTO and differential lock.
• Make sure tractor and equipment are equipped with
slow moving vehicle (SMV) signs or beacon if the
law requires them (Fig.2-38 and 2-39).
• Make sure any required clearance flags or hazard
lights are in place and in working order.
• Make sure you use a proper safety hitch pin with a
safety clip retainer.
• Clean off all reflectors and road lights, front and rear,
and be certain they are in working order.
• Three-point hitch and implements jutting out from
Fig.2-38 - Use the symbol in force in your country
the sides make a much larger arc when turning than
towed equipment. Make certain to maintain enough
clearance for safe turning.

Road circulation rules

Before operating your tractor on a public road, a number
of precautions must be taken.

WARNING: DO NOT allow any passengers on

the tractor or towed equipment.

• Know the route you are going to travel.

• Use the prescribed lights or, if required, the rotating
beacon, both in the daytime and in the night-time
(Fig.2-39).
• North America - Use regulation lights and blinking
hazard lights when travelling on road.
• Use caution when towing a load at transport speeds
especially if the towed equipment is NOT equipped
with brakes.
• Observe all local or national regulations regarding the
road speed of your tractor.
• Use extreme caution when driving on snow-covered
or slippery roads.

Fig.2-39

27
Safety notes

• Wait for traffic to clear before entering a public

road.
• Beware of blind intersections. Slow down until you
have a clear view.
• DO NOT attempt to pass at any intersection.
• Slow down for turns and curves.
• Make wide, gentle turns.
• Signal your intent to slow, stop or turn.
• Shift to a lower gear before going up or downhill.
(Fig.2-40)
• Keep tractor in gear. Never coast with the clutch
disengaged or transmission in neutral (Fig.2-40).
• Check for correct coupling between power steering
on the tractor and corresponding system on the
tractor.
• STAY OUT of the path of oncoming traffic.
• Drive in your correct lane keeping as near to the curb
as possible.
• If traffic builds up behind you, pull off the road and
let it go by.
• Drive defensively. Anticipate what other drivers might
do.
• When towing a heavy load, start braking sooner than
Fig.2-40
normal and slow down gradually.
• Watch out for overhead obstructions (bridges, trees
etc.).

SAFETY - AFTER USE

Always stop the tractor safely (DO NO park the tractor on

a slope). Engage the parking brake, engage the Park-Lock
(if equipped), disengage the PTO, engage the lowest gear,
lower any implement to the ground, stop the engine and
remove the ignition key BEFORE leaving the driver’s seat
(Fig.2-41).

Fig.2-41

28
 Safety notes

Further notes On loose soil, wheel slip can exceed 12%.

If wheel slip is found to be greater than this amount,

The following notes are designed to complete the Opera- proceed with care as operating conditions might
tion and Maintenance Manual to ensure that your tractor quickly become unstable and cause early tyre wear.
always works safely, reliably and efficiently.
In certain conditions, it might be better to add ballast
Tractors are mainly designed for towing implements that in order to reduce wheel slip, but this increases the
workload of the transmission and thus reduces the
are held by a drawbar or three-point linkage or for driving working life of the tractor.
implements using the PTO.
Read the operation handbook or ask your Dealer who
To obtain the greatest possible towing force, particularly will be able to help you ascertain the maximum ballast
when using a tractor with dual rear wheels, you should weight you can use in normal working conditions.
observe the following rules concerning axle loads and
wheel slip.
Using dual wheels or wider tyres, the tractor will have 2
greater grip but the workload on the transmission will
also be greater in dry and difficult soil conditions.
If an extra implement is attached, the extra loads must
conform to the specifications given in the Manual or by Dual wheels or wider tyres can sometimes be
mounted for use on slippery or sandy terrain but the
your dealer. axle weight on hard, dry surfaces must be limited as
the greater grip provided by wider tyres can damage
1. Front axle payload: 4WD tractors. the transmission.
The front axle normally bears 40% of the tractor The only torque limiter in transmission is wheel
weight on the road without implements; it may thus slip.
be necessary to add an extra weight on the front end
to ensure that the front axle has traction. 4. Front axle lead when four-wheel drive is en-
gaged.
If an implement is mounted on the front end of the
tractor, check the weight of the fully loaded implement In a 4WD tractor, the ground speed of the front wheels
by placing the front axle on a scale: the maximum must be slightly greater than that of the rear wheels,
axle load must be less than the capacity of the front in order to ensure traction.
axle.
The front wheel advance must be preferably between
Check the maximum payload capacity of the front 1% and 4%, at an rate not over 5%.
axle (maximum weight allowed on it) in your Opera-
tion and Maintenance Manual). Greater percentages may be used only on very soft
ground.
2. Rear axle payload.
The tyres supplied with your tractor have been checked
The maximum permissible payload for the rear axle for the correct advance of the front wheels, but when
depends on whether or not the tractor is carrying a you change them, make sure you use tyres of the
weight or towing a load. same make and size in order to maintain the same
speed ratio between front and rear wheels.
When the tractor is only carrying a load, without tow-
ing, the wheels must have sufficient capacity that is If tyres of different makes are used, their size and
ensured if the tyres are of the exact size and have internal pressure may modify this ground speed ratio,
the specified number of plies. or advance. This could increase the load on the front
axle and lead to unacceptable operating conditions,
In certain conditions, extra weight may be applied to excessive tyre wear and, in extreme conditions, dam-
the rear axle but it is not normally necessary unless age to the front axle or to the transmission.
the ground offers very little grip.
Changes in the weight of the tractor, in the pressure
When fully loaded, the weight of the tractor must be or size of the tyres can cause the tyres themselves
less than the maximum permissible ballasted weight to bounce. This is not only annoying for the driver
since the tractor cannot be loaded right up to the in the cab, but it can also cause a loss of grip and
maximum static payload for each of the axles, front excessive wear in the transmission unit.
and rear, at the same time.

3. Ballast and wheel slip.

Wheel slip must be measured for the tractor to oper-

ate efficiently during tillage.

On normal terrain in good operating conditions, wheel

slip should be between 4 and 10%.

29
Safety notes

5. Economy PTO.
As shown in the Operation and Maintenance Manual, 9. Operating a dry-disc clutch.
the economy PTO on large tractors is a feature that Most tractors with a manual gearshift are equipped
makes it possible to use the PTO at standard speed with a dry-disc clutch for changing gear.
using lower engine RPM rates.
Since the clutch slips every time the gear is changed,
This feature can only be used when the implements it can cause a certain amount of wear and thus cre-
powered by the PTO are to be used only for light ate heat. To ensure long life for the clutch, it is thus
operations, such as for sprinklers or rakes, which advisable to reduce the load of the tractor and reduce
require less than 30 H.P. engine speed when starting up the tractor from a
standing position.
The economy PTO does not need to use the maximum
power of the engine but it is designed to save fuel. Prolonged slipping at high engine speed with large
loads will cause the clutch disc to heat up, thereby
When using the Economy PTO, make sure that the reducing its working life.
implement input shaft RPM NEVER exceeds the
recommended RPM for the implement, e.g. max. 10. Further instructions for the operator.
610 RPM for a 6 spline shaft (540 RPM), and max. The Operation and Maintenance Manual provides
1170 RPM for a 21 spline shaft (1000 RPM). instructions to ensure that the tractor is always used
in safe conditions.
6. Working on slopes.
The Operation and Maintenance Manual provides If your tractor is also driven by other people, make sure
information on using the tractor on slopes in a safe that they are fully aware of these accident prevention
manner instructions.

It is also important to note that, when working on It is forbidden to carry anyone on the outer structure
very steep slopes, the lubrication conditions in the of the tractor in any circumstances.
transmission may be reduced. This is caused by
the oil flowing towards the front or rear part of the This is because the safety frame that protects against
transmission unit. overturning is only designed to protect persons inside
the cab or roll-over protection structure.
Special measures and extra lubrication may be re-
quired when using the tractor under extreme condi- 11. Chemical filters for the cab.
tions. Use of a filter with chemical absorbent in air-condi-
tioned cabs can increase the degree of protection in
Your dealer will be able to assist you if you expect to certain applications.
work on slopes of over 15°.
PERSONAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT MAY BE
7. Remote hydraulic controls. HOWEVER NECESSARY WHEN USING CHEMICAL
The hydraulic system of the tractor may be used in SUBSTANCES.
some particular applications to operate the hydraulic Wash the tractor and driver’s seat accurately according
motors. to the directions on the product label.

When using these applications, note that the hydraulic ALWAYS follow the instructions on the labels of the
motors can generate considerable heat and the oil chemical substances and on the filters to be used.
cooling system of the tractor may not be sufficient
when these high-power hydraulic motors are used. 12. Battery
For detailed information, see the sections Maintenan-
Some remote applications have an extra cooling sys- ce - Electric system.
tem. However, every time they are used, make sure
that the oil is cooled and filtered sufficiently in order
to avoid damage to the tractor's hydraulic system.

8. Towing heavy loads (trailers, etc.)

When heavy loads are towed, the road rules in some
countries require a supplementary braking system
(e.g. air or hydraulic trailer brakes).

Check with your dealer possible additional require-

ments for special spplications

30
 Safety notes

Risks deriving from exposure to Other effects

noise Noise does not just determine aural sensation. For levels
Noise characteristics and measurement exceeding* 70 dBA, it causes stress by means of the
Noise is a pressure variation in an elastic medium, gener- cerebral integration centers and determines a specific
ally the air, produced by the vibration of a material body neurovegetative reaction responsible for effects that lead
(source) that determines an undesired and often annoying to cardiocirculatory and gastroenteric diseases.
acoustic sensation. Noise is mainly characterized by: Amongst these, it is worthwhile noting: an increase in
• sound intensity or level: expresses the entity of the gastric acidity, a decrease in the heart rate, visual range
and reflex speed; a sensation of discomfort and weariness
pressure variation due to the sound wave. Measured in
decibels (dB), it doubles the sound intensity and, thus, with an increased sense of fatigue.
the energy that reaches the ear. These effects are dangerous because they also increase
• the risk of accidents.
frequency: expresses the number of pressure varia-
tions of the wave per second and is measured in Herz 2
(Hz) - acute noises have high frequencies (2000-4000 Hz Personal equipment to protect
or more) while low-pitched noises have low frequencies against noise
(250 Hz or less). Individual protective equipment attenuates the sound
energy transmitted to the ear through the air.
How the risk is evaluated This equipment is used when dangerous exposure cannot
The higher the sound level and exposure time, the greater be avoided in any other way.
the noise risk will be. There are different types of devices with different attenuat-
Two parameters are used: ing capacities: helmets, ear muffs, ear plugs (Fig. 2-42).
• LAeq (Equivalent continuous weighted level A): this Helmets and headsets have the highest dampening ca-
is a sound level measurement that takes into account pacity and their use is mandatory when working off road
noise fluctuations and the varying sensitivity of the ear and noise is over the above limits.
to the frequencies: LAeq is measured with a sound-level Earplugs are generally better tolerated and are particularly
meter; useful for prolonged exposition to lower noise levels.
• PEL (Personal Exposure Level): this is a measurement
that takes the various noise levels into account along CAUTION: It is prescribed that suitable personal
with the time the worker remains on the individual hearing protection be used if exposed every day to a
machines or working at determined processes: PEL noise level equal or higher than 85 dBA.
is calculated mathematically.
Consult the “Technical specifications” section of
this manual in relation to tractor noise measured
Noise pathologies in instantaneous conditions in compliance with the
Damage to the hearing laws in force.
Noise causes hypacusia or deafness because it destroys
the acoustic receptors, nervous cells able to transform the CAUTION: Do not open the windscreen, the doors or
mechanical sound vibrations into nervous impulses that, the side and rear windows during work. The noise
on reaching the brain, determine the aural sensation. in the cab could rise to such level as to oblige the
These receptors are irreplaceable if they are destroyed and operator to wear headsets or other individual pro-
the resulting damage is irreversible: hypacusia worsens if tection against noise.
exposure to noise continues and does not improve even
if this terminates.
Moreover, it is also bilateral since it can be accompanied
by annoying buzzing and whistling sounds, and by intoler-
ance to loud noise.
The damage is insidious since it proceeds slowly and
unexpectedly: in the initial phase, when it is limited to a
diminished ability to perceive acute sounds (music, bells)
or the spoken voice when there is a background noise, it
can only be detected by means of an audiometric test.
Pulsating noises of great intensity lasting a very short time
are highly damaging since the ear is unable to actuate any
physiological protective measures in time.
Hypacusia from noise generally arises after several years
of exposure and depends on the PEL (risk almost null
below 80 dBA) and on individual characteristics. It is an
incurable disease: the only efficacious means of protec-
tion against it is prevention.

31
Safety notes
POSITIONS OF THE SAFETY DECALS
All markets (North America excluded)
WARNING: Decals must be always readable. Failing this, ask your Dealer for new ones.

Fig.2-43 Position on tractors with cab

DECAL 1 DECAL 3
WARNING: Very hot surfaces.
The hands and fingers could be
WARNING: Danger of entangle-
scorched. Keep well clear of hot
ment. Keep hands well clear of
parts. Keep at a safe distance.
fan blades when engine is run-
Keep all guards mounted when
ning. Keep guards and screens
the engine is running. in place.

DECAL 2 DECAL 4

WARNING: Danger of entangle- DANGER: Hot steam or water jets.

ment. Keep hands well clear Protect your face. Radiator under
of moving parts and be careful pressure when engine is hot. Re-
not to get caught up in belts or move cap with caution only when
pulleys when engine is on. Keep engine is cold.
guards in place.

32
 Safety notes
DECAL 5 DECAL 10

DANGER: Risk of WARNING: Risk of electrocution.

being crushed. DO Always disconnect the negative
NOT short across lead before the positive lead
starter terminals when removing the battery or
to start the engine. servicing the electrical system.
This operation could
put your life at risk.
Start engine only
from driving seat.

DECAL6 DECAL 11

WARNING: DANGER:The tractor could over- 2

Risk of electrocution. turn and crush the chest. Hold
Always disconnect firmly on to the steering wheel
the negative terminal if the tractor is overturning. DO
of the battery before NOT leave your seat or jump off
removing the sole- the tractor.
noid cover and before
servicing the electrical
system.

DECAL 7
DECAL 12
WARNING: Very hot surfaces.
The hands and fingers could be WARNING:Danger of being cru-
scorched. Keep well clear of hot shed. In tractors with cab, always
parts. Keep at a safe distance. fasten your seat belt.
Keep all guards mounted when
the engine is running.

DECAL 8 DECAL 13
(If Equipped with Ground Speed Only with electronic hitch.
Sensor)
DANGER: Risk of blows and se-
WARNING:DO NOT stare directly rious accidents. Keep to one side
into the real ground speed sensor. of the tractor when using external
Keep yourself at a safe distance lift controls. NEVER STAND betwe-
from the sensor unit. en tractor and implement - you
could be hit by the implement.

DECAL 14
DECAL 9 (If equipped with a front hitch -
Located near the multi-purpose
WARNING: Danger of being control valve)
crushed. Enter or leave the
tractor through the left-hand WARNING: Before operating
door. If entering or leaving the the multi-valve, read the safe-
tractor through the right-hand ty and operating instructions
door, avoid any contact with in your Operator’s Manual.
control levers.

33
Safety notes

DECAL 20
DECAL 15
WARNING: Risk
DANGER: Risk of entanglement. of damage to the
Keep clear of rotating shafts. Be tractor compo-
careful NOT to get caught up by nents. (In particular,
the cardan shaft of the PTO drive- the circuit of the
line. Keep all guards in place on suspended front
the transmission shafts on the axle, if equipped).
tractor and implements. Before servicing, it is
essential for you to
have read through
the warnings and the
instructions in the
DECAL 16 Operator’s Manual.
Only with electronic power lift.
DECAL 21
DANGER: Risk of blows and seri- Located near the front hitch (if
ous accidents. Keep to one side of equipped).
the tractor when using external lift
controls. NEVER STAND between DANGER:Beware of hanging lo-
tractor and implement - you could ads. Keep at a safe distance to
be hit by the implement. avoid being hit or crushed.

DECAL 17

WARNING: Risk of being cru-

shed. DO NOT allow any passen-
ger to sit on the fenders or on
any other part of the tractor or
towed implements.
DECAL 22
Provided by the front PTO maker. (If
equipped with Front PTO)

WARNING: Keep yourself at a

DECAL 18 safe distance. Speed (rpm) and
spinning of the front PTO shaft.
DANGER: Danger of being cru-
shed. Always pull the parking bra-
ke lever and engage the Park Lock
(if equipped) when you stop the
tractor and before getting off it.

DECAL 19

WARNING: Take care. Read this

book through before using the
machine. Read the directions
for a safe usage with the greatest
attention.

34
 Safety notes

Decal 25

WARNING: General warning. Turn off

the engine and remove the ignition
key before any servicing operations
Decal 23
and before getting off the machine for
WARNING: Use individual protections during work, any reason.
such as overalls, heavy duty gloves and safety foo-
twear.

Decal 26
2
WARNING: Danger of liquid under
pressure being ejected from hydraulic
circuits.
Decal 24

WARNING: Tractors with cab have no protection

against harmful substances and dusts (protection level
1). If the tractor is used in dusty environment and to
spray phytosanitary products or chemicals generally
thought of as hazardous to health, the operator must
wear individual protections (mask, goggles) suitable Decal 27
to the harmfulness of the actual product used.
WARNING: Emergency exit indication.

Decal 29
LOW PROFILE CAB

WARNING: Tractors equipped

with Low Profile cab have no
protection (FOPS) against objects
and loads that might fall from
above in typical work conditions,
Decal 28 as well as no protection against
(If equipped with a Auto Speed transmission) objects and loads that might be
projected into the area normally
WARNING:Danger of being crushed. If you leave the occupied by the operator.
tractor while the engine is running ALWAYS put the
transmission into NEUTRAL. To put the transmis-
sion in NEUTRAL, press and hold both gear selec-
tion switches down (for about 3 seconds).

Decal
Used only when the fire extinguisher
is mounted (supplied as kit).

WARNING: General warning. Po-

sition where the fire extinguisher
and its support are placed. The fire
extinguisher must be in this position
during work.

35
Safety Notes

POSITIONS OF THE SAFETY DECALS

(North American Tractors)
WARNING: Decals must be always readable. Failing this, ask your Dealer for new ones.

DECAL 1 DECAL 2
WARNING WARNING
Warning: Very hot sur- Keep your hands well
faces. clear of the fan blades
Do not remove any guards when the engine is run-
to avoid injuries. ning.

Beware hot parts

Keep hands clear of fan

and belts while engine
is running.

To avoid personal in- WARNING

jury, keep all shields,
covers and guards in High pressure steam and
place while engine is hot water.
running.
Remove filler cap with
extreme care.

DECAL 3

High pressure and hot water. Remove the plug with caution
when the engine is cold.

36
 Safety Notes

DECAL 8
DANGER WARNING
Serious personal injury Choose a suitable PTO
Start only from seat or machine damage
with transmission and may result from over- speed for the use of the
PTO in neutral. speed of PTO driven
equipment. implement.
Starting in gear kills. Select tractor PTO speed
to match implement
specified speed.
DECAL 4 Do not operate PTO
above recommended
maximum speed.
Risk of being crushed. ONLY start the
engine when you are sitting in the driver's
Nominal
540
Maximum
630
2
seat. 1000 1170

DECAL 9
WARNING WARNING Only with electronic lift
Remove negative ca-
bles from batteries
Keep at a safe distance
before removing sole- from the tractor when using
noid cover and before external lift controls.
servicing the electrical
system.

DECAL 5 Stand clear when

using switch to
Danger of electric shock. Always discon- move 3-point
nect the negative cable from the battery hitch.
before carrying out any repairs on the
electrical system.

WARNING
DANGER

Shield Explosive Avoid sparks Sulphuric

eyes gas and flame acid Serious personal injury or ma-
EXPLOSIVE GASES POISON causes severe burns chine damage may result from
Always shield eyes and face from bat- overspeed of PTO driven equip-
tery. Cigarettes, flames or sparks could Contains sulphuric acid. Avoid contact
cause battery to explode. with skin, eyes or clothing. ment.
Do not charge or use booster cables or In event of accident flush with water Never use the 1000 rpm set-
adjust post connections without proper and call a physician immediately.
instructions or training. Keep out of reach of children. ting with the 6 spline shaft
installed.
DECAL 6
DECAL 10
Batteries produce explosive gases. Keep clear of sparks and
naked flames. A PTO used at a speed over the max. allowed might
KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN. cause serious accidents.

DECAL 7
WARNING
Always fasten your safety belt.
DO NOT leave your seat if the
tractor overturns.

USE SEAT BELT.

Keep seat belt adjusted snugly

DECAL 11
(If equipped with a front hitch - Located near the
multi-purpose control valve)

Read the Operator's Manual carefully before using.

Do not jump if
tractor tips

37
Safety Notes

CAUTION
WARNING
Personal injury could result from PTO driveline separation.
1. Drawbar supplied provides standard distance “A”. Do not change. DECAL 15
PTO SHAFT SIZE DISTANCE “A”
540 35mm (1.38 in) 356mm (14.0 in) WARNING: Consult the opera-
1000 35mm (1.38 in) 406mm (16.0 in) Read the operator instruc-
tion Book for safety in-
tion and maintenance manual
2. Three-point link distance “C” and mounter implement distance “D” may not be formation and operating for information about safety and
standard. instructions.
how to use the tractor.
Measure distance “B” over complete lift range for
tractor and implement combination. Select driveline Fasten your seat belt be-
length to ensure that driveline will not bottom out at fore tractor operation.
minimum distance “B” and will have sufficient overlap
at maximum distance. Start engine only when
seated in operator’s seat.

Make sure everyone is

clear of tractor and equip-
DECAL 12 ment before starting en-
gine or operation.

Warning: Separation of the PTO drive line might cause seri- Keep all shields, covers
and guards in place and
ous accidents. Adjust the connections carefully. stay away from moving
parts while engine is run-
ning.

Place transmission shift

lever in neutral and apply
parking brake before us-
ing external 3-point hitch
controls.

DANGER DANGER Apply parking brake,

lower equipment, stop
engine and remove key
before leaving the tractor
unattended.

Wait for all movement to

stop before servicing trac-
tor or equipment.

Securely support or block

lifted implements which
Pull only from ap- Rotating driveline con- must be in the raised
position for servicing or
proved drawbar or tact may cause serious adjustment.
lower links of 3-point injury or death.
Keep all driveline, tractor Couple brake pedals to-
linkage at horizontal gether for road travel.
and equipment shields in
position or below.
place during operation. Use flashing warning
lights and SMV emblem
when on public roads,
except where prohibited
by law.
DECAL 13
Always drive with care and
attention.
Only use an approved drawbar to tow implements.
Danger of entanglement: Keep well away from spin-
ning shafts.

DECAL 14

Use the turn indicator to

signal a change in your drive
DECAL 16
direction.
Provided by the front PTO maker. (If equipped with
front PTO).

WARNING: Keep yourself at a safe distance.

Speed (rpm) and spinning of the front PTO shaft.

38
Controls - Cab

Section 3
Controls - Cab 3

39
Controls - Cab

TRACTOR ACCESS

WARNING: Do not jump on or off the tractor. Cab Door Lock

It may cause injuries. Always face the tractor,
use the hand rails and steps, and get on or
The ignition key is also used to lock or unlock the cab
off slowly. Maintain a minimum three point
door from the outside.
contact to avoid falling (both hands on rails
and one foot on the step, or one hand on the
hand rail and both feet on the steps).

When entering or leaving the tractor, use the left-hand

door whenever possible. If you enter or leave the tractor
Cab emergency exit
through the right-hand door, avoid interference with the
The rear window of the cab may be used as an emer-
control levers.
gency exit.

Access to the tractor with cab

WARNING: Do not jump on or off the tractor.

It may cause injuries. Always face the tractor,
use the hand rails and steps, and get on or
off slowly. Maintain a minimum three point If you have to get out the cabin an emergency and it is
contact to avoid falling (both hands on rails not possible to use the left door: turn the engine off,
and one foot on the step, or one hand on the open the rear door by means of the central handle and
hand rail and both feet on the steps). get out quickly.

40
 Controls - Cab

Operator present sensor

The seat cushion acts as a switch. The moment no load is
sensed (the operator’s own weight) an alarm sounds.

WARNING: To warn the operator of incorrect

usage, the tractor has an automatic alarm
system that sounds when the operator is not
correctly seated in driving position while the
machine is being used.

In all machines, both with mechanic and hydraulic

gearbox, this alarm sounds whenever the operator
leaves his/her seat without turning off the engine, and
is silenced only after engaging the parking brake and
shifting the gear to neutral.
3
Machines with hydraulic reverse shuttle are equipped
with a further restraint that acts (whenever the opera-
tor gets off his/her seat without turning off the engi-
ne) with inhibition of forward and reverse hydraulic
clutches if the tractor is at standstill. If the tractor is
moving, the system inhibits the same clutches as soon
as the neutral position of the reverse shuttle lever is
sensed: in such a condition it is therefore required to
shift the shuttle in neutral to stop the tractor.

WARNING: Do not tamper with this component

in any way.

Contact your Dealer immediately if the system is not

operating correctly.

41
Controls - Cab

SEAT

WARNING: Do not adjust the seat while driving. Loss of control and injury can result.

Mechanical suspension seat - Tractors with cab

NOTE: The standard mechanical seat is offered as option for ROPS (footstep) tractors with waterproof cover.

1 2

1. FORE/AFT ADJUSTMENT CONTROL - 4. WEIGHT ADJUSTMENT CONTROL AND WEIGHT

Lift lever and adjust seat as required, release lever to lock INDICATOR - Without the operator in the seat, turn the
in position. knob as required, until the operator's weight is displayed
in the indicator.
2. BACK REST ADJUSTMENT CONTROL - Lift control
to tilt the back rest as required, release lever to lock in WARNING: To avoid injuries, the operator's
position. weight setting should be checked and ad-
justed to the operator before starting the
3. HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT CONTROL - Grasp the seat and tractor.
lift it to the required height. To lower it, raise the seat and
move it beyond the upper end stop, then lower to the
required height.

42
 Controls - Cab

5 6

10

5. ARMRESTS - Raise or lower armrests. 9. CUSHION TILT ADJUSTMENT (Deluxe seat only) - Lift
lever to adjust seat cushion tilt angle.
6. BACK REST REMOVAL/HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT (if
equipped) - Raise or lower the back rest to the required 10. CUSHION FORE/AFT ADJUSTMENT (Deluxe seat
height. Pull up past end stop to remove the back rest. only) - Lift lever to adjust seat cushion depth.

7. LUMBAR ADJUSTMENT CONTROL - Turn the adjust-

ment knob as required.

8. SWIVEL ADJUSTMENT CONTROL (only Deluxe seat) -

Lift the lever to adjust the seat as required.

NOTE: There is no fore/aft adjustment in the offset posi-

tions.

43
Controls - Cab

Air suspension seat - Tractors with cab

1. FORE/AFT ADJUSTMENT CONTROL - Lift lever and 5. HEIGHT & WEIGHT ADJUSTMENT CONTROL - Lift and
adjust seat as required, release lever to lock in position. release for automatic weight adjustment. Lift and hold to
raise, or push and hold to lower.
2. ARMRESTS - Raise or lower armrests.
NOTE: Seat must be lowered before the automatic weight
3. BACK REST ADJUSTMENT CONTROL - Lift control to adjustment can be made.
tilt as required. Release the lever to lock in position.
IMPORTANT: Never operate the compressor for longer
4. SWIVEL ADJUSTMENT CONTROL (only Deluxe seat) - than 1 minute.
Lift the lever to adjust the seat as required.
WARNING: To avoid injuries, the operator's
NOTE: There is no fore/aft adjustment in the offset posi- weight setting should be checked and ad-
tions. justed to the operator before starting the
tractor.

6. ISOLATOR CONTROL - Move control from rear to front

(position 1) for float. Move control from front to rear (posi-
tion 2) to lock.

44
 Controls - Cab

10

11

12

7. CUSHION TILT ADJUSTMENT (Deluxe seat only) - Lift 10. THERMIC SEAT CUSHION (only Super Deluxe seat) (if
lever to adjust seat cushion tilt angle. equipped) - Depress the switch to operate seat heating.
Press the switch again to turn the heater OFF.
8. CUSHION FORE/AFT ADJUSTMENT (Deluxe seat only)
- Lift lever to adjust seat cushion depth. 11. MANUAL LUMBAR ADJUSTMENT CONTROL - Turn
the adjustment knob as required.
9. BACK REST REMOVAL/HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT (if
equipped) - Raise or lower the back rest to the required 12. AIR LUMBAR ADJUSTMENT CONTROL (only Deluxe
height. Pull up past end stop to remove the back rest. seats) - Operate the switches as required.

IMPORTANT: Never operate the compressor for longer

than 1 minute.

45
Controls - Cab

Mechanical suspension seat (if Seat Belt (If Equipped)

equipped)
WARNING: Always securely fasten your safety
belt. Your tractor is equipped with a ROPS cab
or frame for your protection. The seat belt
can help insure your safety if it is properly
used and maintained. Never wear the belt
in a twisted condition or pinched between
the seat structural members.

Adjust the seat to your requirements.

Lean with your back straight against the back rest. Pull the
seat belt completely across your body and push the metal
eye (1) into the latch assembly (2) until it locks.

1
2

Adjust the position of the seat belt as low on your body

as possible.

1. FORE/AFT ADJUSTMENT CONTROL - Lift lever and

adjust seat as required, release lever to lock in position.

2. HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT CONTROL - Grasp the seat and

lift it to the required height. To lower it, raise the seat and 3
move it beyond the upper end stop, then lower to the
required height.

3. WEIGHT ADJUSTMENT CONTROL - Without the

operator in the seat, turn the knob as required, until the
operator's weight is displayed in the indicator.

WARNING: To avoid injuries, the operator's

weight setting should be checked and ad-
justed to the operator before starting the To release the seat belt, push the red button (3) on the
tractor. latch assembly.

IMPORTANT: From time to time, carefully inspect the

seat belt and replace it if worn or damaged.

46
 Controls - Cab

Passenger Seat Passenger Seat Safety

The passenger seat allows a colleague to ride in safety (if equipped).
and comfort.

IMPORTANT:
1. Children are NOT allowed to use the passenger seat.
2. The left-hand door MUST be closed at all times when-
ever the passenger seat is occupied and the tractor is
in motion.
3. See Safety Notes section for further safety informa-
tion.

OPERATION 1

- The passenger seat allows a colleague to ride in safety

and comfort. 3
This seat MAY NOT be used to transport chil-
dren.
- When the passenger seat is occupied, the following
precautions must be taken:
- Tractor should be driven at a slow speed and on level
ground.
- Avoid driving on highways or public roads.
- Avoid quick starts or stops.
- Avoid sharp turns.
- The left-hand door MUST be closed at all times, while
the tractor is in motion.
Raise the seat base.
WARNING: A frequent cause of personal injury
OPERATION 2 or death is persons falling off and being run
over. DO NOT permit others to ride, except on
the designated Passenger Seat.

Insert the seat base support between the seat base stops
as shown above.

IMPORTANT: Before using the passenger seat, make

sure the seat base and support are fully secure.

OPERATION 3
Store the seat in the reverse sequence.

CAUTION: For machines with a seat for a second pas-

senger. The seat for a second passenger (with a seat
belt that must be worn at all times) may be occupied
only when driving on road, but not when working in
the field.

47
Controls - Cab

STEERING COLUMN ADJUSTMENT

WARNING: Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving
can cause loss of control resulting in injury or death.

Column Tilt Adjustment Telescopic Column Adjustment

The steering column can be adjusted up or down as The steering column can be moved in or out at any tilt
required. position.

To adjust: To adjust:

Push down the lever and hold in this position. Move the Lift and hold the locking lever up.
column up or down to the required position, then release Pull or push the column in or out to the required position,
the lever to lock the column in position. then release the lever to lock the column in position.

48
 Controls - Cab

CONTROLS
Controls on the dashboard

1. THERMOSTART (COLD START) SWITCH (if equipped) 5. KEY SWITCH - The key switch has four positions as
follows:
2. SWITCH FOR UPPER HEAD LIGHTS (if equipped with
front hitch) - With the front lamp switch in third position,
press the front of the switch down: upper head lamps will
turn on and main head lamps will go off. Off Position - Turn from On/Contact position
anticlockwise to stop the tractor. The key
3. ROTATING BEACON SWITCH (if equipped) can only be removed from this position.

4. HAZARD WARNING SIGNAL SWITCH

Accessory Position - The radio can be

operated in this position and some of the
cluster displays; this position is also used
for programming the digital instrument
cluster.

On/Contact Position - All bar graphs, digital

NOTE: Switch positions may vary according to tractor displays, warning and indicator lamps will
model. be turned on for approximately 3.5 sec-
onds. This position is also used for dynamic
calibration of rear tyre size and true ground
speed sensor, if equipped.

Start Position - Turning the key fully clock-

wise against spring pressure will energise
the starter motor in addition to the circuits
already mentioned above.

49
Controls - Cab

6. HEAD LAMP SWITCH - Direction Turn Signal, Hi/Low Beam

Three Position Switch Switch and Horn.

A. First Position - All lamps OFF.
TURN SIGNALS:
B. Second Position - Front position lamps, tail lamps, li-
cense plate lamps and the side console illumination lamp
Position 1 = right-hand indicator operated.
will illuminate. Also analog cluster illumination lamps will
be ON.
Position 2 = left-hand indicator operated.
C. Third Position - Front side lamps, tail lamps, license
NOTE: Self cancelling switch only: The turn signal lamps
plate lamps, the side console illumination lamp and main
will continue to flash until the steering wheel is turned in
head lamps will illuminate.
the opposite direction. You can override this function to
cancel the indicator by moving the switch in the oppo-
Four Position Switch site direction chosen.

HEADLAMP HI/LOW BEAM:

Position 3 = With the headlamp hi/low beam switch in the

third or fourth position, push the lever toward the steering
wheel then release it. The hi beam in the headlights will
be selected (blue indicator light on the instrument panel
will go on). Lifting the switch again will select low beam
(blue indicator lamp will go off).
With headlamp switch in First or Second position, lifting
the switch towards the steering wheel and releasing will
flash the headlamps.

HORN:

Press the end of the switch to operate.

A. First Position - All lamps OFF.

B. Second position - ALL amber coloured light blink.

(Road - Daytime).

C. Third position - ALL amber coloured light blink. Tail

lights and front lights light up. (Road - night).

D. Fourth position - The light on the side console and

the main headlights light up. The work lights switch is
activated (on field).

50
 Controls - Cab

Highway/Public Road Operation

- Comply with road traffic laws, including any speed Use of amber hazard warning lights
restrictions and the correct use of Hazard Amber hazard warning are operated by turning the main
Warning Lamps and SMV Symbol. light switch clockwise to the 1st and 2nd position.
- Connect the brake pedals together with the brake
pedal interlock. This will ensure uniform braking and
maximum stopping ability.
- Check clearance before going under electric power
lines, bridges etc.

Tractor Warning Lamp Usage

North American Tractors
- The flashing amber warning lamps must be used ac-
cording to road traffic laws. 3
The flashing amber warning lamps must be used when
operating the tractor on the road during the day or night.
A vehicle operator that comes near the tractor must see
an SMV symbol and the tail lamps from the rear and the
flashing amber warning lamps from the front and rear. FIRST POSITION (1) - ALL amber hazard lights are blink-
ing.

SECOND POSITION (2) - ALL hazard warning lights are

blinking, and front and rear side lights light up.

When the direction turn signal switch is used, the amber

warning lamps will operate as follows:

1. AMBER WARNING LAMP AND TURN SIGNAL LAMP

(LEFT SIDE)
2. AMBER WARNING LAMP AND TURN SIGNAL LAMP
(RIGHT SIDE)
3. TAIL LAMP (RIGHT SIDE) 1. When indicating to turn right, the Right amber warning
4. TAIL LAMP (LEFT SIDE) lamp will flash ON and OFF and the Left amber warning
5. SLOW MOVING VEHICLE (SMV) SYMBOL lamp will illuminate but will not flash.
2. On the contrary, when indicating to turn left, the Left
amber light blinks and the
right one lights up, but does not blink.

IMPORTANT: When towing an implement or wagon

with the tractor, the complete rear area warning system
(amber warning lamps, red tail lamps and SMV symbol)
must be easily seen by any vehicle operator coming near
the tractor.

51
Controls - Cab

Tractor Warning Lamp Usage - Rest Rotating Beacon

Of World Tractors (if equipped).
-
The flashing amber warning lamps must be used ac- - The rotating amber beacon must be used according to
cording to road traffic laws. local road traffic laws.

The amber warning lamps are used to indicate a hazard The rotating amber beacon is operated by pressing the
to other road users. To operate, press the switch (1) as switch (2) with the flashing beacon symbol.
shown above. ALL the amber warning lamps will flash
ON and OFF. Slow Moving Vehicle (SMV) Symbol
IMPORTANT: When operating the tractor, towing an (if equipped).
implement or trailer, the complete rear area warning - For correct use of the SMV symbol (3), observe local
system (amber warning lamps, when applicable, and red road traffic laws.
tail lamps) must be easily seen by any vehicle operator
coming near the tractor.

Implement warning lamps

(if equipped).
It is recommended that implement warning lamps are
used:

- If the flashing warning lamps and red tail lamps on the

tractor cannot be seen because they are obstructed by
the implement.

- If the towed implement is 1219 mm or more behind the

hitch point of the tractor. If a Slow Moving Vehicle (SMV) symbol is equipped it must
be installed on the rear part of the tractor.
- If the towed implement is 1219 mm or more to the left
or right of the centre of the tractor. To install the SMV symbol on an implement or trailer a
special bracket must be obtained from your dealer.
- If the towed implement has a minimum 3000 mm 1
width. WARNING: Collision of high speed road traf-
fic and tractors or implements can cause
Install the warning lamps to indicate the side of the imple- personal injury or death. On roads, use
ment nearest the centre of the road. amber warning lamps according to local
laws. Keep SMV emblem visible. Pull over to
let faster traffic pass. Slow down and signal
before turning off.

52
 Controls - Cab

Forward/Neutral/Reverse switch Pedal Controls

1. CLUTCH PEDAL - Used to temporarily disengage 3

drive.
POWERSHUTTLE GEARBOX (XTRASHIFT TRACTORS) Gradually and completely releasing the clutch pedal
for a controlled smooth start and gear changes.

2. THROTTLE PEDAL

3. BRAKE PEDALS - The left brake pedal stops the left

rear wheel and the right brake pedal stops the right rear
wheel. When using the tractor in the field, the pedals may
be used independently to make turns easier. When driving
on roads, the pedals MUST be locked together.

WARNING: Extra weight and bad traction

conditions, such as mud or ice, increase your
stopping distance. Remember that liquid in
the tires, weights on the machine or wheels,
tanks filled with fertilizer, herbicides or in-
secticides; all these add weight and increase
REVERSE SHUTTLE WITH SYNCHRO-MESH the distance you need to stop. Do not exceed
maximun permitted operating weights on
axle or tractor.
Use the Forward/Neutral/Reverse (F/N/R) shuttle lever to
change direction of travel. 4. BRAKE PEDALS INTERLOCK - Used to lock the brake
pedals together.

WARNING: Brake pedals must be locked

Position 1=Forward together for road travel. This will ensure
uniform brake operation and maximum
stopping ability.

N NEUTRAL - Neutral

Position 2=Reverse

NOTE: On tractors equipped with synchro-mesh, this se-

lection should be made ONLY with the tractor at stand-
still and after completeley depressing the clutch pedal.

53
Controls - Cab
CONTROLS ON RIGHT-HAND PANEL

12. FRONT LOADER CONTROL LEVER (if equipped)

Refer to the loader manual or to your dealer for informa-
tion about correct use of the loader.
1. UP/DOWN SWITCH, HITCH
CONTROLS ON LOWER RIGHT-
2. FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (if equipped) HAND PANEL
3. DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SWITCH

NOTE: NEVER use four-wheel drive for light work or

when driving the tractor on public roads. NEVER shift
the tractor into third or fourth gear while the four-wheel
drive is engaged.

WARNING: Tractors equipped with four-wheel

drive (4DW) have a better drive and can cope
with steeper slopes. Stay off slopes too steep
for safe operation. To avoid tractor overturn-
ing, drive up steep slopes in reverse gear.

4. RIDE CONTROL SWITCH (if equipped)

5. SLIP LIMIT CONTROL SWITCH (if equipped)
6. ELECTROHYDRAULIC REAR PTO CLUTCH SWITCH - (if 1. ACCELERATOR LEVER - To increase o reduce engine
equipped - optional on Xtrashift) speed rate.
- ENGAGEMENT - Lift the locking collar on the PTO ON/ 2. XTRASHIFT CONTROL - The switch can be rotated to
OFF switch and pull the switch up to the ON position to three positions.
engage the PTO. Now the switch will remain on the ON OR
position, while the PTO indicator light on the instrument TWO-SPEED POWERSHIFT CONTROL - The switch can
panel lights up. be rotated to two positions.
- DISENGAGEMENT - Push the ON/OFF switch fully
down. The PTO indicator light on the instrument panel = DIRECT DRIVE,
goes off. NORMAL OPERATION

NOTE: The engine can be started only if the PTO engage- = SPEED REDUCTION,
ment switch is in the OFF position. TORQUE INCREASE.

7. HITCH POSITION CONTROL NOTE: NEVER select speed reduction to aid engine
8. HITCH DRAFT (LOAD) CONTROL KNOB stopping.
9. WINDSCREEN WASHER
10. WINDSCREEN WIPER 3. GEARSHIFT LEVER
11. DIAGNOSTIC RECEPTACLE 4. RANGE SHIFT LEVER (and CREEPER LEVER, if
12. FRONT LOADER CONTROL LEVER (if equipped) equipped)
Refer to the loader manual or to your dealer for informa- 5. AUXILIARY CONTROL VALVE LEVERS
tion about correct use of the loader. 6. LEVER LOCKING DEVICE
7. ASHTRAY
8. FRONT PTO SWITCH (if equipped)
9. FRONT WORKLIGHTS ON BONNET
10. FRONT FIELD LIGHTS ON ROOF (if equipped)
11. REAR FIELD LIGHTS ON ROOF (if equipped)

54
 Controls - Cab
Park brake

1. POWER LIFT CONTROLLER

1. PARK BRAKE LEVER
2. PARK BRAKE BUTTON
3
The park brake (1) is located at the LH side of the opera-
tors seat. Pull the lever fully up to engage the park brake.
If you set the tractor in motion, release the parking brake
after putting the tractor in neutral (see note). Press the
button (2) on the end of the lever, then lower the lever to
release the brake.

When the parking brake is engaged, the warning lamp on

the instrument cluster will illuminate when the key switch
is turned to ON. The master warning lamp will flash when
the engine is started.
A. POWER LIFT UPPER LIMIT CONTROL KNOB.
The lamps will go off when the brake is disengaged.
B. HITCH TRAVEL CONTROL KNOB
C. HITCH DROP RATE CONTROL KNOB.
NOTE: When a gear is engaged (1, 2, 3, 4) with the en-
See hitch description in this manual.
gine running and the parking brake angaged, an audible
alarm will sound.
2. REAR SHIFTABLE PTO SPEED LEVER
3. THREE-WAY SOCKET
IMPORTANT: Driving the tractor with the park brake
4. CIGARETTE LIGHTER
partially engaged will cause damage to internal trans-
5. LEVER OF REAR PTO HYDRAULIC CLUTCH (if equipped,
mission components. Make sure brake is fully off.
basic model)

Auto Hitch Locking Latches Release

Control (if equipped)
This control is located behind the seat on the RH side.

Pull the auto hitch release control to unlock the locking

latches.

NOTE: If equipped with ride control, the unlocking op-

eration is easier. While holding the Ride Control switch
down, pull the auto hitch release control to unlock the
locking latches.

55
Controls - Cab

CAB
All non-metallic components within the cab comply with the ISO 3795 standard.
The cab is approved according to OECD codes concerning ROPS test (protection against overturning) and safety
belts.

Cab
The cab is made of steel sections and is fastened to
the tractor by means of a double system of rubber
dampers (silent block) protecting the driver's seat both
from vibrations and from engine noise. The noise peak
is therefore limited to low values, for more comfort for
the operator.

Doors (5)
Both doors can be opened both from the inner and outer
side, and kept open by dampening cylinders. Both doors
are provided with a lock with key.

Rear window (4)

Release the rear window lock and turn the handle coun-
terclockwise to open it. The window is kept open by
dampeners.

Field lights
The cab can be provided with front (1) and rear (3) field
lights to improve visibility when working at night. The on/
off switches are on the cab roof. Main components of the cab
1 - Front field lights; 2 - Rotary beacon, 3 - Rear field lights;
Rotary beacon 4 - Rear window; 5 - Full opening doors, with safety lock;
The rotary beacon is installed on the rear side of the 6 - Rear view mirros; 7 - Sunroof (Top version).
cab.
NOTE: See the cab maintenance section for filter use
and maintenance.

56
 Controls - Cab

Heating, air circulation and air con-

ditioning in De Luxe cab

1 - Air conditioning switch:

- Press to turn air conditioning on.
- Press the switch again to turn it off.

2 - Temperature control knob

A - Warm air
B - Cold air

3 - Fan speed switch

0 - OFF
I - Slow
2 - Middle
3 - Fast
3

Ventilation
The cab ventilation is operated by means of 6 air vents.
Position the air flow in the required direction by turning
the vents.

The air that flows into the cab can be drawn from either
inside the cab or outside by means of the vents.

Air Recycling Inside The Cab

The rear vent (2) allows the internal air to be recycled.

– Open vent: a great quantity of air is sucked up from

inside the cab by this vent and recycled through the
air vents. 1 - Air vents
- Closed vent: air is sucked in from the outside 2 - Vents for internal air recycling in the cab
nto the cab after passing through 3 - Handle to open the sun-roof
the external filters. 4 - Sun screen.

WARNING: Do not open the windscreen, the doors or

the side and rear windows during work. The noise in
the cab could rise to such level as to oblige the opera-
tor to wear headsets or other individual protection
against noise.

57
Controls - Cab

Low Profile Cab

CX tractors are available with Low Profile cab, designed
to reduce the height of the tractor.
Low Profile cabs have the same controls as DeLuxe
cabs on the right-hand console, though they feature a
few differences concerning the ventilation, heating and
air conditioning systems, as their positions have been
changed to gain free space on the roof.

Ventilation and heating - Low Profile

The ventilation unit is installed on the left-hand side of the
cab. Fresh air comes in through vents on the cab roof.
A filter inside the ventilation unit ensures cleaning of the
air entering the cab. The filter can be easily removed for
cleaning.

The controls to adjust temperature (1) and fan speed (2)

are installed directly un the ventilation-heating unit at the
left of the operator.

The windshield is defrosted by vents (4) on the dashboard.

Adjustable vents (3) on the ventilation-heating unit and
on the dashboard direct air to all areas in the cab. An air
circulation grille on the ventilation-heating unit allows for
direct circulation of the heated-up air, to more uniformly
heat all the area surrounding the operator and increase
comfort.

Cab with air conditioning - Low Profile

The Low Profile cab is available with air conditioning sys-
tem as option. The controls for heating, ventilation and air Ventilation and heating
conditioning are installed directly on the rear post in the
cab. The controls allow to adjust temperature (1) and fan
speed (3) and to switch the air conditioning (2) on.

Air cooling vents (4) are placed around the operator for
and uniform air circulation.

The grill (5) allows to recycle air inside the cab.

NOTE: See the cab maintenance section for filter use

and maintenance.

Cab with air conditioning

58
 Controls - Cab
ADJUSTMENTS WITHIN CAB
(De Luxe - Low Profile)

Cab cooling from the outside Pressurized cab (dusty or windy

environment)
- Turn the fan control on the required position, from (I)
for minimum cooling to (III) for maximum cooling. WARNING: Cab air filters remove dust in the
air, but are not capable of removing chemi-
- Open all air vents. cals used in spraying crops or in weed con-
trol. Many chemicals used for these purposes
- Open the defrost vents and adjust as required. are toxic when improperly used, and can be
hazardous to operators and others in the
- Turn the temperature knob on OFF. area. Follow the instructions of manufactur-
ers of both the equipment and the chemicals
- Close the air recycling vent (if equipped). When the air regarding prohibitions against inhalation

3
recycling vent is closed, air recycling inside the cab is of dust or spray, personal hygiene practices,
reduced to aminimum, while the outside air intake is and other precautions noted by the manu-
maximized. facturers.

NOTE: Whatever is the position of the recycling vent, - Turn the electric fan control on maximum (III).
outside air is sucked into the cab.
- Open all air vents.

Cab heating - Open the defrost vents and adjust as required.

For maximum cab heating, let the engine run until it - Adjust the temperature control as required.
reaches the operating temperature, then proceed as
follows: - Close the air recycling vent (if equipped). When the air
recycling vent is closed, air recycling inside the cab is
- Adjust the electric fan control as required, from (I) for reduced to aminimum, while the outside air intake is
minimum heating to (III) for maximum heating. When maximized.
the electric fan control is turned on (I), air quantity and
speed are reduced. Therefore, temperature of the NOTE: Whatever is the position of the recycling vent,
heated air is greater than when the electic fan speed outside air is sucked into the cab.
regulator is turned on (III).
- If an air conditioning system is provided, turn it on and
- Adjust air vents as required. adjust as required.

- Open the defrost vents and adjust as required. Window Demisting/Defrosting

- Adjust the temperature control as required. Turn it - Turn the electric fan control on maximum (III).
completely clockwise for max. heating, or completely
anticlockwise to exclude heating (OFF). - Open all air vents.

- Open the air recycling vent (if equipped). When the air - Open the defrost vents and directtheir air flows toward
recycling vent is closed, air recycling inside the cab is windscreen / windows.
reduced to aminimum, while the outside air intake is
maximized. - Turn the temperature control on maximum (III).

- If an air conditioning system is equipped, turn it OFF. - Close the air recycling vent (if equipped).

- If an air conditioning system is provided, turn it on and

adjust as required.

59
Controls - Cab

Operation of air conditioning unit Internal Mirror

(If provided)

To operate the air conditioner, the blower must be on. The

blower speed, temperature control and all vents must
be adjusted to obtain the best cooling for the ambient
temperature and dust conditions. Under normal operating
conditions, and with the windows and doors closed, tem-
peratures in the cab of 6°C to 15°C (10°F to 25°F) less than
the ambient temperature will occur. When operating the
air conditioner system, the moisture level is decreased.

NOTE: During cold weather, with ambient temperature

above 0°C (-32°F), operate the air conditioner at least once
per month, for a period of 10 to 15 minutes. This operation
is useful to lubricate gaskets and helps to prevent leaks To adjust mirror head: hold firmly, tilt horizontally and
of cooling fluid. vertically as required.

NOTE: The system is provuded with safety devices to

protect the system for low refrigerant level and restric- Standard rear view mirrors
tions in the system. If the air conditioner stops operating
while the tractor is running, ask your Dealer's specialized
workshop for help.

NOTE: The Air Conditioning system is equipped with an

environmentally safe refrigerant, HFC-R134a. Never re-
charge the air conditioning system with refrigerant other
than HFC-R134a as this will result in loss of cooling and
permanent damage to all air conditioning components.

Roof Hatch (if equipped)

To adjust mirror head: hold firmly, tilt in horizontal end

vertical direction as required.

Adjustable rear view mirrors (if equipped)

Ventilation - Push the latch towards the front of the tractor

and then push the hatch up.
Emergency Exit - Push firmly upward to release the sup-
port struts from the lower retainer clips.

CX - CX SWB - ONLY CAB WITH HATCH (if

equipped) To change the length: loosen the locking knob (1) and
WARNING: If the hatch in the cab roof is open move the mirror to the required position, then tighten
during work, the required protection against the locking knob.
falling objects is compromised. If there is
such danger, keep the roof hatch closed at To adjust mirror head: hold tightly and tilt
all times. in horizontal and vertical direction as required.

60
Instruments and Programming

Section 4
Instruments and Programming 4
Valid from software ICCA 0201

61
Instruments and Programming
Instrument Cluster

1 2 3 4 5 6

10

7 7

8 9 8

1. FUEL LEVEL GAUGE 7. WARNING LAMPS - see following pages for more
details.
2. LOW FUEL WARNING LAMP
8. MAIN DIGITAL DISPLAY - see following pages for more
3. AIR PRESSURE GAUGE or LOGO (if provided) - Indicates details.
system pressure for pneumatic trailer brakes.
9. ENGINE REV COUNTER
4. RED WARNING LIGHT - LOW SYSTEM PRESSURE FOR
PNEUMATIC TRAILER BRAKES 10. ADJUSTMENT PUSH BUTTONS - To go to MENUS
and Functions in the digital display.
5. ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE UP - Upward arrow
DOWN - Downward arrow
- Blue area: low temperature. MENU - Book icon
- Yellow area: normal operating temperature.
- Red area: overheating.

IMPORTANT: If the pointer is in the red area, the

master warning lamp will flash. STOP THE ENGINE
IMMEDIATELY AND CHECK THE CAUSE OF OVERHEAT-
ING. Before beginning the inspection make sure that
the engine has cooled down.

6. RED WARNING LIGHT - OVERHEATING

62
 Instruments and Programming
Indicator Lamps

4
Warning Lamps LCD Icons

1 Battery charging, red 27 Creeper engaged
2 Low engine oil pressure, red 28 Radar present
3 Hydraulic filter clogging, red 29 Water detected in fuel (if provided).
4 Air filter clogging, red Drain fuel filter.
5 Differential lock, yellow 30 Heater - Wait-to-start.
6 Mechanical front drive, yellow To operate the heater, press the heater button that
7 Drive beams, blue activates the lamp. The lamp is controlled by a timer:
8 Shift to neutral, yellow as soon as it goes off, release the button and start
9 Side lights, green the engine.
10 1st trailer indicator, green
11 2nd trailer indicator, green
12 Major warning, red
13 Reverse light, green
14 Parking brake, red
15 Hydraulic trailer brake pressure red

16 Low coolant level, red
17 Rear PTO engaged, yellow
18 Lower front worklight, yellow
19 Lower rear worklight, yellow
20 General warning, yellow
Tractor malfunction. An error has been detected by
the vehicle's diagnostic system and an error code has
been generated (active errors only).
21 Turn left indicator green
22 Turn right indicator green
23 High coolant temperature, red
24 Low fuel level, yellow
25 Engine error lamp, yellow
26 Air brake pressure (optional), red

63
Instruments and Programming
LCD Display

1 2 3

7
4

6
5

Layout

1. Engine rev counter

2. Hitch position up/down and lift percentage amount.
3. Gear engaged indicator
4. Drive direction indicator
5. Indicator for speed in kph or mph
If the following figure is displayed at ignition, the speed indicator
is not provided: ask your dealer.
6. Speed and PTO function display.
7. Menu Display
8. Clock

64
 Instruments and Programming
Display MENU - Software ICCA 0201
The menu system for the cluster is operated by using the three buttons on the left-hand panel.

UP

DOWN

MENU

The menu system is divided into 2 parts:

1-Operating menu
Accessed by using the UP/DOWN arrows when the key is on.

2-Accessories Menu
Is shown automatically when the key is turned to the Accessory position.
4
1.1 Operating menu
When the ignition is on, either with or without the engine running the Working Menu can be cycled through by using the
UP and DOWN buttons.

After key-on the cluster will always default to the PTO/hours screen. As soon as Engine speed goes above 500 RPM for
more than 2 seconds, the display will show the last selected working menu option before previous key off.

The diagram below shows the menu path when using the DOWN button, if UP is pushed the direction is reversed.

NOTE: Count of worked area is active only if the engine is running and implement width is set on a value different from “0”.

1) Power take-off / hours

2) Worked area

3) Distance

4) Wheel slip

5) Calibration

6) Work timer

7) Vehicle errors - if active

65
Instruments and Programming
1.1.1 PTO/Hour Display

The screen shows:

Time - 13:24
Total hours accumulated by the tractor - 1262.3
PTO mode currently selected - 540 Rear
PTO RPM - 0

The arrow indicates the PTO menu is active.

Use:

The following combination of screens can be displayed:

Rear Power Take-Off

These screenshots are self-configured according to the

PTO type present and to the selected PTO.

(Only valid for CX NAO with 2 PTO shafts) The CX NAO

could be equipped with a rear PTO with two shafts. In this
case with the menu button it is possible to toggle between
front PTO, rear PTO 1000 and rear PTO 540E, and the PTO
mode selector will not be considered.

The screenshots display the rear PTO speed of 540, 540E

and 1000.

Front Power Take-Off

While inside the PTO menu (as indicated by the arrow

on the right-hand side), the operator may use the MENU
button to scroll the values of front and rear PTO speed.

Valid only for CX NAO - The CX NAO could be equipped with a rear PTO with two shafts. In this case with the menu but-
ton it is possible to toggle between front PTO, rear PTO 1000 and rear PTO 540E, and the PTO mode selector will not be
considered.

66
 Instruments and Programming
Rear Power Take-Off
According to the PTO on board, the display will show the following:

4
2

This display will be configured as follows:

1 - Rear/front PTO selected

The selected PTO display indicates that the LCD is showing whether the front or rear PTO was engaged.
The MENU button displays one of these indications.

2 - Arrow indicating the PTO/hour menu is selected.

4
The arrow indicates that in this moment the functions of the PTO/hours menu are selected for display.
By means of the UP and DOWN buttons the operator can scroll the different MENU options and the arrow indicates which
view has been selected.

3 - PTO instantaneous speed - RPM

Indicates the actual speed of the engaged PTO. If the PTO is not engaged, the display shows "0". If when the PTO is dis-
engaged a value different from "0" is shown, that means a dragging effect is present. Ask your Dealer's workshop for help.

4 - PTO speed selected

The “PTO speed selected” display indicates 540 or 540E or 1000 (or 1000E, if applicable) according to tractor configuration
and to the PTO speed that is selected by the speed selector lever.

CX NAO tractors may mount a PTO with 2 rear shafts. In this case the instrument will show both speeds, 540 and 1000
RPM. In order to allow this when the PTO/hour view is selected, the operator can switch from front PTO (if equipped) to
rear 540RPM and to 1000RPM PTO with the MENU button.

Front Pto
- Ignition key ON. The front PTO can be displayed in the lower area of the left-hand LCD (select PTO display by the up/
down arrows and press the MENU button). The display shows the front PTO speed, as calculated from engine speed rate
with gear engaged in the factory setting. If the front PTO is not active, the display reads 0. If the front PTO is engaged,
the value of the rev speed rate is shown on the LCD screen.
When the key is switched to OFF, the front PTO view is cancelled, and when the key is switched to ON, the procedure
starts again at the first start of the front PTO.

WORK HOURS
The display shows the actual hours worked by the tractor. The count is only active when the engine is running. The value
displayed ranges from 0.0 to 9999.9. When the maximum value is reached, the displayed value ranges from 10000 to
60000. When 60000 is reached, the count will stop.

67
Instruments and Programming
1.1.2 Area worked
If the down button is pushed the Area Worked menu is selected:

The screen shows:

Time - 13:24
Area units selected - Acres
Area worked - 28.3 Acres
PTO mode currently selected - 1000 Rear
PTO RPM - 0

The arrow indicates the Area menu is selected. If the counter is operating, this arrow
will flash when the menu is selected. Each time the menu is selected, the counter
will display "AUTO" or "Man" (MANUAL) 2 seconds long before displaying the relative
value. The operator is thus informed about the settings actually active. (See selection)

Use:
- The first screenshot shows the area worked in the units preset in the accessory menu. The units are Acres or Hectares.
- One decimal place will be shown until the amount of units reaches 9999.9, at this point the counter will show 10000+.
If 99999 is exceeded the counter will reset.
- Counter can work in two different modes. Mode selection is available into accessory menu (see Auto Function Settings):
Manual Mode: when activated by the operator, the counter counts every time the tractors is moving (if
implement width has been previously defined) until the operator stops it.
Auto Mode: if implement width has been previously defined, the counter starts and stops to count auto-
matically when the tractor is moving and either the hitch is down or the Remote implement switch is on.

Auto and Manual mode will increment the same counter value.

Counter Activation:
- Pushing the MENU button for <2 secs starts/stops the area counter (only for Manual mode)
- Pushing the MENU button for >2 secs when counter is visualized and not active resets the counter.
- If pushed for longer than 2 seconds when active the counter will stop (only for Manual mode).
- If the UP or DOWN arrows are pressed to change the menu function selected when the counter is active, it will continue
to count.

- To turn the distance counter off after exiting the menu the operator will have to go back into this screen and press the
menu button (only for Manual mode).
- If active at key-off the unit will start again counting at key-on (only for Manual mode).

Notes:
1) Only Area worked function will be activated in manual
2) To count the area worked, the implement width has to be previously defined (Accessories Menu 4).

68
 Instruments and Programming
1.1.3 Distance travelled
If the down button is pushed again the Distance Travelled menu is selected:

The screen shows:

Time - 13:24
Distance units selected - Km
Distance travelled/worked - 208.3 Km
PTO mode currently selected - 1000 Rear
PTO RPM - 0

The arrow indicates the Distance menu is selected.

If the counter is operating, this arrow will flash when the menu is selected.
Each time the menu is selected, the counter will display "AUTO" or "Man"
(MANUAL) 2 seconds long before displaying the relative
value. The operator is thus informed about the settings actually active.

Use:
- The first screen shows the distance travelled/worked
in the units preset in the Accessory menu. To indicate a
distance shorter than 1 mile/1 km, the display shows the
following symbol corresponding to the 5th digit:
- One decimal place will be shown until the amount of
units reaches 9999.9, at this point the counter will show Counter Activation:
a value of 10000. - Pushing the MENU button for less than 2seconds starts/
If 99999 is exceeded the counter will reset. stops the distance counter (only for Manual mode).
- Counter can work in two different modes. Mode selec- - Pushing the menu button for longer than 2 seconds when
tion is available into Accessory menu (see Auto Function selected but not active resets the counter,
Settings): - if pushed for longer than 2 seconds when active the
counter will stop (only for Manual mode).
Manual Mode (Distance Travelled): when activated - If the UP or DOWN arrows are pressed to change the
by the operator, the counter counts every time the menu function selected when the counter is active it will
tractors is moving until the operator stops it. continue to count.
- To turn the distance counter off after exiting the menu the
Auto Mode (Distance Worked): the counter starts to count operator will have to go back into this screen and press
when the tractor is moving and either the hitch is down the menu button(only for Manual mode).
or the Remote implement switch is on. - If active at key-off the unit will start again counting at
key-on (only for Manual mode).
Auto and Manual mode will increment the same counter
value.

69
Instruments and Programming
1.1.4 Wheel Slip Menu
(Operating if the ground speed sensor is mounted)
If the down button is pushed again the Wheel Slip menu is selected:

The screen shows:

Time - 13:24
Current wheel slip – 17% (only displayed if the sensor is mounted)
(If the sensor is not mounted, two dashes are displayed instead of the value)
Wheel Slip limit - 20%
PTO mode currently selected - 1000 Rear
PTO RPM - 0

The arrow indicates the Wheel Slip menu is selected.

Use:
- In the first screen of the menu the slip limit and the current slip value are shown.
- If the operator presses the MENU button in this screen, the wheel slip limit can be set. In this case, the digits of the
wheel slip limit are flashing.
- Pushing the UP and DOWN buttons will change the value in units of 1 from 10% to 25%. Press and hold the MENU
button for longer than 2 seconds to set the value. After setting the slip limit the menu is returned to the top level, so
pressing the UP and DOWN buttons will cycle through the working menu.

1.1.5 Calibration Menu

If the down button is pushed again the top level of the Calibration menu is selected:

The screen shows:

Time - 13:24
Calibration menu selected
PTO mode currently selected - 1000 Rear
PTO RPM - 0

The arrow indicates the Calibration menu is active.

Use:
- After the Calibration menu has been selected, by pressing the MENU button the operator can choose which controller
to calibrate.
The following screen is shown:

The instrument cluster is the first default controller to be calibrated.

After entering this menu, you may display the calibration state by means of the bottom
part on the display that normally shows PTO speed rate.

WARNING: The operator may only perform the calibrations quoted in the Opera-
tor column in the following table. The operator MAY NOT perform the operations
quoted in the column NOT FOR THE OPERATOR. They may only be performed by
specialized technicians at the Dealer's.

70
 Instruments and Programming
NOTE: If the indication " - - - " appears, during calibration selection, in the area of the display where the calibration status
is shown, tje selected calibration is not available owing to some problem in the system. Ask your Dealer for help.

- If the cluster is already calibrated, the operator can choose another controller by pressing the UP or DOWN buttons.
The order of the controllers to be calibrated is the following: 4

Controller Display Operator NOT for the operator

Instrument cluster (hitch position)
(only valid for softwares before ICCA 0201) ICh OK
Instrument cluster
(dynamic wheel calibration) ICd OK
Hitch EHR - NO
PTO (if equipped) PTO NO
Transmission tc - NO
Cab suspension (if equipped) CS - NO

- After scrolling to the correct controller the operator will press the MENU button again to start the calibration sequence.
- After the calibration has been completed, the operator can choose to calibrate another controller by scrolling through
using the UP and DOWN buttons, or can hold the MENU button longer than 2 seconds to exit to the top level of the
calibration menu. From this point the other parts of the working menu can be accessed by using the UP and DOWN
buttons.

71
Instruments and Programming
1.1.6.1 ICh Calibration sub-menu, hitch position display
(valid only for software before ICCA 0201)
This calibration defines the hitch position display.
When the LCD shows "ICh" and the PTO display shows "0", the operator has to press the "MENU" button to access the
hitch calibration menu.
Now the LCD will show "1", i.e. "ready to start". The instrument is waiting for the operator to lower the hitch down to mini-
mum height. When the hitch reaches the minimum height, press "MENU" to save the lowest limit of hitch travel, which
is stored as "0%". The code "10" is displayed for 2 seconds, followed by the code "11". Now the instrument is waiting for
the operator to raise the hitch to its upper limit. Make sure the Upper Limit Control is set to maximum position. When
the hitch reaches the maximum height, press "MENU" to save the upper limit of hitch travel, which is stored as "100%".
The code "20" is displayed for 2 seconds, followed by the code "21". Press and keep pressed the "Override" ride control
switch (if provided by the configuration) and press the MENU button to define the upper hitch limit associated to "110%"
The code "30" is displayed for 2 seconds, followed by the code "50" to show that the calibration was properly performed.

If the Override switch is not present, press the Menu button again. If the value corresponds to 100%, the code "30" is
displayed for 2 seconds, followed by the code "50" to show that the calibration was properly performed. Otherwise an
error code is displayed. In this case, the procedure must be repeated.

Press MENU for longer than 2 seconds to exit Calibration and go to another menu.

ICh calibration sequence

(only valid for softwares before ICCA 0201)

Calibration index
Display
PTO Description

0 Calibration mode not accessed

1 Ready to start - waiting for hitch down
10 Hitch lowest limit stored - 0%
11 Waiting for hitch up
20 Hitch upper limit stored - 100%
21 Waiting for ride control - if available in the configuration
30 Override limit stored - 110%
50 Calibration OK

ICh calibration errors

Calibration index
Display
PTO Description

100 Calibration not OK. Repeat the calibration procedure

72
 Instruments and Programming
1.1.6.2 ICd calibration sub-menu
The operator needs to have a flat surface with 60 linear meters (197 feet) available. The operator will trace two lines that
indicate start and stop of that path.

60 metres

BEGIN END

Pushing the DOWN button it is possible to choose the "ICd" calibration with "0" shown on PTO speed display.
Pushing MENU button operators gets into this calibration with code 1 that means "ready to start".
Driving slowly at a constant speed (+/- 1,5 Kph) from 2.5 Kph to 7 Kph, the operator will press the MENU button when
4
the start line of calibration path has been reached.
Now PTO speed display will show a counter of the pulses read from the rear axle.
At the end of the 60 metres calibration path, the operator will press MENU again and code 80 will be shown for 1 second.
At this point, If everything is ok, code 90 will be shown.
Press MENU for longer than 2 seconds to exit Calibration and go to another menu.

The cluster calculates the wheel radius index and stores the new value into the memory location related to Accessory
menu 3.

ICd calibration sequence

Calibration index
Display
PTO Description

0 No access to calibration mode
1 Ready for start - wait for 60 meters path start
Pulses Running the 60 meters.
80 End of path button pressed
90 Calibration OK

ICd calibration errors

Calibration index
Display
PTO Description

110 Speed too slow
111 Speed too high
112 Speed not constant
120 Pulses too low
121 Pulses too high

73
Instruments and Programming
1.1.7 Work timer menu
If the down button is pushed again the Work Timer menu is selected:

The screen shows:

Time - 13:24
Work Timer - 0 minutes, 0 seconds
PTO mode currently selected - 1000 Rear
PTO RPM - 0

The arrow indicates the Work Timer menu is active.

Each time the menu is selected, the counter will display "AUTO" or "Man"
(MANUAL) 2 seconds long before displaying the relative value. The operator
is thus informed about the settings actually active.

Use:
- When the Timer menu is first entered the display will show the screen above on the right.
- The timer will show minutes and seconds up to 99 minutes and 59 seconds.

- When the timer reaches 99 minutes and 59 seconds it will automatically change to show hours and minutes, and an ‘h’
will be displayed on the left-hand side.

- If the timer is allowed to run continuously to 99 hours and 59 minutes it will reset to 00:00 and then the count will start
again.

74
 Instruments and Programming
- Counter could work in two different modes. Mode selection is available into Accessory menu (see Auto Function Settings):

Manual Mode: the timer counts every time the operator activates it until the operator stops it.

Auto Mode: the counter starts and stops to count automatically when the hitch is down or the Remote implement switch
is on.

Auto and Manual mode will increment the same counter value.

Counter Activation:
- Pushing the MENU button for less than 2 secs starts/stops the Work Timer (only for Manual mode).
- Pushing the menu button for longer than 2 seconds when counter is visualized and not active resets the Timer.
- If pushed for longer than 2 seconds when active, the counter will stop (only for Manual mode).
- If the UP or DOWN arrows are pressed to change the menu function selected when the Timer is active, the count will
go on.

Note:
1) Only work time function will be activated in manual mode.

75
Instruments and Programming
1.1.8 Error menu
When an error is active on the tractor, an exclamation mark will show on the left-hand side of the display. Once activated,
the exclamation mark shall stay on 4 seconds at least.
In this case, the Error menu can be accessed by pressing DOWN when in the PTO/Hours menu or UP when in the Area
Worked menu. When operator enters into Error menu, error codes active in that moment remain frozen until operator
exits the menu. It is possible to add new errors, but not to deactivate the errors shown.

The screen shows:

Time - 13:24
Error menu selected
PTO mode currently selected - 1000 Rear
PTO RPM - 0

The arrow indicates the Error menu is active.

When the Timer menu is first entered, the display will show the screen above. The PTO readout is still active.

- Pushing the MENU button will enter into the second level of the menu structure. This is a list of the ECUs on the trac-
tor and the quantity of errors on each one. The list will only be populated when there is an active error for a particular
controller. This will mean the operator does not have to scroll through the whole list to find the error.

76
 Instruments and Programming
In the example below the Engine has 4 errors:

List of controllers
Controller Designation

Instrument Cluster IC
PTO/Hitch Ehr
Transmission Controller tc

The following units, only if mounted on the tractor

Cab Controller (if equipped) CC
Cab suspension (if equipped) CS
Engine (if electronic engine) Eng
Auxiliary Valve Controller AVC
(if equipped)
Auxiliary valve 1 AV1
Auxiliary valve 2 AV2
Auxiliary valve 3 AV3
Auxiliary valve 4 AV4
Auxiliary valve 5 AV5

4
- If the MENU button is pressed again for less than 2 seconds the third level of menu will be selected. This displays the
error codes from the selected controller.
The controller name is moved to the part of the LCD which usually displays the clock and the SPNs /FMIs are shown
below it.

- Pressing the UP and DOWN buttons will scroll through all the error codes for the particular controller.
- If the MENU button is pressed again for less than 2 seconds the operator may select a different module by scrolling
up to level 1.
- To exit the Error menu, the operator has to press the MENU button for longer than 2 seconds. This will exit to the first
level where the rest of the working menu can be accessed.

WARNING: When an operation ERROR is displayed, ask

the Dealer's specilized personnel for help indicating
the error code. The Dealer's personnel has specific
competences to locate the error and the type of opera-
tion to be performed.

77
Instruments and Programming
2.1 Accessories Menu
If the ignition is turned to the accessory position the accessory menu is shown.

Before the menu is shown, the software version of the tractor is shown for 2 seconds after initialisation of the cluster.
The image below shows the installed software version.

After this the cluster defaults to the first part of the accessory menu.

Key:

IC= Instument Cluster

C= McCormick
A = Model Code
0 102 = installed software version

78
 Instruments and Programming
The menu structure for the Accessory menu will be as follows:

1) MPH/KPH

2) Acres/Hectars

3) Tyre size

4) Implement width

5) Service timer

6) Engine constant*

7) Front PTO ratio

(and rear, CX only) *

8) Cab suspension available*

4
9) Switch detecting gear selector lever in NEUTRAL available*

10) Tractor model code*

11) Previous work hours*

12) Auto functions adjustment*

13) Lighting adjustment

14) Clock setting

To scroll the menu, the operator will push the UP or DOWN button. The diagram shows the menu path when using the
UP button. If DOWN is pushed, the direction is reversed.

* These calibrations are NOT AVAILABLE TO THE OPERATOR.

Do not enter these menus.
Entering this menus will affect the tractor operation.
Refer to your Dealer for more information.

79
Instruments and Programming
2.1.1 MPH/KPH
The default first part of the accessory menu is used to set the units for Distance Travelled and Vehicle Speed. The units
can be Kilometres or Miles.

The display section usually reserved to the clock shows "AC", to signify the menu is accessed, and then a number to show
the part of the menu currently being viewed.

This first screen shows the units currently selected, in the example above this is Miles. Both the Mi for the
distance covered and the MPH for vehicle speed are showing on the display.

To change to metric units:

1- Press the MENU button
2- The MI and MPH will flash
3- Press UP or DOWN to scroll between the options.
4- The KM and KPH will now be flashing.
5- To save this new setting press and hold the MENU button for longer than 2 seconds (the symbols will stop flashing)
and press the UP and DOWN buttons to access other parts of the menu.

- If the key is turned to the off position before the new value is set the old value is used.
- Any values saved in the Distance Travelled memory will be converted to the new units.

80
 Instruments and Programming
2.1.2 Acres/Hectars
Press the UP button to go to the next menu section, that is used to set the units for the Area Worked.
The units can be Acres or Hectares.

This first screen will show the units currently selected, in the example above this is Acres. The Ac symbol
is showing on the display.

To change to Hectares:
1- Press the MENU button
2- The code Ac will flash.
3- Press UP or DOWN to scroll between the options.
4- Now the code HA will flash.
5- To save this new setting press and hold the MENU button for longer than 2 seconds (the symbols will stop flashing)
and press the UP and DOWN buttons to access other parts of the menu.

- If the key is turned to the off position before the new value is set the old value is used.
- Any values saved in the Area Worked memory will be converted to the new units.

81
Instruments and Programming
2.1.3 Tyre size
Press the UP button to go to the next menu section, that is used to set tyre size most suitable to your tractor. The units
are mm and the Static Loaded Radius of the tyre is used.

This first screen will show "0705" as the current setting used as an example. The text tyr is shown at the bottom of the
screen.

To change the tyre size:

1- Press the MENU button
2- The actual tyre size will flash (e.g. 0705).
3- Press UP or DOWN to scroll in units of 1 from 0300 to 1033 mm.
4- To save this new setting press and hold the MENU button for longer than 2 seconds (the numbers will stop flashing)
and press the UP and DOWN buttons to access other parts of the menu.

- If the key is turned to the off position before the new value is set the old value is used.
- If there is a Distance Travelled value in the memory, it will not be changed when the tyre size is altered.

Note:
This value can also be modified by dynamic calibration, see the corresponding chapter.

82
 Instruments and Programming
Rear Tyre Rolling Radius

REAR ROLLING
TYRES RADIUS*
(mm)
* IMPORTANT: The rolling radius depends on tyre manu-
13.6R28/13.6-28 610
facturer, tyre wear, tyre pressure and load. For a more
14.9R28/14.9-28 640
accurate rolling radius dimension, use the Dynamic
16.9-28 o 16.9R28 670
Mode procedure.
14.9R30/14.9-30 665
16.9R30/16.9-30 695
18.4R30/18.4-30 720
480/70R30 700
12.4R32/12.4-32 650
16.9R34/16.9-34 750
18.4R34/18.4-34 775
480/70R34 750
520/70R34 780
540/65R34 750
540/70R34
12.4R36/12.4-36
775
700 4
13.6R36/13.6-36 725
12.4-38 725
13.6R38/13.6-38 750
15.5-38 / 15.5R38 750
12.4-42 750
18.4-16.1 480
21.5-16.1 485

83
Instruments and Programming
2.1.4 Implement Width
Press the UP button to go to the next menu section, that is used to set the implement width. This value is used to along
with the distance travelled to calculate the Area Worked. When the cluster is brand new the default value should be 0 =
0,0 centimetres. The width can be set in Feet or Centimetres.

This first screen will show the current setting and units, 30.0 Feet in the example. A graphic is shown at the bottom of
the screen to symbolise implement width.

To change the implement width:

1- Press the MENU button
2- The actual implement width will flash (e.g. 30.0).
3- press UP or DOWN to scroll metric units in divisions of 10 between 0000 and 9990. The range of imperial units will be
0 to 199.5 in divisions of 0.5.
If the MENU button is pressed now, you can directly set the unit of measurement as here described.
4- To save this new setting press and hold the MENU button for longer than 2 seconds (the numbers will stop flashing)
and press the UP and DOWN buttons to access other parts of the Accessory menu.

If the units need to be changed:

1- Press the MENU button
2- The actual implement width will flash.
3- Press the MENU button again and the units will flash.
4- Press UP or DOWN to switch between metric and imperial.
F= Feet C= Centimetres
If the MENU button is pressed now, you can directly set the width as here described.
4- To save this new setting press and hold the MENU button for longer than 2 seconds (the letter will stop flashing) and
press the UP and DOWN buttons to access other parts of the Accessory menu.

Note: Press MENU again after stage 3 to return to width adjustment.

- If the key is turned to the off position before the new value is set the old value is used.

84
 Instruments and Programming
2.1.5 Service timer
By pressing the UP button, the Service Timer menu is entered. This is a simple count-down timer that can be set by the
operator. In normal operation, when the timer reaches 0 the spanner symbol will show on the right-hand panel of the
cluster. When the cluster is brand new the default value should be 0 (inactivated).

This first screen will show the time set originally (1000), the time left to run (586) and will also show the hourglass and
spanner graphics to indicate which menu is being accessed.

To set the Service interval:

1- Press the MENU button
2- The time left to run (586 in the example) will flash.
3- Press UP or DOWN to scroll in units of 1 from 0 to 1999.
4- To save this new setting press and hold the MENU button for longer than 2 seconds (the number will stop flashing)
and the new Service Interval will be recorded on the bottom line of the left-hand panel (1000 in the example). Pressing
the UP and DOWN buttons will now access other parts of the menu.

If the interval is set to 0 the Service timer has been deactivated.

- If the key is turned to the off position before the new value is set the old value is used.

This is NOT an operator menu.

DO NOT press to enter this menu.

Normally this menu is programmed at your Dealer's workshop.

Enter this menu only if absolutely required to add a specific service operation,

Entering this menu might affect the tractor operation.

See your dealer for more information.

85
Instruments and Programming
2.1.6 Engine constant 2.1.8 Cab suspension (if equipped)
Pressing UP again will go to the Engine Constant menu. Pressing UP again will go to the Cab Suspension Present
This is a ratio used to calculate the actual engine speed menu.
from the alternator pulses. The following screen is shown:
The following screen is shown:

This is NOT an operator menu.

This is NOT an operator menu. DO NOT press to enter this menu.
DO NOT enter this menu.
Entering this menu might affect the tractor operation.
Entering this menu might affect the tractor operation. See your dealer for more information.
See your dealer for more information.

2.1.7 Front/rear PTO ratio (rear 2.1.9 Menu of switch detecting

PTO ratio for CX only) (for MC an gear selector lever in NEUTRAL
Pressing UP again, the menu of the switch detecting gear
other tractor model only the front selector lever in NEUTRAL is accessed.
PTO ratio is shown) This value was set at the factory and must not be chan-
Pressing UP again will go to the front/rear ratio PTO menu. ged.
This is used to calculate the RPM displayed for the front/ THE FOLLOWING SCREEN IS SHOWN.
rear PTO in the operation menu.
THE FOLLOWING SCREEN IS SHOWN.

This is NOT an operator menu. This is NOT an operator menu.

DO NOT enter this menu. DO NOT enter this menu.

Entering this menu might affect the tractor operation. Entering this menu might affect the tractor operation.
See your dealer for more information. See your dealer for more information.

86
 Instruments and Programming
2.1.10 Tractor model code 2.1.11 Previous work hours
Pressing UP again will go to the Tractor Model Code menu. Pressing UP again will go to the Previous Work Hours
The following screen is shown: menu. This is used in case the instrument cluster should
be replaced for any reason.
The following screen is shown:

This is NOT an operator menu. This is NOT an operator menu.

DO NOT enter this menu. DO NOT enter this menu.
4
Entering this menu might affect the tractor operation. Entering this menu might affect the tractor operation.
See your dealer for more information. See your dealer for more information.

87
Instruments and Programming
2.1.12 Auto Function Settings
Pressing UP again will go to the Auto Function setting menu, to define if area worked, distance travelled or work timer
counter needs to be set as manual or auto mode. This means that all these counters will depend from the position of the
hitch (automatic) or from the start/stop menu button (manual). When the cluster is brand new, the default value should
be Manual for all the functions.
The first screen is the following:

depending on the current settings of Area worked (Auto/Man). "AFu" means Auto Function.

To change the Auto Function Settings:

1- Press the MENU button
2- The arrow below area worked symbol will start to flash.
3- Press UP or DOWN to switch between Area Worked, Distance Travelled and Working Time Counter with arrow still
flashing under the relevant symbol. The following screen should appear (depending on current settings - Auto/Man)

4- Once the right sub-menu to be modified has been selected, push Menu button again and the relevant Auto/Man text
(depending on current settings saved) will start to flash whilst arrow will go steady on.
5- press UP or DOWN button to change the settings.
6- To save this new setting press the MENU button, the text will stop flashing, the arrow will flash again and you go back
to point 3.
7- Pressing the UP and DOWN buttons will now access the other sub-menu of the Accessory menu.
8- Pressing and holding the MENU button longer than 2 seconds, you may in any moment save the current settings and
quit the menu. Pressing the UP and DOWN buttons will now access other parts of the Accessory menu.

If the key is turned to the OFF position before the new value is set, the old value is used.

88
 Instruments and Programming
2.1.13 Screen brightness adjustment
Pressing UP again will go to the Screen Brightness menu. By this menu the operator can set the brightness of the lamps
and of the LCD when the sidelights are on. The brightness by day cannot be adjusted.
The value goes from 1 to 10, where:
- 1 means lamp light = 5% and LCD/indicators brightness = 13% of max. capacity.
- 10 means lamp light = 45% and LCD/indicators brightness = 53% of max. capacity.

The default value is = 5 that means lamp light = 13% and LCD/indicators brightness = 24% of max. capacity.

The screenshot is the following, according to the brightness setting.

"nbr" indicates brightness adjustment at night.

To adjust the brightness:

1- Press the MENU button.
2- The present value will flash.
3- Press UP or DOWN to scroll values from 1 to 10.
4- To save this new setting press and hold the MENU button for longer than 2 seconds (the number will stop flashing)
and press the UP and DOWN buttons to access other parts of the Accessory menu.

If the key is turned to the OFF position before the new value is set, the old value is used.

NOTE: The brightness of indicators, LCD and lamps by day is set on 70% of max. capacity.

89
Instruments and Programming
2.1.14 Clock setting
Pressing UP again will enable the operator to set the clock. Pressing DOWN from the AC:1 original screenshot will also
reach this section. The clock can also be set to be 12 or 24 hours in this menu. When the cluster is brand new the default
values should be 24h and 00:00.

This first screen will show the current time (22:48) and whether the clock is set to 12 or 24 hours (24h). The letters CLC
will show at the bottom of the left-hand display to inform the operator this is the Clock Setting menu.

To change Clock:
1- Press the MENU button
2- The hour digits will flash.
3- Press UP or DOWN to scroll in units of 1 from 00 to 12 or 24.
4- Press the MENU button again to set the hours.
5- The minutes will flash.
6- Press UP or DOWN to scroll in units of 1 from 00 to 59.
7- Press the MENU button again to set the clock on 12 or 24 hours.
8- The text in the middle line will flash.
9- Press UP or DOWN to switch between 12h or 24h.
10-At this point the time can be saved and the menu exited by pressing and holding the MENU button for longer than
2 seconds (the digits will stop flashing), then press the UP and DOWN buttons to access other parts of the Acces-
sory menu.

If the key is turned to the off position before the new time is set the old value is used.

90
Operation

Section 5
Operation 5

91
Operation

GENERAL OPERATION
Before Starting The Engine More recommendations
WARNING: Before starting the engine, be sure Starting
all operating controls are in neutral and the
park brake is engaged. This will eliminate ac- WARNING: Carefully read the starting instruc-
cidental movement of the machine or start up tions before starting the tractor.
of power driven equipment.
WARNING: Always take into account the use of
the machine and the work place. Take every
WARNING: Never run the engine in a closed precaution, specially if there is a high risk of
building. Proper ventilation is required under fire.
all circumstances.
WARNING: DO NOT start the tractor from the
Do the following checks before starting the tractor for ground. Always start the tractor only from the
the first time. operator’s seat.

1. Make sure all persons that operate or do mainte- WARNING: DO NOT start the tractor if the bon-
nance on the tractor understand that clean fuel is net is open or the guards are removed.
important.
WARNING: The operator must always seat in
2. Check all lubrication fittings. his/her place when driving the tractor both in
the field and on roads. DO NOT stand up from
3. Check oil level in the engine sump and in the gear- your seat when the tractor is moving.
box.

4. Check the water level in the batteries.

Run In Procedure

5. Check that the tractor tank is filled with clean fuel - For a correct running in, it is necessary to observe al
meeting the specifications given in this manual. precautions called for in the Maintenance section.
Clean around the fuel tank cap before you remove
the cap. - A gradual run-in of a new engine is not necessary.

6. Check for leaks from fuel system, cooling system - Continuous use of light loads when the engine is still
and engine oil sump. new may cause lubrication oil to enter the discharge
system.
7. Check that all drive belts are adjusted correctly.
8. Remove any water or sediment from the fuel pri- - You should begin using heavy loads as soon as the
mary filter. engine is put into service and the coolant reaches a
9. Check the air pressure of the tyres. minimum temperature of 60°C.
10. If your tractor has a power take-off, make sure the
safety guard is installed and in good condition. - The engine will benefit if heavy loads are applied im-
11. Check for coolant level in the coolant recovery mediately after the first start.
reservoir. If required, top up with an ethylene glycol
coolant fluid. - DO NOT run the engine for long periods at maximum
load.

- Do NOT let the engine run for a long period at high

RPM without any draft applied. If the engine is used
without any drafts, be careful to keep the right oper-
ating temperature.

92
 Operation

STARTING PROCEDURE
WARNING: The engine may be started only in OPERATION 3
the conditions given here under. If this fails to
occur, have the tractor repaired by your Dealer
or authorized service centre.

WARNING: On electrically operated 4WD trac-

tors, the 4WD clutch is spring loaded into en-
gagement and relies on hydraulic pressure for
disengagement. A failure in the 4WD hydraulic
system will therefore automatically engage
the 4WD even though the 4WD switch is in the
disengaged position. This is a built in safety
feature. DO NOT operate 4WD tractor transmis-
sions with the rear wheels off the ground or re-
moved, UNLESS THE FRONT WHEELS ARE ALSO
JACKED UP CLEAR OF THE GROUND OR THE
FRONT AXLE DRIVE SHAFT IS DISCONNECTED. XTRASHIFT
Failure to do this can result in the tractor being
pulled off the rear supports by the front axle. Shift the F/N/R lever to NEUTRAL.

WARNING: Operate controls only when seated NOTE: On tractors equipped with synchro-mesh, the
in the Operator's seat. clutch pedal MUST be depressed before shifting the
reverse shuttle lever.

IMPORTANT: Set the engine rpm to low idle NOTE: XtraShift tractors are equipped with a neutral start
for a few minutes to make sure that enough lubricant switch in the reverse shuttle circuit. However, if the For-

5
reaches the turbocharger bearings and engine parts ward/Neutral/Reverse lever is not on neutral, the engine
before operating the engine at a high rated speed. will NOT start.

OPERATION 4
OPERATION 1
Make sure the Master Disconnect Switch (if equipped) is
in the ON position.

OPERATION 2

Check that the engagement switch/lever of the PTO clutch
is in the disengaged position.

NOTE: The engagement switch/lever of the rear PTO

clutch MUST be in the disengaged position or the starter
Fully depress the clutch pedal. Shift the range lever and motor will not operate.
the gear lever to the NEUTRAL position. To next page...

NOTE: The gearshift lever MUST be in NEUTRAL, or the

starter motor will not operate.

WARNING: The tractor must only be started

with the auxiliary valve levers are in neutral.

93
Operation

OPERATION 5 COLD TEMPERATURE OPERATION

Before you start the engine and operate your tractor during
cold ambient temperatures, check the following items:

- BATTERIES Must have a full charge.

- FUEL: Must be clean and contain no water.

- ENGINE OIL - Must have the correct viscosity for the

ambient temperature range. DO NOT mix oils differ-
ent for type, characteristics and viscosity from the
prescribed ones.

- TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC FLUID - The oil used

Move the throttle lever to 1/4 open position. must be an approved type. Use the transmission fluid
prescribed by the Lubricant Chart.
OPERATION 6
- COOLING SYSTEM - Must contain a minimum of
33 percent and a maximum of 50 percent ethylene
glycol for protection. This ratio will vary with different
market requirements. DO NOT mix protective fluids
different for colour and characteristics to preserve
their quality.

- TYRES - If there is liquid ballast in the tyres, the tyres

must have protection against freezing temperatures
below 0°C. Ask your dealer for help.

- STOPPING THE ENGINE. Permit the engine tempera-

ture to decrease before stopping.

- CONDENSATION IN FUEL TANK - To prevent conden-

Turn the key switch to the START position until the engine sation in the fuel tank and water entering the fuel
starts, but no more than 30 seconds, then release the key. system, fill the fuel tank after each operating day.
Run the engine for 2 minutes.
- FUEL FILTER - During cold ambient temperatures,
Release the parking brake. make sure you remove water from the fuel filter each
Desengage the Park Lock (if equipped). day or damage will occur to the injection system.
Loosen the drain plug each day before starting the
IMPORTANT: If the engine does not start and an alarm engine. Tighten the drain plug after the water has
sounds, make sure that the gearshift lever is on NEU- drained.
TRAL.
IMPORTANT: During cold ambient temperatures never
IMPORTANT: If the engine starts and then stops wait for run the engine at low idle speed for long periods of
the starter motor to stop turning before you turn the key time. Never run the engine for long periods of time
switch to the start position again. when the coolant temperature is below normal.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT use the starter motor for more
WARNING: To assist cold weather starting DO
than 30 seconds without stopping. Wait 3 minutes
NOT spray ether or gasoline into the air induc-
between starts to allow the battery to recharge and the
tion manifold. To do so could cause an explo-
starter motor to cool.
sion and injury.
OPERATION 7
Check that all indicator lamps are giving normal indications
and, when warm, that the coolant temperature gauge is
in the green area.

IMPORTANT: If the indicator lamps or gauge does not

give the correct indications, STOP THE ENGINE IMME-
DIATELY AND CHECK FOR THE CAUSE.

94
 Operation

Starting the engine with the ther-

When running at low ambient temperatures, the engine mostarter (if equipped)
and gearbox will not heat to or keep the rated operating
temperature at slow engine speeds. Low engine speeds WARNING: DO NOT spray ether or gasoline
in cold temperatures can cause damage to the engine into the air induction manifold of the tractor
and gearbox. fitted with a thermostart system. It could cause
explosion and injury.
Use the following procedures to warm the engine oil
and transmission oil and to keep the correct operating To start a diesel engine at an ambient temperature of 7°C
temperatures. or less, the under described cold starting procedure with
thermostarter should be followed.
1. WARMING UP THE ENGINE AND TRANSMISSION.
OPERATION 1
A. To heat the transmission oil, run the engine at 1500
rpm for approximately five minutes. The general disengagement switch (if equipped) must
be turned on.
2. KEEP ENGINE AT THE CORRECT OPERATING
TEMPERATURE. OPERATION 2

A. When the engine is operating in cold ambient Fully depress the clutch pedal. Shift the range lever and
temperatures without a load, keep the engine warm the gear lever to the NEUTRAL position.
as described below.
OPERATION 3
B. Run the engine at approximately 1500 rpm.

C. Put a cover in front of the grille to control the

amount of air going through the radiator.

3. STOPPING THE ENGINE. 5

A. Run the engine at slow speed for a short period
of time. This will allow the engine temperature to
decrease gradually before stopping the engine.

XTRASHIFT TRACTOR

Shift the F/N/R lever to NEUTRAL.

NOTE: On tractors equipped with synchro-mesh, the

clutch pedal MUST be depressed before shifting the
reverse shuttle lever.

NOTE: XtraShift tractors are equipped with a neutral start

switch in the reverse shuttle circuit. However, if the For-
ward/Neutral/Reverse lever is not on neutral, the engine
will NOT start.

To next page...

95
Operation

OPERATION 4 Engine coolant heater (if equipped)

Make sure that the PTO clutch control is on the disen- This heater is installed in the engine block and keeps the
gaged position. engine coolant worm to make starting the engine easier
in cold weather.
IMPORTANT: The control of the rear PTO clutch MUST be
in the disengaged position or the starter motor will not
operate.
North American Tractors
OPERATION 5

Move the throttle lever to the FULL open position.

OPERATION 6

Connect the connector plug (1) on the engine block to an

electrical supply.

NOTE: If required, use a three-wire extension of proper

capacity.

Press the top part of the thermostarter (1) for 10-15
seconds, then turn the ignition key on the start position.
During the starting, the thermostarter switch should be Other tractors
kept depressed not longer than 30 seconds. When the
engine has started, bring the throttle on 1/3 of the open
position and let the engine run for 2 minutes.

NOTE: If the engine does not start and no alarm is heard,

check that ALL controls are in NEUTRAL. If the engine
operates erratically, press the thermostarter button again
while the engine is running. If the engine does not start
in the first 15 seconds then repeat the procedure, but
push the thermostart button for only 10 seconds. If the
engine still does not start, DO NOT try to start it again for
3 minutes at least.

OPERATION 7

Once the engine has started, check that all indicator lamps
and gauges are giving normal indications and, when the
engine is warm, the coolant temperature indicator is in Connect the connector plug (1) beside the right-hand step
the correct area. to an electrical supply.

IMPORTANT: If the indicator lamps or gauges do not NOTE: If required, use a three-wire extension of proper
give the correct indications, STOP THE ENGINE IMMEDI- capacity.
ATELY AND CHECK FOR THE CAUSE.

96
 Operation

PARKING THE TRACTOR

Use of accessories with the tractor at standstill Turning off the engine
(with engine running)
- Perform the previous Operatione 1 and 2.
Before operating the PTO or the hydraulic system in any
way, proceed as follows: OPERATION 3

OPERATION 1

Disengage the PTO clutch control, if in use.

OPERATION 4
XTRASHIFT TRACTOR

Stop the tractor and bring the lever of gearbox with reverse 5
shuttle to the NEUTRAL position.

NOTE: On tractors equipped with synchro-mesh, the

clutch pedal MUST be depressed before shifting the
reverse shuttle lever.

OPERATION 2

Bring the throttle lever fully back to the idle position and
let the engine idle.

Apply the parking brake.

OPERATION 5
Turn the key switch to the OFF position and remove the
key.

IMPORTANT: When stopping the engine after operat-

ing under heavy load, run the engine at idle speed for
a short period of time. This will allow the engine and
Press the clutch pedal and put into neutral both the range turbocharger temperature to decrease gradually.
lever and the gearshift lever.
OPERATION 6
Turn off master disconnect switch (if equipped) and re-
move the master switch key.

97
Operation

Wedges for folding wheels (if Master disconnect switch (if equip-
equipped) ped)
Use the master disconnect switch to disconnect the bat-
tery power from the electrical systems on the machine,
when leaving the tractor or during servicing to prevent
accidental start up.
It is a good habit to always remove the key to prevent
unauthorized use or accidents.

IMPORTANT: Do not use the master disconnect switch

to STOP the Diesel engine, or the machine power units
will be damaged. Such operation can only be consid-
ered as an emergency intervention.

Even if not actually required, it is advisable to insulate the

machine electric system at the end of each work day by
means of the master disconnect switch. This operation
increases safety and prolongs battery life.
Use the wheel wedge in front of or behind a rear wheel, NOTE: The master disconnect switch must be used for
(depending on the direction of the tractor), when parking any operation on the electric system. It is at any rate ad-
the tractor on a slope. visable to disconnect the battery completely if welding
is carried out on the machine.

IMPORTANT: To prevent accidents do not park the trac-

tor with equipment raised.

The position of the master disconnect switch changes

according to tractor model.
IMPORTANT: In case of fire, immediately detach the
cable from the positive terminal or, if equipped, operate
the master disconnect switch.

98
 Operation

USE OF THE GEARBOX

NOTE: At ambient temperatures of -10°C or less, the gearshift lever and the controls may be difficult to operate for the
first minutes after the start, until the oil in the gearbox is not warm.

IMPORTANT: If the tractor is moving, a gear should always be engaged (except when changing range, gear or direc-
tion). To do so could result in the operator not having full control of the tractor and may result in personal injury.

The tractor can be equipped with different transmission

types.

1. XtraShift gearbox 3. Synchro-mesh (mechanical)

Forward/reverse drive directions CAN be selected without - Forward/reverse drive directions CANNOT be selected
depressing the clutch pedal. without depressing the clutch pedal.

- 3-SPEED POWERSHIFT GEARBOX. Powershift - Ranges and speeds CANNOT be selected without
speeds CAN be selected without using the clutch depressing the clutch pedal.
pedal, with the tractor either moving or at standstill.
4. The creeper is an option also on ALL gearbox
- Ranges and speeds CANNOT be selected without versions
depressing the clutch pedal.
- CREEPER speeds CANNOT be selected without using
NOTE: On XtraShift tractors with 30 kph transmission,
the latter is electronically controlled and allows no
the clutch pedal.
5
ground speeds over 30 kph.

2. Two-speed Powershift gearbox

- Forward/reverse drive directions CANNOT be selected

without depressing the clutch pedal.

- Ranges and speeds CANNOT be selected without

depressing the clutch pedal.

- The 2-SPEED POWERSHIFT GEARBOX (speed reduc-

tion) CAN be selected without using the clutch pedal,
with the tractor either moving or at standstill.

99
Operation
Use of the XtraShift gearbox
NOTE: On XtraShift tractors with 30 kph transmission,
If the gearbox is provided with creeper speed, see the
the latter is electronically controlled and allows no
following pages for further information.
ground speeds over 30 kph.
Selecting Speeds with Tractor Stationary
OPERATION 3
OPERATION 1

Move the Powershift switch to position 1.
Select FORWARD or REVERSE.

IMPORTANT: The lever of the GEARBOX WITH REVERSE

OPERATION 2
SHUTTLE must be shifted only when the operator is sit-
ting in the drive seat. If the lever is moved without the
operator sitting on the seat the tractor will not move. The
operator must sit on the seat and move the lever back
into NEUTRAL and then into FORWARD to start the trac-
tor moving.

OPERATION 4

Disengage the park brake and release the clutch pedal

slowly. The tractor will start moving.

Fully depress the clutch pedal and select the required
range and gear.

100
 Operation

Selecting Speeds With Tractor Moving Drive direction change

To pass to a different range, depress the clutch pedal and

shift the lever to another position (upper or lower).

If you need to change
gear, depress the clutch
pedalor the clutch disen-
gagement button (1) (if
equipped) and
shift the lever to the new
position. For a smooth
speed change, the speed
lever should be shifted
from a speed to the next
in the correct sequence
(1, 2, 3, 4). The drive direction can be changes either with or without
the clutch pedal. Always slow the tractor down before
shifting the reverse shuttle lever to the required drive
direction.
The Powershift switch can be set on any position with the
tractor moving, without depressing the clutch pedal or the Transmission diagnostics
clutch disengagement button. To ensure that the gears
are shifted in the correct sequence, move the switch one In case of trasmission breakdown, the control unit detects
gear at a time in the 1, 2, 3 order. an error and warns the operator as follows:

If provided with a digital instrument cluster, the Powershift 1. "NEUTRAL" INDICATOR FLASHING
display (2) in the cluster will show the selected gear.
Error
5
Example : An attempt
was made to engage
reverse gear with the
gearshift or range lever(s)
in neutral.

Shift the reverse shuttle

lever on Neutral and re-
peat the operation.

2. "NEUTRAL" INDICATOR FLASHING AND ALARM

Transmission malfunc-
tion. Immediately call
your Dealer for help.

IMPORTANT: To prevent excessive deceleration of

the tractor ALWAYS downshift one speed at a time in
sequence 4, 3, 2, 1.

NOTE: On XtraShift tractors with 30 kph transmission,

the latter is electronically controlled and allows no
ground speeds over 30 kph.

101
Operation

Use of the two-speed Powershift OPERATION 2

gearbox
If the gearbox is provided with creeper speed, see the
following pages for further information.

Selecting Speeds with Tractor Stationary

OPERATION 1

Select direct drive (Hare) or speed reduction (Tortoise).

Use the “direct drive” for normal operation (Hare sym-

bol). If a load increment or a slight speed reduction are
required, lower the Powershift button on the speed lever
to the position with the Tortoise symbol (speed reduction).

This results in a speed reduction and an increase of the

Fully depress the clutch pedal and select the required
torque. NEVER select speed reduction to aid engine
range and gear.
stopping.
OPERATION 3

NOTE:

= DIRECT DRIVE, NORMAL

OPERATION

= SPEED REDUCTION,
TORQUE INCREASE.

Keep the clutch pedal depressed and select FORWARD

or REVERSE.

OPERATION 4

Disengage the park brake and release the clutch pedal

slowly. The tractor will start moving.

102
 Operation

Selecting Speeds With Tractor Moving Change of the direction of travel

To pass to another range or gear, depress the clutch pedal

and shift the levers to the new position. For a smooth
speed change, the speed lever should be shifted from
a speed to the next in the correct sequence (1, 2, 3, 4).

IMPORTANT: To prevent excessive deceleration of

the tractor ALWAYS downshift one speed at a time in
sequence 4, 3, 2, 1.

When changing the direction of travel, always depress

the clutch pedal and STOP the tractor completely before
shifting the lever of the gearbox with reverse shuttle to
the required direction.

103
Operation

Use of the synchronized gearbox OPERATION 2

If the gearbox is provided with creeper speed, see the

following pages for further information.

Selecting Speeds with Tractor Stationary

OPERATION 1

Keep the clutch pedal depressed and select FORWARD

or REVERSE.

OPERATION 3

Disengage the park brake and release the clutch pedal

slowly. The tractor will start moving.

Selecting Speeds With Tractor Moving

To pass to another range or gear, depress the clutch pedal

and shift the levers to the new position.

For a smooth speed change, the speed lever should be

shifted from a speed to the next in the correct sequence
(1, 2, 3, 4).

IMPORTANT: To prevent excessive deceleration of

the tractor ALWAYS downshift one speed at a time in
sequence 4, 3, 2, 1.

Change of the direction of travel

When changing the direction of travel, always depress

the clutch pedal and STOP the tractor completely before
Fully depress the clutch pedal and select the required shifting the lever of the gearbox with reverse shuttle to
range and gear. the required direction.

104
 Operation

Clutch pedal operation

ALWAYS use the clutch pedal during the following op-

erations:

- Selection or change of RANGE and GEAR, but not

with POWERSHIFT gearbox.

- Creeper engaging and disengaging (if equipped).

- When stopping the tractor.

- Change of direction of travel (if equipped with

synchro-mesh).

DO NOT ride the clutch pedal when the transmission is

under load. Release the clutch pedal completely within
The clutch pedal is used to temporarily disengage drive. 5 seconds for improved clutch service life.

The clutch pedal should be used during short travel dis-

tances or when the tractor is used in confined spaces,
when hitching implements to the tractor and stopping
the tractor.

The operator uses the clutch pedal to start a standing

tractor. Gradually and completely releasing the clutch
pedal for a controlled smooth start.
5

105
Operation

TRANSMISSION CREEPER OPERATION

(if equipped).

Transmission creeper speeds can be used for PTO type OPERATION 3

harvesting operations or other applications where slower
ground speeds are required. If necessary, move the speed lever and the Powershift
switch to the correct position to have the required
IMPORTANT: Do not use a creeper speed when a great speed.
draft on the tow bar is required.
Select FORWARD or REVERSE.
IMPORTANT: Do NOT engage a creeper speed when the
tractor is in the fourth range. Danger of damaging the OPERATION 4
transmission.
Disengage the park brake and release the clutch pedal
To operate the creeper: slowly. The tractor will start moving.

OPERATION 1 Adjust the engine speed rate to obtain the required ground
speed.
Follow the correct procedure to start the engine. Depress
the clutch pedal and follow operations 2 and 3. OPERATION 5

OPERATION 2 Change the gear/speed as required.

IMPORTANT: Do NOT engage a creeper speed when the

tractor is in the fourth range. Danger of damaging the
transmission. To disengage the creeper speed:

OPERATION 6

Reduce the engine RPM to the minimum rate.

Fully depress the clutch pedal and shift the RANGE and
GEAR levers to the neutral position.

OPERATION 7

Shift the reverse shuttle lever to neutral. Engage the park

brake.

L
Engage the creeper speed (snail symbol) by means of
the range selector.

106
 Operation

HOW TO TRANSPORT THE TRACTOR

Towing the tractor A. Engine running and/or low pressure hydraulic
Towing the tractor is not recommended, but if it should be
circuit operating.
absolutely necessary, the procedure is different depending
- Do not pull the tractor faster than 20 kph (12 mph).
on the fact that the engine is on or off, and that the low
- Disengage 4WD (if equipped).
pressure hydraulic circuit is operating or not operating.
- Disengage the differential lock.
- Check that the range and speed levers are in neutral
Use the following procedures as applicable, at the fol-
position.
lowing conditions:
- Connect safely one the tow hooks of the machine to the
NOTE: The engine should be running at 1200 RPM at least.
towing vehicle by means of a rigid drawbar, or a chain, or
Check brake operation.
a metal cable of suitable size.
- In the middle of the linking means a red flag is to be
hanged so that it is visible to other drivers on the road. B. Towing the tractor with the engine off and/or low
- The towing vehicle must keep the rotating beacon light pressure hydraulic circuit not operating.
operating. The towed tractor must keep the flashing
hazard lights operating (turn indicators flashing contem- WARNING: If the machine is towed with the
porarily). engine off (or with the low pressure hydraulic
- Make sure that the brakes of the machine are opera- circuit not operating), the brakes and steering
ting. will not be power assisted if this depends on the
- It is recommended that the machine is escorted by two low pressure hydraulic circuit. The parking brake
cars, one in front of it and one at the rear, at a distance must be disengaged.
of 75÷150 m from the machine. These cars must carry
danger signals according to the rules and laws of the - In 4WD tractors, remove the drive shaft of the front
country. axle.
- Fill up the transmission with 15 litres of transmission/
NOTE: For the tow hooks fixed on the machine, see the hydraulic oil of the recommended type. After towing the
Towing Attachments chapter in the Technical specifications
section of this book.
tractor, drain the excess oil so that the oil level in the
transmission reaches the FULL mark on the dipstick.
5
- Do not exceed a speed of 10 Kph when towing the tractor
CAUTION: Use exclusively the provided hooks to tow and check that the rear differential lock is disengaged.
the machine.
IMPORTANT: Power steering is not operating when the
Towing the tractor engine is not running. Therefore great care should be taken
when towing a tractor with the engine off.
WARNING: Make sure that the weight of a trailed
vehicle that is not equipped with brakes NEVER IMPORTANT: To avoid the tractor being damaged, carefully
EXCEEDS the weight of the tractor that is towing follow the above instructions when towing a tractor.
the vehicle or any national weight limitations
which may apply. Stopping distance increases Transport by Truck or Rail
with increasing speed as the weight of the towed When transporting the tractor by truck or rail, the following
load increases, especially on hills and slopes. rules must be followed.

- Check that all controls are in neutral and the parking - Put all gearshift levers into NEUTRAL.
brake is released. - Engage the PARKING brake.
- Tie the tractor down around the front and rear axles with
- Use a rigid tow bar and safety chains to pull the tractor. safety chains having a rating greater than the gross load
Attach the tow bar and safety chains to the tractor side of the tractor (refer to tractor P.l.N. plate).
channels or the front support.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT TIE ANY CHAINS AROUND THE
IMPORTANT: Owing to different lubrication pressures re- BRACKET HOLDING THE FRONT BALLAST TO KEEP THE
quired, the operating instructions if the engine is running TRACTOR LOW.
or not. Use the following procedures as applicable.
- Install blocks/wedges to prevent the wheels rolling.

107
Operation
DRAWBAR
The drawbar can be set in any of the positions fore/aft and offset.

Fore/Aft Position Left/Right Offset Position

NOTE: For what concerns working without PTO, the draw-
bar can be set in one of both front holes, according to the
required max. vertical load.

Remove the pivot pin retainer bolt (1) and the retainer bolt
(2) at the front of the drawbar.

Remove the retaining pin (3).

Move the drawbar to the left or to the right as required.

Install the retaining pin again.

When using the offset positions, raise the lower links to

full height. With the lower links in this position the hitch
B A will not interfere with the side movement of the swing-
ing drawbar.

Slide the drawbar backward or forward to the required IMPORTANT: The drawbar must be locked in the centre
drawbar position (A or B) as indicated on the implement position when doing any of the following operations:
or in the implement operator's manual.
A. Towing implements at transport speed (15 kph - 10
When the correct position of the drawbar has been set, mph - or more) in the field.
install the pivot pin (2) and the retainer bolt (1). B. Towing an implement or trailer on the highway at all
speeds.
C. Operating a drawbar pulled, PTO driven implement.
D. Moving the tractor in reverse with an implement at-
tached.

108
 Operation
IMPORTANT: Make sure local regulations are followed Drawbar Positions for PTO Opera-
when towing implements/trailers.
tion
WARNING: Rear upset can result if pulling from
When using power take-off driven equipment (which
wrong location on tractor. Always use the draw-
would normally require an equal angle hitch drawbar
bar for this purpose. Use 3 point hitch only with
extension), the drawbar can be installed in two different
the implements designed for its use, not as a
fore/aft positions (‘A’ for 1000 rpm or ‘B’ for 540 rpm). This
drawbar.
position depends on the PTO option that is mounted on
the tractor.
WARNING: Try to balance the load primarily on
the implement wheels, as in loading a machine
For drawbar position and the allowed relative vertical
with harvest crops. Avoid overloading the draw-
loads, please refer to the following figures and drawings.
bar. Add front end weights for improved stability.
Also refer to the implement operator’s manual before
Engage the clutch smoothly, avoid jerking and use
making any adjustments.
the brakes cautiously to avoid jack- knifing. In
certain markets pulling trailers on public roads
NOTE: For what concerns working without PTO, the draw-
is not permitted unless a special approval note
bar can be set in one of both front holes, according to the
has been supplied with the machine documents.
required max. vertical load.
Always make sure you have the relevant approval
before pulling trailers on public roads.

CAUTION: Refer to licensing documents issued by the

Ministry of Transport to know data relating to max.
vertical and horizontal loads on tow hooks and max.
trailer weights.

109
Operation

Position of the drawbar for single or double shaft PTO operation

B A
2

Position of the drawbar for shiftable PTO operation

2
A

1. SINGLE OR DOUBLE SHAFT PTO: DISTANCE OF 394 mm FROM THE SHAFT END TO CENTER OF THE IMPLEMENT
PIN HOLE
1. SHIFTABLE PTO: DISTANCE OF 410 mm FROM THE SHAFT END TO CENTER OF THE IMPLEMENT PIN HOLE
2. IMPLEMENT PIN HOLE
3. FRONT OF THE TRACTOR

PTO WITH SINGLE/DOUBLE SHAFT SHIFTABLE

PTO
POSITIONS OF DRAWBAR “A” “B” “A”
AND PTO SPEED 1,000 RPM 540 RPM 540/1000 RPM
540/750 RPM

STANDARD DRAWBAR AND

794 kg 880 kg 794 kg
MAX. VERTICAL LOAD

HEAVY DRAWBAR AND 1,070 kg 1,240 kg 1,070 kg

MAX. VERTICAL LOAD

110
 Operation

Connecting Implement to Drawbar 5. When working with the drawbar, raise the lower links
as high as possible to prevent interference between
the lower links and the implement.

When connecting an implement, always: 6. When working with a PTO-operated implement, lock
the drawbar in the central position of its support and
1. Connect towed implements to the drawbar only. lock with the retaining pin. Also refer to page 83 to see
the correct fore/aft position of the drawbar.
2. Use the hardened steel hitch pin supplied to connect
the implement to the drawbar. Make sure the pin is 7. The clevis (if equipped) must be removed from the
held securely in place with a lock pin. drawbar or mounted under the drawbar (see example
B), to prevent possible interference between the clevis
3. If both the tractor and the implement are equipped and the implement driveline.
with a drawbar clevis, remove the clevis from the trac-
tor OR implement. DO NOT PUT A LONG HITCH PIN IMPORTANT: Only use a 50 mm inner diameter towing eye.
THROUGH BOTH THE IMPLEMENT CLEVIS AND THE Refer to the manual for DIMENSIONS OF THE DRAWBAR
DRAWBAR CLEVIS. FOR TRAILERS/IMPLEMENTS.
See examples A and B below for correct methods of
using a clevis type hitch.

EXAMPLE A Drawbar Safety Chain

5
EXAMPLE B

EXAMPLE B

1. TRACTOR DRAWBAR
When towing an implement (1) on the highway, use a
2. IMPLEMENT DRAWBAR
safety chain (2), with a rating greater than the gross weight
of the implement, as an auxiliary connection between the
tractor drawbar (3) and the implement (1).
NOTE: For non-PTO work, the drawbar can be set in any
of the fore/aft positions, depending on maximum vertical
Check the implement operator's manual for the implement
load required.
weight and any specific attaching hardware specifica-
tions.
4. Adjust the drawbar so that the centre line of the pulling
force of the tractor will be aligned with the centre line
After attaching the safety chain make sure the chain is
of the implement.
adjusted correctly. Drive the tractor for a short while,
turning to the right and to the left to check that the chain
is neither too short or too long.

Adjust the chain length as required.

111
Operation
HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE TRAILER HITCHES
(if equipped).

These hitches can be adjusted up or down to match the IMPORTANT: Check that the locking pins (4) have fully
implement hitch height and to give clearance for the top engaged in the holes in the side support (locking pins
link or for PTO operation. level with the outer surface).

IMPORTANT: Make sure local regulations are followed IMPORTANT: Use only implement towing eyes with 40 or
when towing implements/trailers. 50 mm inner diameter, see page 92.

NOTE: For ALL trailer hitches the trailer clevis hole diam- IMPORTANT: The connecting pin (3, left-hand figure be-
eter and the hitch pin diameter must not have excessive low) engages automatically as the implement towing eye
clearance. contacts the release mechanism inside the hitch coupling
or it can be engaged manually by striking the operating
IMPORTANT: Maximum vertical load capacity is 1,500 kg lever (2) downwards (away from the tractor) to the hori-
(6613 lb) depending upon the capacity of the rear tyres zontal position.
fitted. Where applicable, refer to your approval docu-
mentation.

CAUTION: Refer to licensing documents issued by the

Ministry of Transport to know data relating to max.
vertical and horizontal loads on tow hooks and max.
trailer weights.

Automatic type

WARNING: DO NOT touch the inside of the hitch

coupling assembly when the release mechanism is
under tension, (operating lever (1) in the vertical
position). Serious injury can result.

This hitch connects automatically when the implement

towing eye contacts the release mechanism (3) inside the
hitch coupling. Before connecting an implement make
sure the operating lever (2) is in the vertical position, as
shown.

To next page...

To adjust the height, support the weight of the hitch cou-
pling assembly with one hand and with the other hand
pull the quick release lever (1) to the right.

Move the hitch coupling assembly to the required posi-

tion. Push the quick release lever (1) to the left to lock
the coupling assembly in position.

112
 Operation

IMPORTANT: Before moving the tractor make sure: IMPORTANT: If it does not return in the lock position, adjust
A. The indicator pin (5) is fully in. the nut (6) until it returns to the lock position.
B. The operating lever (2) is in the horizontal position.
C. The connecting pin (3) is fully in the hole of the pin
guidance bushing (fully engaged). Do not tow or move if
the pin is not fully engaged.
“Type A”, manual

IMPORTANT: When the automatic hitch is not being used,

make sure the hitch connecting pin (3) is down and the This type of coupling has to be connected manually by
operating lever (2) is horizontal.
IMPORTANT: Keep the hitch clean and protect all mov-
hand.
5
ing parts of the hitch from corrosion, (including the inner To adjust the height, support the weight of the hitch cou-
slide rails), by cleaning and greasing at regular intervals. pling assembly with one hand and with the other hand
All moving parts should be checked for free movement pull the quick release lever (1) to the right.
and correct operation. Refer to Lubrication/Maintenance
Section for more information. Move the hitch coupling assembly to the required posi-
tion. Push the release lever to the left and down to lock
in position.

IMPORTANT: Check that the retaining pins have fully en-

Internal release of the trailer hitch (if equipped) gaged in the holes in the side support (retaining pins level
with the outer surface).

To remove the hitch pin (2), pull the release latch sleeve
(3) up. Check the latch sleeve for complete insertion after
mounting the hitch pin.

IMPORTANT: Keep the hitch clean and protect all moving

parts of the hitch from corrosion (including the inner slide
rails), by cleaning and greasing at regular intervals.

All moving parts should be checked for free movement

and correct operation.

Refer to Lubrication/Maintenance Section for more infor-

mation.

It is useful to release the implement towing eye without

leaving the tractor.
To activate, push on the lever to release it, then turn the
lever 180 degrees. The connecting pin (3) must be disen-
gaged and the hitch control lever (2) must be in vertical
position. The hitch release lever must automatically return
to the locking position

113
Operation

Type B, manual IMPORTANT: Keep the hitch clean and protect all mov-
ing parts of the hitch from corrosion, (including the inner
slide rails), by cleaning and greasing at regular intervals.
All moving parts should be checked for free movement
and correct operation. Refer to Lubrication/Maintenance
Section for more information.

Piton- Fixe (If Equipped)

To adjust the height, pull the release knob (1) out. Raise
the handle (2) and while supporting the weight of the
coupling assembly with the other hand, raise or lower
the assembly to the required position.

Lower the handle (2). The release knob (1) will spring back
to lock hitch coupler assembly into position.

IMPORTANT: Check that the locking pins (3) have fully

engaged in the holes in the side support (locking pins
level with the outer surface).

To connect an implement/trailer, remove the spring clip

and pin (1) and lift the retaining hook (2).

Install the implement towing eye over the towing pin (3)
and lower the retaining hook (2).

Install the pin and spring clip (1).

IMPORTANT: The implement towing eye must have an

internal diameter of 50 mm.

To connect an implement/trailer, remove the spring clip

(4) and hitch pin (5).

Enter the implement/trailer towing eye into the clevis,

install the hitch pin (5) to secure the implement/trailer.
Install the spring clip (4).

114
 Operation

AUTOMATIC HITCH
(if equipped)

Connecting an implement OPERATION 3

(ONLY for tractors equipped with Ride Control)
WARNING: The maximum load capacity of the
automatic hitch is 2,250 kg for the hitch and
1,500 kg for the tow bar.
EEC approved [Directive 89/173/EEC, Annex IV,
Appendix 2 (dynamic test method)]
The figures depend on the limitations according
to the capacity of the rear tyres in use. Do not
work with loads greater than the maximum al-
lowed ones. This damages the automatic hitch
and the rod. It also reduces stability of the front
part.
The requirements of the rules in force may call for
a special permit for the automatic hitch before
allowing its use on public roads.

Press and hold the top of the Ride Control until the hitch
OPERATION 1 stops upward movement.

OPERATION 4

Turn the upper limit control knob (1) to the maximum

setting (setting 11).

OPERATION 2
Keep the Ride Control button pressed (if applicable),
Lift the automatic hitch to maximum height, by turning and press the hitch auto release control to release the
to the right the control knob of the three-point linkage, retainers.
on the position 10, or putting on the DOWN position the
UP/DOWN button. Release the Ride Control button (if applicable), to let the
hitch go down to the upper limit position.
IMPORTANT: Turn the DRAFT CONTROL knob completely
clockwise to the OFF position (O) to avoid any accidental OPERATION 5
lifting when the tractor moves at a speed greater than
0.8 kph. Lower the automatic hitch by turning to the left the control
knob of the three-point linkage or putting on the DOWN
position the UP/DOWN button.

115
Operation
OPERATION 6 OPERATION 9
(ONLY for tractors equipped with Ride Control)

Reverse the tractor until the hitch aligns with the imple-
ment towing eyes. Press and hold the Ride Control switch fully forward (to
the hitch override position) until the hitch stops upward
OPERATION 7 movement and the locking latches are latched.

Lift the automatic hitch until the hitch hooks into the Release the Ride Control switch. The hitch goes down to
towing eye. the upper limit position.

OPERATION 8
OPERATION 10
Raise the auto hitch to maximum height.

Lower the hitch onto the locking latches to take the weight
off the hydraulic system.

IMPORTANT: The hitch must always be supported by the

locking latches, NOT by the hydraulic system. If the locking
latches do not lock, adjust the lift rods. If after adjustment
the locking latches still do not lock, see your dealer.

NOTE: The implement/trailer was removed for the

photo.

116
 Operation

Hook/Clevis Change Over OPERATION 3

IMPORTANT: DO NOT use the extended drawbar position

to tow heavy loads (e.g. single or twin-axis trailers, manure
spreaders, tanks etc.).

OPERATION 1

Remove the yoke drawbar and mount the hitch. Insert the
2 locking pins and the "R" retainers.

OPERATION 4

Lower the auto hitch half way.

IMPORTANT: After lowering or extending the auto hitch,

stop the engine, put all levers in neutral and engage the
parking brake before leaving the tractor. 5

OPERATION 2

Mount the yoke drawbar in rest position (optional, if

equipped).

Remove both retainers “R” (1) and both locking pins.

117
Operation

Auto Hitch Clevis Positions Position for Pulling Operations

Position for Power Take-off Operations

For pulling operations, install the drawbar in the fully

forward position.

The MAXIMUM drawbar load in this position is 1,500

kg.
Install the drawbar in the fully extended rearward with one
hole (1) in the drawbar showing.
The MAXIMUM hook load in this position is 2,250 kg
(6614 lb).
The MAXIMUM drawbar load in this position is 1,400 kg.
Also comply with tyre capacity and local legal require-
Also comply with tyre capacity and local legal require-
ments.
ments.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT use the extended drawbar position
NOTE: In certain markets pulling trailers on public roads
to tow heavy loads (e.g. single or twin-axis trailers, manure
is not permitted unless a special approval note has been
spreaders, tanks etc.).
supplied with the machine documents.

Position for Power Take-off Operations - Offset

positions

The drawbar can be installed at an offset angle, in the

PTO position.

118
 Operation

IMPLEMENT/TRAILER DRAWBAR DIMENSIONS

A) For Piton-Fixe, Auto Hitch C) Automatic clevis for trailer
(B.S.2) and Swinging Drawbar hitch (with special coupling) -
(German clevis)

<
<

30mm X

>
>

> 50 < > Y <

mm
120°

<
<

110 Z
mm

>
>

When using this type of trailer hitch, ONLY use a trailer/

When using a Piton-Fixe, Auto Hitch or swinging Drawbar, implement drawbar to DIN 74054, DIN 11043 and DIN
the trailer/implement drawbar must be to ISO 5692 stand- 11026 standard dimensions. This will improve connection
ard dimensions. If any other drawbar is used, damage to between hitch and trailer/ implement drawbar. If any other
your tractor can/will occur. drawbar is used, damage to your tractor can/will occur.

B) Manual and Automatic Clevis

Type Trailer Hitches - (EURO 5
Clevis)
X (mm) Y (mm) Z (mm)

DIN 74054 30 40 100

DIN 11026 42 40 100
<

X DIN 11043 32 40 100

>

> Y <
If this type of trailer hitch is fitted, a decal will be posi-
tioned near the hitch clevis.
<

Z
>

When using a manual or automatic clevis type trailer hitch,

the trailer/implement drawbar must be to DIN 74054,
DIN 74053, DIN 11043, DIN 11026 or ISO 5692 standard
dimensions. If any other drawbar is used, damage to your
tractor can/will occur.

X (mm) Y (mm) Z (mm)

DIN 74053 45 50 115

DIN 7454 30 40 100
DIN 11026 42 40 100
DIN 11043 32 40 100
ISO 5692 30 50 110

119
Operation

TRAILER BRAKE COUPLINGS (if equipped)

Pneumatic Trailer Brakes (if equipped) - Single or dual line system

1. YELLOW COUPLING - BRAKE SERVICE LINE (DUAL LINE SYSTEM)

2. BLACK COUPLING - FEED AND RETURN (SINGLE LINE SYSTEM)
3. RED COUPLING - BRAKE EMERGENCY LINE (DUAL LINE SYSTEM)
4. DUST GUARD

WARNING: Make sure the system is at working

pressure before operating the brakes with a
trailer(s) fitted. Failure to do this can result in
injury or death.

WARNING: DO NOT park an unattended trac-

tor/trailer(s) combination using air pressure to
apply the brakes (Dual Line Pneumatic Braking
System). The mechanical park brake on both the
tractor and trailer(s) MUST be applied.

The air reservoirs store air under pressure to operate the

trailer brakes.

Max. pressure: 12.5 Bar

Max working Pressure 8 Bar

NOTE: A low pressure indicator (within the air gauge) Water drain plunger.
will light up, an alarm will sound and the master warning
lamp will light up if the system pressure drops below 4
bar (58 psi).

Capacities: 10 (x2) litres

Drain Reservoirs: Every 10 Hours, or daily

120
 Operation

Hydraulic Trailer Brakes Hydraulic trailer brake (Approved for

(if equipped). Italy) (if equipped).
The coupling for the hydraulic brakes for trailers (1) is The tractor braking system can be equipped with a hy-
mounted at the left of the quick couplings of the auxiliary draulic valve which allows the trailer itself to be braked
control valves. along with the tractor.
Comply with the following instructions to correctly con-
To connect and disconnect: nect and disconnect the flexible trailer brake hose to and
from the union (1) at the rear of the tractor and to always
Slide the sleeve back on the trailer brake coupler and push operate in conditions of the utmost safety.
on or pull off, then release the sleeve.
The trailer-tractor connecting tube can be connected
and disconnected with the engine either running or at a
standstill:

- With the engine at a standstill: there are no difficulties

when either connecting or disconnecting as there is no
oil pressure in the brake circuit.

- With the engine running: it is essential to engage the

hand brake since this ensures that no pressure remains
in the brake circuit.

WARNING: It is extremely important to ALWAYS carry

out this operation before detaching the trailer from
the tractor since it ensures the immediate action of
the automatic safety braking system with which this
trailer braking system is obligatorily equipped.
5
There is a specific indicator light (if equipped) on the
control panel of the tractor which keeps the operator
constantly informed about the operating conditions of
the trailer brake oil tap.

Indicator light off:

- When the oil tap is not connected to the trailer.
- When the pressure of the oil in the circuit is regular with
the trailer connected.

Indicator light on:

- When the engine is at a standstill and the ignition key
is turned to first position.
- When the hand brake is engaged with the engine run-
ning.

WARNING: If the indicator light should come on

in other conditions than those mentioned above,
this means that there is a fault in the braking
system and that use of it must immediately stop
and the breaking system be checked for obvious
safety reasons.

121
Operation

AUXILIARY ELECTRICAL POWER SOCKETS

Pin number 4 and 7 are controlled through the key switch.

Seven Terminal Electrical Socket These circuits are protected by a 30 A fuse. See Electrical
System Circuit Protection in this manual.
The seven terminal electrical outlet socket is fitted to all
tractors to supply power to operate the electrical systems
of implements, trailer lighting, warning lamps, and field
lights. The correct plug to fit the socket can be obtained
Rest Of World Tractors
from your dealer.
Observe local legal requirements.

NOTE: If the warning lamp, implement or trailer connec-

tor plug is not a seven terminal type, the plug must be
changed.

North American Tractors

The small socket (1) to the right of the seven terminal

electrical outlet is used for connecting accessories on to
an implement or trailer, e.g. rotating beacon.
Power to the socket will only be available at the socket
when the Rotating Beacon Switch (If Equipped) is in the
ON position.

NOTE: The correct plug to fit the small socket can be

obtained from your dealer.
Terminal position and circuits
Terminal position and circuits

TERMINAL N. CIRCUIT (CABLE COLOUR) TERMINAL N. USE

1......................................................................GROUND (WHITE) 1 L............................................................ LH TURN INDICATORS

2.............................................................. FIELD LIGHTS (BLACK) 2 54g............................................................. REAR FOG LAMPS

3............................................LEFT TURN INDICATOR (YELLOW) 3 31................................................................. EARTH (GROUND)

4..........................................................AUXILIARY POWER (RED) 4 R .......................................................... LH TURN INDICATORS

5............................................ RIGHT TURN INDICATOR (GREEN) 5 58R ......................................................RH REAR/SIDE LAMPS

6...............................................................TAIL LAMPS (BROWN) 6 54...................................................................... BRAKE LIGHTS

7........................................................AUXILIARY POWER (BLUE) 7 58L........................................................ LH REAR/SIDE LAMPS

122
 Operation

Three terminal electrical sockets

NOTE: The correct 3 pin plug to fit the sockets can be
obtained from your dealer.

On the right side of the dashboard

FRONT VIEW

A. NORTH AMERICA B. OTHER COUNTRIES

1. POWER - THROUGH KEY SWITCH (RED CABLE)

2. POWER - DIRECT (RED CABLE)
3. GROUND (BROWN CABLE)

On the right-hand console behind the seat.

Two auxiliary electrical power sockets are provided inside

the operators compartment for connecting monitors,
implement controllers, C.B. radios, and other 12 volt
equipment.

123
Operation
IMPLEMENT CABLE ACCESS
Access is provided for implement cables in the right hand To fit cables:
corner of the rear window.
OPERATION 1

Open the rear window and remove the rubber grommet

by pulling upward.

OPERATION 2

Cut the grommet down (1) into the centre of the circle area
and then cut out the centre (2) to fit the cable(s).

OPERATION 3

Fit the grommet over the cable(s) and install the grommet
and cable(s) into the slots in the cab.

OPERATION 4

Close the rear window.

There are also tapped holes provided in the cab posts,

behind the plastic trim, for mounting an implement
monitor.

For full installation instructions and replacement grom-

mets see you dealer.

124
 Operation
REAR POWER TAKEOFF
PTO Operation: safety 6. Always stop the engine before changing PTO shaft
and before connecting an implement to the PTO shaft.
When using power take-off operated equipment the fol- This releases the tractor PTO brake and allows the PTO
lowing rules MUST be followed: shaft to be turned by hand so that the splines of the
tractor and implement PTO shafts can be aligned.
1. ALWAYS follow the implement manufacturers recom-
mendations (refer to implement Operator's Manual) 7. This tractor is equipped with a PTO brake which may
when adjusting and aligning the implement and the be damaged by the continued rotation of high inertia
implement driveline with the tractor. implements. To prevent damage to the PTO brake, only
use implements with an Over-Run mechanism to make
2. On a tractor with a three point hitch, both lift links sure that no implement rotation continues against the
must be set as specified in the implement Operator's PTO brake when the PTO has been switched OFF.
Manual.
WARNING: ALWAYS read and comply with the im-
3. Set the three point hitch so as to limit the lateral plement manufacturers operators manual before
movement of any implement attached. attaching and using any implement.

4. The Upper Limit (maximum lift) for the three-point WARNING: To prevent damage to the 540 PTO
linkage must be set correctly; see Electronic Power driveline and/or injury to bystanders do not at-
Lift description for instruction on how to adjust the tach implements that require more than 56 kW
maximum lift height. (75 hp) to operate. If this limit is exceeded, the
PTO is designed to automatically disengage.
5. If attaching an implement to the drawbar: Implements that require more than 56 kW (75
hp) should only be attached to the 1000 rpm
- Hold the drawbar in the centre location on the PTO driveline.
rear support with the retaining pins.

- Raise the three point hitch as high as possible to

WARNING: When attaching implements ALWAYS
make sure they are matched to the tractor PTO 5
prevent possible interference between the lower SPEEDS. Do not exceed the recommended speeds
links and the implement. of the driven machine. Do not operate the PTO un-
less the shaft and drive line shields are in position
- The drawbar clevis (if equipped) must be removed and the tachometer is working correctly.
or mounted under the drawbar, to prevent possible
interference between the clevis and the implement WARNING: PTO driven implements can cause
driveline. serious injury. Before working on or near the
PTO shaft, or servicing or clearing the imple-
- Connect the implement to the drawbar with a ment, ALWAYS DISENGAGE the PTO and STOP
hardened steel pin. Make sure the pin is securely the engine.
held in place with a cotter pin or lock pin and does
not make contact with the implement driveline. WARNING: When doing stationary PTO work and
dismounting from the tractor with the PTO run-
- Connect the implement to the tractor drawbar ning, keep clear of all moving parts as they are
before connecting the implement driveline to the a potential safety hazard.
power take-off. When connecting the implement
driveline to the tractor, check the driveline for WARNING: 540 ECO power take-off is obtained
correct length and for free telescopic movement. at 1448 RPM. Never exceed a 1689 RPM engine
The correct length is important to prevent the rated speed (corresponding to 630 RPM of the
driveline from hitting bottom or from separating PTO shaft) or the PTO shaft and the connected
in any tractor or implement operating position. implement could be seriously damaged.

125
Operation

PTO options
3. Shiftable Type PTO
A variety of PTO outlets is available to meet various market
requirements. Options are:

1. Single shaft PTO

Two options are available for the shiftable PTO:

A lower 6-spine shaft spinning at 540 RPM or 750 RPM.

OR
This optional PTO has a 6-spline upper shaft spinning at
540 RPM. A lower 6-spine shaft spinning at 540 RPM or 1000
RPM.

NOTE: The PTO guard was removed from the above draw-
2. Double shaft PTO ings for illustrations purposes only. NEVER use the tractor
PTO without its guard.

PTO Speed Shift (Shiftable Speed PTO)

NOTE: Make sure that the position of the drawbar is correct

if PTO operated implements are to be towed.

The speed of the optional shiftable PTO is changed by a

lever (1) on the right-hand console. Shift the lever to the
right for 540 RPM or to the left for 750/1000 RPM, accord-
ing to the equipment.

The double shaft PTO is available in two models:

One option has a 6-spline upper shaft spinning at 540

RPM, another option has a 21-spline lower shaft spinning
at 1000 RPM.

Two 6-spline shafts. The upper shaft spins at 540 RPM,

the lower shaft spins at 1000 RPM.
1. SHIFTABLE PTO LEVER

126
 Operation
Use of the power take-off
The PTO is independent from the transmission and can PTO with engagement switch (optional only with
be operated in any moment when the engine is on and Xtrashift gearbox)
the tractor either at standstill or moving.
The PTO is available with two types of control, depending
on tractor model:
- Electro-hydraulic PTO with engagement switch on the
right-hand console: the engagement and disengagement
phases are directly managed by the controller.
- Hydraulic PTO with control lever on the right-hand side
of the seat. By a control lever, the operator controls the
engagement speed of the clutch to obtain a smooth en-
gagement in any situation.

NOTE: The engine can be started only if the PTO engage-

ment control is in the OFF position.

NOTE: Use the upper limit control (see Electronic Hitch)

when using the PTO. ENGAGEMENT
- Reduce the engine rpm.
To view PTO functions on the dashboard, refer to the - Lift the locking collar on the PTO ON/ OFF switch and
description of the PTO Display in the instrument cluster, pull the switch up to the ON position to engage the PTO.
Section "Instruments and Programming". Now the switch will remain on the ON position, while the
PTO indicator light on the instrument panel lights up.

IMPORTANT: When the PTO is engaged, it disengages if

PTO with engagement lever (standard version) the engine is stopped, but the switch remains in the EN-
GAGED position. The engine will NOT start again until the
switch is brought to the DISENGAGED position to operate
the safety starting switch.
5
DISENGAGEMENT
- Reduce the engine rpm.
- Push the ON/OFF switch fully down. The PTO indicator
light on the instrument panel goes off.

IMPORTANT: High-inertia implements do not become

stationary immediately when PTO is disengaged. Allow
sufficient time for implement to “run down” to a halt before
cleaning or adjusting.
ENGAGEMENT
- Reduce the engine rpm.
- Shift the lever of the PTO clutch forward towards the
offset in the groove, for three seconds, then move it
completely forward to engage the PTO.

IMPORTANT: The PTO clutch lever MUST NOT remain in

the intermediate position for a long time. The PTO clutch
could slip. overheat or be damaged.

IMPORTANT: When the PTO is engaged, it disengages if

the engine is stopped, but the lever remains in the EN-
GAGED position. The engine will NOT start again until the
lever is brought to the DISENGAGED position to operate
the safety starting switch.
The shaft guard must be mounted when the PTO is not
in use.
DISENGAGEMENT
- Reduce the engine rpm. IMPORTANT: Do not operate the PTO without its guards
- Shift the PTO clutch lever completely back to the end of fitted. Check the tachometer for proper operation. Read the
the groove, in the disengagement position. Operator’s Manual supplied with PTO driven equipment.

127
Operation

External PTO Controls

(Only for electro-hydraulic PTO, if equipped)
With the tractor stationary, the operator can leave the cab Disengaging the PTO from inside the cab after be-
and use the remote push button switches to turn the PTO ing engaged using the external controls:
ON and OFF.

Remote control of the PTO is independent of the internal

cab controls and the Operator Presence Switch.

WARNING: Stand well clear of the PTO shaft when

operating the external PTO controls or injury can
result from contact with moving parts.

WARNING: External controls must be operated

at a safe distance, standing on one side outside
the tractor and out of the overall width of mud-
guards. It is expressly forbidden to operate the
controls from the rear of the tractor or standing
on the inner side of wheels.

Engaging/Disengaging the PTO Using External

Controls: Push the yellow dome on the ON/OFF switch down to dis-
engage the PTO. The PTO indicator lamp will turn off.
NOTE: The tractor must be stationary for the remote push
buttons to operate. Re-engaging the PTO from inside the cab after
being engaged from inside the cab and then dis-
engaged using the external controls:

The PTO ON/OFF button will be in the ON position (button

fully raised), but the PTO shaft is stationary (due to being
switched OFF by the external controls). The PTO indicator
lamp on the right-hand console will be flashing.

Press and hold the yellow ON push

button for 3 seconds.
The PTO indicator lamp on the right
hand console will go on.

NOTE: If the push button is released before the 3 second

period the PTO will disengage.

Press the red OFF push button to

immediately disengage the PTO.
The PTO indicator lamp on the right
hand console will turn off.

NOTE: With the PTO engaged and the tractor in motion, if

either of the external PTO push buttons are operated the Push the ON/OFF button fully down. The PTO indicator
PTO will immediately disengage. To reset the PTO, push lamp will turn off.
the internal PTO ON/OFF button down to disengage and
then re-engage the PTO. Lift the locking collar on the ON/OFF button and pull the
To reset the external remote PTO controls it will be neces- switch up to the ON position. The switch will stay in the
sary to turn the key switch to OFF then restart the tractor. ON position and the PTO indicator lamp will illuminate to
indicate the PTO shaft is rotating.

128
 Operation

PTO Safety Guards PTO error codes

All tractors with a power take-off have a large safety guard In case of PTO malfunction, the instrument cluster will
(1) and a small tube type guard (2) for the splined output display an exclamation mark. To check the PTO error code,
shaft. To prevent injury to the operator, the tractor power refer to the Error menu on the digital instrument cluster.
take-off safety guard and the shields for the telescopic
shaft assembly must be used. If possible, raise the guard
when connecting an implement and lower the guard to
horizontal when using the 3-point hitch and a non-PTO-
driven implement.

WARNING: When an operation ERROR is displayed,

ask the Dealer's specialized personnel for help in-

WARNING: Do not exceed the recommended

dicating the error code. The Dealer's personnel has
specific competences to locate the error and the type
5
speeds of the driven machine. Do not operate the of operation to be performed.
PTO unless the shaft and drive line shields are in
position and the tachometer is working correctly.
Read and learn to understand the Operator's
Manuals supplied with any PTO driven equip-
ment which may be attached to the machine.

WARNING: Whenever a PTO driven implement is

in operation, the PTO guards MUST be in place
during operation to prevent injury to the opera-
tor or bystanders. Where attachments, such as
pumps, are installed on the PTO shaft (especially
if the tractor PTO guard is moved upward or re-
moved) extended shielding equivalent to the PTO
guard must be installed with the attachment. In-
stall the PTO guard again to its original position
immediately after removing the attachment.

129
Operation

FRONT POWER TAKE-OFF OPERATION

(if equipped).
The front power take-off has a 6 spline output shaft which Engage the PTO as follows:
rotates at 1000 rpm. Engagement is actuated by a three
position rocker switch (OFF, ON and ENGAGED) situated OPERATION 1
on the RH side console.
Reduce the engine rpm.
Depending upon tractor model/PTO manufacturer and also
market requirements, the front PTO may be supplied with OPERATION 2
two different directions of rotation (clockwise or counter-
clockwise). See your dealer for more information. Press the top of the switch
down, push the switch lock
IMPORTANT: When using implements which cause shock (1) (on the bottom of the
loads, ALWAYS have a slip clutch fitted between the im- switch) down and at the
plement and the tractor PTO drive shaft. Before using the same time press the switch
implement check the slip clutch is working correctly and down again and release.
the implement is free to run.
An indicator lamp in the
IMPORTANT: When using implements which have fast switch will go on when the
moving parts (e.g. mowers, corn choppers or snow front power take-off is en-
blowers), ALWAYS install an Over-Run mechanism to the gaged.
implement drive shaft to prevent PTO failure.

IMPORTANT: Make sure the PTO shaft on the implement is

not too long or the PTO will be damaged if the front hitch
is raised to full height.
IMPORTANT: PTO will not engage if engine is started
WARNING: ALWAYS read and comply with the im- with the switch in the engage position. Move switch to
plement manufacturers operators manual before disengage and then engage.
attaching and using any implement.
IMPORTANT: Never try to release dead-locked implements
by repeated clutch engagement and disengagement.
The front power takeoff clutch will slip and become dam-
aged.

Disengage the PTO as follows:

OPERATION 1
Reduce the engine rpm.

OPERATION 2
Push the bottom of the switch (1) down to the OFF posi-
tion, the indicator lamp in the switch will go out when the
front power take-off is disengaged.

OPERATION 3
When the engine is switched off, the front power take-
off is automatically disengaged. The indicator lamp in
the switch will go out to indicate the front PTO is disen-
gaged.

OPERATION 4
Always install the PTO shaft guard when the PTO is not
being used.

IMPORTANT: High-inertia implements do not become

stationary immediately when PTO is disengaged. Allow
sufficient time for implement to “run down” to a halt before
cleaning or adjusting.

130
 Operation

REAR THREE-POINT HITCH PREPARATION

The three-point hitch system gives position control and load control of soil engaging implements.

This tractor is equipped with Cat. II link ends. The linkage can be converted in a Cat. I linkage by means of three reducer
bushings, one for each lower link and one for the top link, all of which are available from your dealer. All tractors are equipped
with outside stabilizers or control chains end of fix or telescopic lower links, according to customer's specifications.

IMPORTANT: The tractor is provided with a linkage that suits to Cat. II implements, compliant with SAE-ASAE standard
dimensions:

.
DIMENSIONS IDENTIFYING IMPLEMENTS

Cat. I Implement Cat. II Implement

Diameter Of Hitch Pins 22.3 mm 28.6 mm
(OPTIONAL BUSHINGS) (MOUNTED AT THE FACTORY)

Distance between the

shoulders of the hitch pins 682.6 mm 819 mm
Gap In Top
44.5 mm 52.4 mm
of Implement
Diameter of Holes in Top of 19 mm 25.4 mm
Implement

WARNING: Extreme care must be exercised when adjusting and checking the hitch and control linkage
when the engine is running and when linkage is under hydraulic or mechanical load. Study the linkage
and hitch travel, keep hands, arms, legs and feet out of the travel arc of the hitch and linkage. Make
5
sure that no persons are in the danger area.

NOTE: When using the three-point hitch, make sure there is sufficient clearance between the rear tyres and the lower links
by adjusting the stabilizers and/or tread positions, see relative pages in this manual for more information.

Important noted on use and adjustment of the

three-point linkage.

Warning: Always switch off the engine before

any adjustments to the three-point linkage
or implement.

Warning: Always use the lift in position con-

trol mode for transports with implements
mounted on three-point linkage.

Warning: Always use the lift in position con-

trol mode when hitching or unhitching an
implement to the three-point linkage.

Warning: After stopping the tractor, always

lower implements connected to the three-
point linkage.

Warning: Never work under an implement

that is kept raised only by the hydraulic hitch,
but always secure it with a suitable hydraulic
support and turn the engine off.

131
Operation
Top and Lower Links Adjustment
The top and lower links must be adjusted correctly so NOTE: Be sure to place the turnbuckle locks in their locked
that the implement can work at the required depth and position after adjusting the lower links.
that the lower links are free to move up and down with
the shape of the ground. Top Link Adjustments

NOTE: Make sure tyre pressures, wheel equipment and Make sure that the length of the top link is adjusted
ballasting are correct before making hitch adjustments. correctly. See the implement Operator's Manual for the
See TYRE PRESSURE AND LOAD CAPACITIES and TRAC- correct length.
TOR BALLASTING in this manual.
IMPORTANT: The top link sensor is not working when
IMPORTANT: After making any adjustments, carefully raise the top lint is connected to the grooved hole of an imple-
the implement to make sure there is clearance between ment.
the tractor and implement.

Lower Link Adjustments

OPERATION 1
Put the tractor on a hard level surface and lower the hitch
to the lowest position.

OPERATION 2

Adjust the length of the top link by means of the han-

dle.

Turn the handle counterclockwise to shorten the link or

clockwise to lengthen the link. Seen front the back of the
tractor looking forward.

NOTE: To obtain the maximum length and strength, the

length of the threading at the end of the turnbuckle should
be identical.
Raise (about 30mm) the turnbuckle lock (1) to release
it. IMPORTANT: After the final adjustments, slowly raise the
implement to guarantee the correct space between tractor
OPERATION 3 and implement.

Turn the turnbuckle lock clockwise to lower and counter-

clockwise to raise.
When the top link is not in use, it should be stored in the
fork (1).

132
 Operation

Top link installation Top mounting hole

Top mounting hole

The top mounting hole is provided for Cat. II top links,

with such implements as cutters and drills.

The bottom mounting hole (5) is for the special adjust-

able top links provided with the tractor. The top link
sensor is activated by the bottom hole.

IMPORTANT: The top link sensor is not working when

To remove the dedicated top link, remove the retainer “R” the top lint is connected to the grooved hole of an imple-
(1) from the top link pin (2). Remove from the tractor the ment.
top link pin (2) and the top link already present.

The fork (3) remains mounted in the bottom pin. Mount

the dedicated top link into the top mounting hole (4).

IMPORTANT: The top link sensor is not operating when

the top link is installed in the top hole.

133
Operation

Use of the stabilizers (if equipped) Sway Operation

The stabilizers are steel telescopic channels required to

prevent the lower links from touching the tyres. The sta-
bilizers are set at the factory on a rated length, that will
probably have to be adjusted according to certain types
of implement and track width.

Rigid Operation

Position the stabilizers in the bottom hole (B) of the

mounting bracket. In this way, when the hitch is down
there is a 127 mm sway, and when the hitch is up the
rigid mode is on.

After the adjustment, operate the three-point linkage

to check that the maximum lift is not hindered by the
retaining chains.

WARNING: When the stabilizers are adjusted

with a mounted implement, watch out for
OPERATION 1 body parts in the area between the rear tyres
and the three-point linkage. Failure to do
Position the stabilizers in the top hole (A) of the mounting this may result in serious injury.
bracket. Remove the sway limiting pin (1) and mount the
implement on the hitch.

OPERATION 2

Adjust the rod lock (2) so that the hole for the sway limit-
ing pin of the stabilizer (3) is aligned with its rear end in
the groove of the rod (2). This hole is vertical.

IMPORTANT: The stabilizer is mounted with a retainer pin

to avoid excessive tensioning of the rod. It the rod is too
tight to be adjusted and is forced past the retainer pin, the
threading will be damaged. Keep the threading clean and
check that the tube runs smoothly.

OPERATION 3

Mount the sway limiting pin (1) in the rod and in the
stabilizer.

IMPORTANT: NEVER operate the tractor if the sway limiting

pin has been removed. The tractor could be damaged.

After the adjustment, operate the three-point linkage

to check that the maximum lift is not hindered by the
retaining chains.

134
 Operation

Retaining Chains (if equipped) OPERATION 4

Operate the three-point linkage to check that the maxi-
The retaining chains prevent the lower links from touch- mum lift is not hindered by the retaining chains.
ing the tyres.
Sway and rigid operation
The chains are set at the factory on a rated length, that will
probably have to be adjusted according to certain types The front brackets for the chain are bolted onto the axis
of implement and track width. housing by 4 bolts.

If the chain length was momentarily changed, adjust as The front bracket of the retaining chain MUST be fixed
follows: ONLY in the two bottom holes.

The choice of the holes depends on the choice of a sway

or rigid operation. If the RIGID operation is required for
OPERATION 1 the whole lifting range, the front bracket of the the chain
must be connected to hole 1. If on the contrary the SWAY
operation with links lowered is required, the front bracket
of the the chain must be connected to hole 2.

After the adjustment, operate the three-point linkage

to check that the maximum lift is not hindered by the
retaining chains.

Mount the drilled horizontal rod or a drawbar with three-

point linkage between the lower links.

OPERATION 2
1. LOWER HITCHING POINT - RIGID
2. LOWER HITCHING POINT - SWAY

IMPORTANT: In the position 2, the retaining chains should

be adjusted to avoid all sway when the implement is fully
raised. A wrong adjustment can result in the chains or
brackets breaking when the links are lifted.

Looking forward from the rear of the tractor, turn the ad-
justment handle (1) to the left to slacken the chain. Turn
the handle to the right to tighten the chain.

OPERATION 3
After the adjustment, tighten the nut (2) to prevent any
changes to the setting.

135
Operation

Claw End Lower Links Telescoping Lower Links

(if equipped). (if equipped).

Connecting an Implement
Pull the latch handle up and pull the end of the lower
Reverse the tractor until the claw ends of the lower links link out.
are aligned under the connecting points of the imple-
ment. Connect the extended lower links to the implement.

Raise the lower links until the claws engage and the The lower links will retract and lock in place when the
latches (1) lock. tractor is moved rearward.

The spring spacer between the lower links will give the IMPORTANT: Make sure that the lower links are fully re-
Cat III width setting. tracted and locked in place before operating the tractor.

Disconnecting an Implement
Lower the implement to the ground. Pull the remote
release rope (if equipped) to release the claw end latches
and lower the lower links until clear of the implement.

Lift the top link off the implement upper connecting point
and store in the bracket provided.

Move the tractor forward away from the implement.

136
 Operation

Lower Link Flotation

IMPORTANT: Check the implement Operator’s Manual to
see if mechanical flotation can be used.

One or both lower links can be set to move up or down

approximately 38 mm. This position is used when working
on soils of variable conditions, to allow adaptation of the
implement to such conditions.

Mechanical flotation is also used when the mounted

implement width is greater than the wheel base of the
tractor.

For the WORK position, the heads of the pins and the
washers must be aligned with the lift rods as shown.

For RIGID operation with no up or down movement, the

heads of the pins and the washers must be across the
lift rods as shown.

137
Operation

REAR THREE-POINT HITCH OPERATION

Electronic Power Lift System

The electronic power lift system consists of the operator's control panel, two load pin sensors, a control lever, the hitch
position feedback sensor and their wiring harnesses.

The electronic power lift has two operation modes: 1) POSITION CONTROL and 2) DRAFT CONTROL In the position
control mode, the lift moves when the control knob is turned. In the draft control mode, the Electronic Power Lift System
moves the hitch to maintain a constant implement load on the tractor in changing soil conditions and terrain.

The controls of the electronic power lift are: an orange indicator lamp, a rocker switch, a diagnostic display and 6 control
knobs.

1. INDICATOR LAMP 2. UP/DOWN SWITCH

This lamp is used to indicate the condition of the ELEC- This switch is used to fully raise or lower the hitch. It has
TRONIC POWER LIFT SYSTEM. It will stay ON for 2 sec- 3 positions: UP/DOWN and QUICK LOWER.
onds after the engine has started for a bulb check. The
indicator has two functions: UP - The back or left of the switch pushed down. This
fully raises the hitch from the working position to the
A. FLASHING - The power lift can be operated. The real transport position (controlled by the UPPER LIMIT STOP).
position of the lift is not the same as the UP/DOWN but- The speed is not adjustable.
ton or as the DRAFT CONTROL knob.
DOWN - The switch is in the centre position. It lowers the
Lift operation: Push the UP/DOWN button to the DOWN lift from the transport to the work position or to the posi-
position. Turn the DRAFT CONTROL knob until the lever tion preset with the position control knob. Speed is con-
position and the lift real position are identical. When the trolled by the DROP SPEED REDUCTION CONTROL.
indicator lamp stops flashing the power lift system is
enabled. The lift will follow the movement of the POSI- QUICK LOWER - Press twice and keep down the
TION CONTROL knob when the UP/DOWN button is on front or right-hand part of the switch in the position
the DOWN position. QUICK LOWER. This will by-pass the DROP SPEED CON-
TROL setting, allowing the power lift to drop at maximum
B. INDICATOR NOT FLASHING - A problem was detected speed. As long as the momentary switch is held in this
in the electronic power lift operation. Seek advice from position, the power lift will continue to drop and will by-
your Dealer's specialized workshop. pass the "Bottom" setting. When the switch is released,
the hitch will automatically return to the “Bottom” setting.
This function is only active when the position control is
set in the bottom half of its range.

138
 Operation

3. POSITION CONTROL 4. DRAFT CONTROL

The control consists of an inner knob and an outer ring. This knob is used to set the draft on the tractor or the
This control is used to: implement depth. Turning the knob clockwise will increase
the draft and implement depth. Turning the knob anti-
A. Enable the Hitch System. clockwise will reduce the draft and implement depth.

B. Set a "Bottom" limit. IMPORTANT: The knob MUST be turned to the off position
(O) to set the Electronic Hitch System in the POSITION
C. Give precise control of the position of the hitch. CONTROL MODE.
The (O) position is used to prevent unwanted hitch move-
D. Provide hitch transport lock ment at light load or no hitch load, when the tractor is

OUTER RING - It is an adjustable mechanical stop for the

moving at more than 0.8 kph (0.5 mph). 5
inner knob. Its setting can be by-passed by means of the IMPORTANT: The tractor must be moving for the DRAFT
button on the inner knob. CONTROL to be functional. Adjusting the DRAFT CONTROL
knob to the lighter load settings of 1 to 5 while the tractor is
INNER KNOB - It controls the position of the hitch with stationary, may result in significant hitch movement when
precision. Turning the knob clockwise will raise the hitch the tractor moves again.
or counterclockwise will lower the hitch.
Press the PUSH-BUTTON in on the side of the knob, to
bypass the bottom limit without changing the setting on
the outer ring. The BUTTON is also used to lock the knob
in the TRANSPORT position when the knob is turned fully
clockwise.

139
Operation

5. DROP SPEED CONTROL 7. UPPER LIMIT CONTROL

This knob is used to adjust the drop speed of the hitch This knob is used to adjust the maximum transport
when using either the UP/DOWN SWITCH or the PO- height of the hitch. Therefore it limits the height when
SITION CONTROL knob. Set the DROP SPEED to fast the UP/DOWN button or the POSITION CONTROL
(fully clockwise) for light weight implements, and slow knob are used. A setting of “1” allows the hitch to be
(fully counterclockwise) for heavy implements such as raised only half the way, while a setting of “11” allows
ploughs. This control can be over-ridden by double click- full transport height to be reached. This control can
ing and holding the UP/DOWN SWITCH in the QUICK be used to limit hitch height with fully mounted PTO
LOWER position. driven implements where the angle of the Implement
Input Driveline joints need to be limited to prevent
6. TRAVEL CONTROL noise, chatter and damage due to excessive angles.
This knob is used to adjust the amount of hitch move- Turning the knob clockwise increases the transport
ment (depth variation) allowed in the DRAFT CONTROL height. Turning the knob counter-clockwise decreases
MODE. Turning the knob clockwise will increase the the transport height.
hitch movement. This allows closer control of the draft
load on the tractor and enables the hitch to follow soil IMPORTANT: When using the Automatic Hitch the upper
contours better. Turning the knob counter-clockwise limit stop MUST ALWAYS be rotated fully clockwise to the
will decrease the amount of hitch movement. Set the stop position (position "11").
control in the lower range when using semi-mounted
implements or on flat terrain where the amount of hitch
movement can be restricted without affecting perform-
ance.

140
 Operation

8. Slip Limit Control (if equipped) True Ground Speed Sensor (if
equipped)

Wheel slip can be viewed on the digital instrument cluster

only if the tractor is provided with a true ground speed
sensor.

The slip limit control switch (8) (if equipped) is used to

prevent the tractor wheel slip from exceeding a set slip
limit. When true slip is greater than the preset limit, the
hitch is brought back by the control unit in order to bring
the slip value back to the preset limit.

The slip limit control switch has two positions: NOTE: Type of sensor and mounting position can be dif-
ferent from what shown.
1. ON Symbol (I) where the slip function is selected.
See Wheel Slip Menu of the instrument cluster. The sensor (1) will accurately determine the true ground

2. OFF Symbol (O) where the slip limit is deactivated.

speed of the tractor.
5
Precise application of chemicals and planting inputs can be
USING THE SLIP LIMIT CONTROL SYSTEM: achieved with the Ground Speed Sensor. This will reduce
your input costs for planting, fertilizing and chemical ap-
- The tractor must be provided with the right ballast for plication for weed and pest control.
the work and the draft load.
You can also use the Ground Speed Sensor to determine
- Tractor must be moving at more than 3.2 kph (2 mph) the actual percentage of rear wheel slip under all operat-
and the three point hitch must be lowered with the ing conditions. This will allow you to maintain the recom-
implement in the ground for all setting adjustments. mended amount of wheel slip for maximum productivity
and operating efficiency.
- Position the hitch for the draft load and work depth
required for the implement. WARNING: Do not look directly into the face
of the sensor. Micro-wave signals emitted by
- Press to the ON position the slip control button (8). The the sensor can cause eye damage.
hitch will begin to raise if the wheel slip exceeds the
slip limit value. NOTE: To provide accurate calculation of ground speed
and wheel slip, the correct tyre size radius must be pro-
The lamp in the slip switch will illuminate if the limit has grammed into the instrument cluster.
been exceeded and the hitch is raising.
IMPORTANT: Keep the face of the sensor clean. Scrape
mud off with a plastic scraper. DO NOT use a metal scraper.
Wash the face of the sensor with soap and water or steam
clean. DO NOT disconnect the harness while cleaning.

141
Operation

Operation of External Hitch Switch-

es (if equipped) When the switches are released, the hitch stops in the
selected position until the hitch controls are activated on
The external hitch switches per the 3-point hitch can the right-hand console. After using the remote switches,
be used to raise and lower the hitch from outside the the hitch is to be enabled by means of the position con-
tractor. trol knob. To enable the hitch, see the description of the
hitch controls.
This can be useful for making small adjustments when
connecting implements to the three-point hitch. If both switches are pressed together the power lift will
stop. When the switches are released, the system will
Always operate the remote switches according to the reset in approximately one (1) second. The power lift
following procedure: switches can be used in the normal manner.

WARNING: Watch for possible pinch points

OPERATION 1 between the implement and tractor when the
hitch is moved.

WARNING: Stand well clear of the linkage

or implement when operating the external
controls or injury can result from contact
with moving parts.

WARNING: External controls must be operated

at a safe distance, standing on one side out-
side the tractor and out of the overall width of
mudguards. It is expressly forbidden to oper-
ate the controls from the rear of the tractor
or standing on the inner side of wheels.

XTRASHIFT TRACTOR

With the engine on, move the REVERSE SHUTTLE lever

on NEUTRAL. Engage the park brake.

OPERATION 2

Press onto the top side of the switch (1) to raise the lift.
Press onto the bottom side of the switch (2) to lower
the lift.

142
 Operation

Operating In Position Control

OPERATION 3
The tractor and implement must be operated in the field
to select the correct position of the power lift. Proceed
in the following way:

OPERATION 1

Push the UP/DOWN (3) button to the DOWN position. If

the indicator lamp on the button is flashing, move the PO-
SITION CONTROL knob to the same position as the lift.

OPERATION 4
Before moving the tractor, turn the POSITION CONTROL
knob fully to the right on the transport lock position, then
turn the load control knob fully to the right on the OFF
position (O).

5
OPERATION 2

Adjust the UPPER LIMIT CONTROL (2) to set the desired

power lift raised position. A setting of “11” corresponds
to the power lift being fully up.

OPERATION 5

Set the DROP SPEED CONTROL (1) to setting 6.

Set the UPPER LIMIT CONTROL (2) to setting 1.

Adjust the DROP SPEED CONTROL (1) until the implement

lowers at the speed desired.

143
Operation
OPERATION 6 OPERATION 7

Operate the tractor and implement in the field. Set the With the UP position, the implement can be raised tempo-
implement depth with the POSITION CONTROL knob. The rarily without changing any setting for the hitch position.
drop speed of the hitch depends on the turning speed of Use the DOWN position to return the implement to its
the knob. By slowly turning the knob, you get a finer con- original position.
trol of the hitch movement that follows knob rotation.
IMPORTANT: Always use the position control knob to raise
IMPORTANT: Turn the DRAFT CONTROL knob completely the hitch for transport on road when the three-point link-
clockwise to the OFF position (O) to avoid any accidental age is mounted. Set the position control knob on the lock
lifting when the tractor moves at a speed greater than position for transport and the Up/Down switch on Up.
0.8 kph.

By quickly turning the position control knob, the hitch is

lowered to the set drop speed. Move the outer ring to
set “Bottom“ or lowest hitch position desired. This will
provide a reference point for returning the knob to the
original implement height position each time the knob is
moved and also to maintain the same height.

144
 Operation

Operating In Draft Control OPERATION 2

The electronic hitch system will automatically adjust the

hitch position to maintain a constant implement load on
the tractor as the implement travels through varying soil
conditions and terrain. If an implement travels through
heavy soil, the increased load is sensed at the lower
links and the power lift will raise the implement in small
increments to maintain a constant load on the tractor.
As the implement travels through lighter soil conditions,
the lower links will sense the load decrease and lower
the implement in small increments while maintaining a
constant load on the tractor.

IMPORTANT: The tractor must be moving at a speed of

more than 0.8 kph (0.5 mph) for the load controls to func-
tion. If the DRAFT CONTROL knob is adjusted at the mini- Turn the TRAVEL ADJUSTMENT knob (3) in an anti-
mum level (1 to 5), with the tractor stationary, the hitch can clockwise direction to reduce work depth changes when
move significantly when the tractor starts moving again. different draft loads are present, in a clockwise direction,
on the contrary, to increase such changes.
NOTE: If the implement has a gauge wheel, move the
hitch position control knob fully counterclockwise before NOTE: A typical operation setting for a fully mounted im-
carrying out the following procedure. plement is “7” to “10”, and “3” to “5” for a semi-mounted
implement.

OPERATION 1 5

Turn the DRAFT CONTROL knob (1) counterclockwise

to decrease the draft load setting until the hitch begins
to raise.

NOTE: The load control is OFF at the (O) position and the
hitch will operate in the position control mode.

Move the hitch POSITION CONTROL knob (2) fully

counter-clockwise.

NOTE: In fields with varying soil conditions, the minimum

depth can be set turning the hitch position control knob to
the maximum work depth of the implement.

145
Operation

Electronic hitch error codes Power Lift Control Bypass

In case of electronic hitch malfunction, the instrument If the hitch should fail to operate properly and there is a
cluster will display an exclamation mark. To check the need to raise or lower the hitch in order to travel home,
electronic hitch error code, refer to the Error menu on the the hitch controls can be overridden by the UP/DOWN
digital instrument cluster. switch.

To raise the hitch, put the UP/DOWN button on QUICK

LOWER position and keep pressing it. The hitch will drop
after 1.5 seconds. Repeat the sequence until the hitch is
in the required position.

To raise the hitch, start with the UP/DOWN switch in the

DOWN position, then move the switch to the UP position
and then to the DOWN position. The hitch will move up
for 1.5 seconds. Repeat the sequence until the hitch is
in the required position.

NOTE: If your tractor is equipped with remote hitch

switches on rear fenders, they can also be used to raise
and lower the hitch.

WARNING: When an operation ERROR is displayed,

ask the Dealer's specialized personnel for help in-
dicating the error code. The Dealer's personnel has
specific competence to locate the error and the type
of operation to be performed.

146
 Operation
RIDE CONTROL (if equipped)

Ride control improves the tractor ride quality when carry-

Ride Control ON
ing fully mounted hitch implements. It reduces the fore/aft
pitch motion introduced to the tractor by the free hanging
OPERATION 1
mounted implement at high travel speeds, and reduces
front tyre bounce introduced to the tractor by bumps or
pot holes in the field as well as on the road.

Push the Ride Control switch to the ON position.

OPERATION 2

Push the hitch UP/DOWN switch into the UP position. As

soon as the tractor travel speed exceeds 0.8 kph (0.5 mph)
the implement automatically will be lowered slightly (to a
'neutral' position) and Ride Control is enabled.
IMPORTANT: After attaching an implement to the three
point hitch and before using the Ride Control feature
The hitch will automatically raise or lower in response to a
there MUST be a minimum clearance of 380 mm between
the lowest point of the implement and the ground. The
bump and then return to its 'neutral' position, to maintain
optimum ride control performance at all times.
5
measurement has to be taken with the tractor stationary
and the implement at the maximum height. If the ground
clearance is less than 380 mm, Ride Control MUST be
DISABLED by pushing the Ride Control Switch into the
OFF position.
Upper Limit Setting Override
NOTE: If the Ride Control feature is not wanted, it can be
disabled by your dealer. This position can be used to raise the hitch above the
upper limit setting until the hitch stops upward move-
ment.
Ride Control OFF
Tractors equipped with Auto Hitch:
Ride Control will be disabled if:
The Ride Control switch in this position will take the load
off the hitch locking latches thus improving the latching/
A. The switch is in the OFF position.
unlatching of the auto hitch.
B. The hitch UP/DOWN switch is in the DOWN position.

C. The travel speed is below 0.8 kph (0.5 mph).

Press and hold the Ride Control Switch in the fully forward
position until the hitch stops upward movement.
See page 88 for full Auto Hitch operating instructions.

147
Operation
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK
The tractor is equipped with a differential lock that latches WARNING: Do not drive on roads, or at high
both rear wheels together. speed anywhere, with the differential lock
engaged. Difficult steering will occur, and
The differential lock prevents wheels from slipping when can result in an accident. In field operation,
they are spinning at different speeds. It also helps keeping use the differential lock for traction improve-
the tractor horizontal position during the first field run, and ment, but release for turning at row ends.
also controlling implement position. Engagement of the
differential lock is EXCLUSIVELY manual. WARNING: Disengage the diff lock when you
need to turn the tractor. Disengage the lock
It also helps keeping the tractor horizontal position dur- when driving on a road.
ing the first field run, and also controlling implement
position.
To disengage the differential lock:
When the traction of one rear wheel decreases, or any
Fully depress the bottom of the switch (1).
time more traction is needed, the differential lock should
be engaged. Always make sure the tractor is stationary
The differential lock will disengage if one brake pedal or
before engaging the differential lock.
both is operated.

IMPORTANT: When the differential lock is engaged or

disengaged, the front wheels must be in the STRAIGHT
To engage the differential lock: FORWARD position. Disengage the differential lock before
turning the tractor.

Fully depress the top of the switch (1).

The differential lock indicator light (2) on the instrument

cluster will illuminate any time the differential lock is
engaged.

148
 Operation
MFD DRIVE CONTROL
The MFD can be engaged while the tractor is moving or Manual mode
stationary. The MFD provides additional traction and pull-
ing power when engaged.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT leave the MFD engaged when

travelling faster than 16 kph (10 mph) (except when in
the field), as this can cause damage to the MFD and
other transmission components as well as premature
tyre wear.

NOTE: Only use four-wheel drive when strictly necessary.

Avoid use of 4WD when maximum traction is not required, To engage MFD, press the top of the switch fully down
e.g. on hard ground, roads, etc., since this would only to the ON (I) position.
increase tyre wear unnecessarily.

WARNING: On electrically operated MFD trac-

tors, the MFD clutch is spring loaded into
engagement and relies on hydraulic pressure
for disengagement. A failure in the MFD hy-
draulic system will therefore automatically
engage the MFD even though the MFD switch
is in the disengaged position. This is a built
in safety feature. DO NOT operate MFD trac-
tor transmissions with the rear wheels off
the ground or removed, UNLESS THE FRONT
WHEELS ARE ALSO JACKED UP CLEAR OF THE The MFD indicator light on the instrument cluster will
GROUND OR THE FRONT AXLE DRIVE SHAFT
IS DISCONNECTED. Failure to do this can
illuminate. 5
result in the tractor being pulled off the rear
supports by the front axle.

The MFD switch has three positions:

I = ON, MANUAL

O = OFF

AUTO = AUTOMATIC MODE To disengage MFD push the switch to the center position
OFF (O), as shown.

The indicator light on the instrument cluster will go off.

149
Operation

Automatic Mode MFD engagement when braking

Automatic engagement or disengagement of MFD de- MFD will engage whenever both brake pedals are applied
pends on brakes being operated or not. together, no matter what position the MFD switch is in
giving 4 wheel braking. This feature allows a safer and
controlled stop.

When both brake pedals are applied together, the MFD

indicator lamp on the instrument cluster will illuminate.

WARNING: Brake pedals must be always cou-

pled by means of the latch when driving the
tractor on roads.

When the MFD switch is on the Automatic (AUTO) position

(depress the bottom of the MFD button) and the automatic
function is on, the indicator light on the instrument cluster
will illuminate.

Use of the automatic mode

MFD disengages when brake pedals are released and one

of the brake pedals is operated and kept depressed. MFD
engages again as soon as the brake pedal is released.

150
 Operation

ZUIDBERG FRONT HITCH (if equipped)

Multi Valve

The Multi Valve provides the user with the possibility to

adjust the hitch from double to single acting or to disen-
gage the hitch hydraulically (e.g. for transport).
The front hitch is operated via the tractors remote hydrau-
lic valve circuit and is double acting (the linkage is power The valve is mounted at the rear of the tractor.
lifted and power lowered).
Valve Positions:
The hitch is designed for Category IIIN implements. The
lower links have claw ends and the top link a ball end.
Double Acting (Power Lift/Power Lowered)
Maximum Lift Capacity....................................... 3,075 kg 5
IMPORTANT: Do not exceed the maximum permitted
front axle operating weight when using the front hitch.
See Maximum Permitted Operating Weights 255 for more
information. Comply with tyre load capacities and any
possible legal limitations.

Single Acting (Power Lift/Weight Lowered)

Disengaged (Transport)

IMPORTANT: The front hitch is operated using one of the

tractors remote valves. In order to use the rear couplers
of this valve the front hitch MUST be disengaged as
shown.

151
Operation

Lower Links Top link

The lower links have three positions. When changing
the position of the lower links, support the links when
removing the retaining pins. Both lift links must be set in
the same position.

Raise the hitch to maximum height before adjusting the

lower links.

1. Rigid application

1 When not being used, store the Top Link as shown

above.

When operating on the public highway without equipment

attached, always store the top link correctly.

For operation with no vertical movement, install the retain-

ing pins in the rear hole (1).
Remote Hydraulic Couplers
(if equipped).
2. Float application

For operation with vertical float, independently of each

other, install the retaining pins in the front hole (2).

Stored Position
IMPORTANT: The front remote couplers are supplied
from one of the rear remote valves. DO NOT use both the
front and the corresponding rear remote couplers at the
same time.

152
 Operation

Hitch Operation
OPERATION 1

Lower the lower links and set for Rigid or Float applica-
tion, as required.

OPERATION 2

Attach the implement to the hitch. Make sure the correct

category implement is attached. A category indication is
stamped on each lower link.

Make sure the claws on the front hitch engage with the
implement and the latches lock.

OPERATION 3 5

Move the number 1 remote lever rearward to raise the

linkage or forward to lower.

153
Operation
CONTROL VALVES
Control valve levers operate the corresponding valve: Connecting Remote Hoses
lever 1 operates valve number 1, lever 2 operates valve
number 2 and so on.

The hydraulic quick couplers for remote valves are num-

IMPORTANT: If the tractor is provided with a loader, a bered 1, 2 & 3 (as equipped), bottom to top, and are oper-
dumper trailer or other implements relying on the tractor's ated by the levers of the corresponding remote valves on
hydraulic system, it COULD be necessary to add further 20 the right-hand console.
litres of oil of the prescribed type into the transmission so
that the hydraulic flow remains efficient. Always check the To connect, proceed as follows:
transmission fluid level after charging cylinders of imple-
ments and attachments. Top up as required to guarantee OPERATION 1
a correct oil level in the transmission. Never operate the
tractor under load if the fluid level is low.
The added oil could cause the transmission to operate at
a higher temperature, above all if the tractor is working
on road ad top speed.

WARNING: The tractor must only be started

with the auxiliary valve levers are in neu-
tral.

IMPORTANT: As the front and rear control valves have Remove the dust cap. Clean the implement male coupler
different configurations according to specific require- before connecting. Connect the implement to the quick
ments of the user, please ask your Dealer for details couplers to allow lowering when the control lever is moved
about the proper and safe use of hydraulic equipment. forward, and lifting when the lever is moved rearward.

The couplers on the left are used to raise the implement,

the quick couplers on the right to lower the implement, as
viewed from the rear of the tractor. Just invert the hoses
if the implement operates in the opposite way.

The implement couplers can be connected or discon-

nected with the tractor or implement hydraulic system
under pressure.

154
 Operation
OPERATION 2
Insert the male coupler into the female one to connect
the hose to the auxiliary coupler.

IMPORTANT: All implements must be fitted with shrouded

couplers, which are available from your dealer. If an im-
plement is not fitted with shrouded couplers, there will
be restricted oil flow through the couplers resulting in
inefficient machine operation, especially where high flow
rates are required.

OPERATION 3
Move forward and rearward the control lever on the side
console for an even distribution of the pressure in the
hydraulic system. Drain the reservoir (2) at regular intervals.

IMPORTANT: When connecting the implement hose to IMPORTANT: DO NOT pour the reservoir contents back
the tractor, make sure the hose is long enough to permit into the hydraulic system. Dispose of contents in accord-
the tractor to turn in both directions. ance with local regulations. DO NOT drain the contents
on the ground or into a drain. Be responsible for the
Disconnecting Hoses and Imple- environment.
ments Hose Couplers
The tractor is equipped with ISO 5675 Standard Female
Start the engine and move the lever fully forward to limit couplings. These couplings will fit standard male hose
oil leaks when disconnecting the hoses. Leave the lever couplers made to ASAE S366, SAE J1036 or ISO Standard
in the float position, stop the engine and disconnect the 5675. Your dealer can also supply hose fittings or adapters
hoses from the couplers. to connect different combinations of implements to the

To disconnect the coupler, just pull. Clean the coupler

standard male coupler.
5
dust cap and install.

Remote Couplers Spillage Collector

(if equipped)

1. ASAE male coupler

2. N. 1272399C2 (7/8-14 inch UNF threads)
or:
N. 1272770C2 (1/2-14 inch threads)
or:
N. 1285718C2 (3/4-16 inch threads)

WARNING: Hydraulic fluid escaping under

pressure can have enough force to penetrate
the skin. Hydraulic fluid may also infect a
minor cut or opening in the skin. If injured by
escaping fluid, see a doctor at once. Serious
infection or reaction can result if medical
treatment is not given immediately.
Make sure all connections are tight and that
Oil spillage collectors (1) are designed to collect oil leaks hoses and lines are in good condition before
or deposits in a reservoir (2) when couplers are connected applying pressure to the system.
or disconnected. Release all pressure before disconnecting
the lines or performing other work on the
WARNING: When auxiliary control valves are hydraulic system. To find a leak under pres-
used, their quick couplings can reach high sure use a small piece of cardboard or wood.
temperatures. Therefore, safety gloves suita- Never use hands.
ble for such temperatures must be worn every
time the connected implements are connected
to or disconnected from the couplings.

155
Operation
REMOTE HYDRAULICS OPERATION
There can be up to three remote control levers, each hav- NOTE: If there is too much restriction in the implement
ing four positions: cylinders or other attachments, the restriction can cause
a back pressure in the remote valve which will cause the
remote lever on the console to return to neutral before the
cylinder has reached full stroke. If the condition occurs,
it will be necessary to manually hold the lever in position
until the cylinder has reached full stroke. Continual use of
the remote valve in this condition will cause the hydrau-
lic oil to over heat and possible damage to the hydraulic
POSITION RETRACT NEUTRAL
EXTEND system. If the condition occurs at regular intervals the
FLOATING implement restriction should be corrected. It is normal for
the control lever to return to neutral when the cylinders
The speed of movement of auxiliary equipment is deter- reach full stroke.
mined by the distance the lever is moved from neutral to
the control position.

Neutral Lock

If the lever is moved fully rearward from neutral, the

equipment hydraulic cylinder(s) will extend quickly. If the The remote hydraulic control levers can be locked in the
lever is moved rearward a short distance from neutral, the neutral position (1) to prevent moving the remote valves.
equipment hydraulic cylinder(s) will extend slowly. This can be done by moving the valve control levers to
the neutral position and turning the lock control fully
If the lever is moved fully forward from neutral (when clockwise.
float is locked out) the equipment hydraulic cylinder(s)
will retract quickly. If the lever is moved a short distance
forward from neutral the equipment hydraulic cylinder(s)
will retract slowly.

When used with equipment in the raised position, the

neutral lock provides a positive means of preventing the
accidental movement of the valve control levers.

156
 Operation
Float Position
Operation Using Single Acting Re-
mote Hydraulic Cylinders
When single acting remote hydraulic cylinders are used,
move the control lever to the float position to retract the
cylinder.

IMPORTANT: Single acting remote circuits cannot be used

for continuous oil supply applications.

WARNING: When remote cylinders are con-

nected to the hydraulic system, cycle the
control lever about three times to remove
air from the cylinder and hoses. With air
in the system raised equipment can drop
accidentally and cause personal injury or
machine damage.

To operate the remote hydraulics in a float condition, turn NOTE: If the implements is equipped with single acting
the lock control (2) fully counterclockwise. cylinders, always use float position during lowering. A
continuous use of the "Retract" position causes overheating
and may damage the hydraulic system.

5
This will allow the control lever to go completely forward
into the float position.

The remote hydraulic control levers can be locked out of

the float position. When using equipment for work where
the float position is not wanted, turn the lock control one
position clockwise so that the control lever cannot be
moved into the float position.

NOTE: Single action cylinders can be operated in a float

or no float position at the same time that the hitch is oper-
ated.

157
Operation

Operating Hydraulic Motors Hydraulic Motor Return Circuit (if

equipped)
Connect hydraulic motors to the 1st remote circuit to make
sure of a constant flow of oil to the motor.

The hydraulic motor return circuit can be used to reduce

restriction in the remote hydraulic motor return line. This
Stop the engine. Move remote control lever forward to will result in more efficient hydraulic motor operation.
the float position.
To use the hydraulic motor return circuit, connect the
Turn the locking control (1) fully anti-clockwise (three posi- return line from the hydraulic motor or implement to the
tions from neutral), so that the movement of the control connector (1).
lever is limited to two positions: retract and float.

In this way the lever has only available the two positions
to be used with hydraulic motors.

To engage the hydraulic motor, start the engine and

move the control lever forward from the float position
until against the lever lock. The hydraulic motor will now
operate.

To disengage the hydraulic motor, move the remote

control lever forward to the float position. Wait for the
hydraulic motor to slowly stop.

DO NOT DISENGAGE THE LEVER LOCK. Allowing the

control to return to the neutral position during motor ap-
plication will cause the motor to stop immediately. This
may cause damage to the hydraulic motor, hoses and
equipment.

To change the direction of rotation of the hydraulic motor,

change the hoses over on number 1 remote coupler.

IMPORTANT: To avoid damages to hydraulic pumps in

tractors, all hydraulic fluid flowing back from all imple-
ments must be returned through the return circuit of the
hydraulic motor.

158
Tyres, Wheels, Ballasting

Section 6
Tyres, Wheels, Ballasting 6

159
Tyres, Wheels, Ballasting

TYRE INFLATION SPECIFICATIONS

For maximum tractor performance, always adjust the tyre Tyre pressure can also be adjusted as required to satisfy
pressure within the minimum/maximum range, to conform the following requirements.
with the actual load on the tyres. Under normal conditions
use the minimum pressure rating for general drawbar A. Severe Service.
work. Use the higher pressure rating, up to the maximum, Tyre pressure can be increased 28 kPa (0.27 bar - 4 psi)
for heavy three-point hitch mounted equipment. more than the maximum pressure shown in the charts,
for tyres used in severe service. Severe service includes
the furrow tyre in regular ploughing operations, and in
hillside operations.

INFLATING B. Tyres With Liquid Ballast.

AT MAXIMUM Inflate the tyres 14 kPa (0.14 bar - 2 psi) more than the
PRESSURE WITH
MINIMUM LOAD normal operating pressure required for your operation.
This will compensate for aeration that occurs when the
EXAMPLE A
tyres are in motion.

WARNING: A tyre can explode during infla-

tion and cause serious injury or death. Never
increase air pressure beyond 241 kPa (2.4
bar) to seat the bead on the rim. Replace a
tyre if it has a defect. Replace a wheel rim
which has cracks, wear or severe rust. Make
sure that all the air is removed from a tyre
before removing the tyre from the rim. Never
Example ‘A’ shows the cross section of a tyre inflated use force on an inflated or partially inflated
for maximum load but with a minimum load on the tyre. tyre, make sure the tyre is correctly seated
The tyre tread is not making full contact with the ground, before inflating.
which will give poor performance.
See Tyre and Wheel Service on the following pages for
further instructions on safe tyre inflation procedure, rec-
ommended tyre maintenance and tyre/rim repair.

IMPORTANT: During transportation, by rail or road, tractor

tyres are inflated to higher than normal operating pres-
sures. Before using your tractor check the air pressure in
INFLATING the tyres to make sure that the air pressures are correct.
PRESSURE
ACCORDING TO
TRACTOR WEIGHT

EXAMPLE B

Example ‘B’ shows the cross section of a tyre with the

inflated pressure correctly adjusted to the load on the
tyre. The tyre tread is making full contact with the ground,
which will give maximum performance.

160
 Tyres, Wheels, Ballasting

Air Pressure Check Tyre Inflation Procedure

Check the tyre inflation pressure every 50 hours of opera- DO NOT inflate a tyre that has had a complete loss of air.
tion or once per week. If the tyre has lost all air pressure, have a qualified tyre
mechanic service the tyre.
NOTE: For best tyre life check tyre pressures as regular
intervals. Too low a pressure causes early tyre wall failure.
Too high a pressure causes higher tread wear or dam-
age.

Check the condition of the tyres and wheels for wear or

damage. Keep the tyres inflated to the recommended
pressures.

NOTE: Cross ply tyres can have the pressure reduced to

increase traction in field work. For speeds below 16 kph
(10 mph), loads can be increased by 20%.

NOTE: Never use radial ply tyres below 1.2 bar (17 psi). It
is not necessary to reduce the pressure in radial tyres to
get better traction in the field.
IMPORTANT: If the tyre wheel assembly has been removed
IMPORTANT: Before leaving the factory the tyre pressures from the tractor always use a restraining device (tyre infla-
are increased. Check and adjust the pressures before tion cage) when inflating a tyre.
operating the tractor.
To ADD air to a partly inflated tyre, use the following
For tyres equipped with liquid ballast, check the air pres- procedure:
sure as follows:
OPERATION 1
OPERATION 1
Use a SAFETY TYPE air hose with a remote shutoff valve
Use an air-water gauge. The valve must be at the bottom and a self-locking air chuck.
of the tyre to get an accurate reading.

6
OPERATION 2
OPERATION 2
Stand behind the tread of the tyre and make sure all
Use a standard air gauge as follows: persons are away from the side of the tyre before you
start to add air.
A. The valve must be at the top of the tyre.
OPERATION 3
B. Measure the wheel diameter.
Inflate the tyre to the recommended air pressure. DO NOT
C. Add 3.5 kPa (0.04 bar - 1/2 psi) for each 305 mm INFLATE THE TYRE MORE THAN THE RECOMMENDED
(12 inches) of rim diameter to the standard gauge PRESSURE.
reading.

161
Tyres, Wheels, Ballasting

TYRE PRESSURES, LOAD CAPACITIES AND SERVICE

Tyres can be marked in two ways, as shown in the examples below:

CROSSPLY STRUCTURE: Example

12.4-24 8PR
12.4 = Nominal tyre width in inches
-= Crossply structure
24 = Internal diameter
8PR = 8 ply rating

For correct tyre pressures/load capacities for CROSSPLY tyres see your dealer or tyre manufacturer.

RADIAL - Examples

18.4R38 710/75R34
18.4 = Nominal tyre width in inches 710 = Nominal tyre width in mm
R = Radial structure 75 = Nominal aspect ratio (ratio of sidewall
38 = Internal diameter height/section width)
142 = Load index number, 142 = 2650 kg (see chart 1) R = Radial structure
A8 = Speed code for 40 kph, (see chart 2) 34 = Rim diameter at the bead seat in inches
168 = Load index number, 168 = 5,600 kg (see chart 1)
A8 = Speed code for 40 kph, (see chart 2)
165 = Load index number, 165 = 5,150 kg (see chart 1)
B = Speed code for 50 kph, (see chart 2)

The performance of a Radial tyre is determined by the Load Index and Speed Code which have replaced the Ply rating
found on Crossply tyres.
The maximum load which can be carried by a tyre is dependant upon the Load Index quoted on the tyre wall. Charts 1
and 2, on the following page, give a guide to the maximum load a tyre can carry and a percentage (%) variation depend-
ing upon the speed code or travel speed.

162
 Tyres, Wheels, Ballasting

IMPORTANT: The charts below are only a guide. Loads may vary slightly with makes of tyre. For correct loads see your
dealer or tyre manufacturer.

Chart 1 - Load Index Codes and Loads per Tyre

INDEX kg INDEX kg INDEX kg INDEX kg INDEX kg INDEX kg

90 600 105 925 120 1400 135 2180 150 3350 165 5150
91 615 106 950 121 1450 136 2240 151 3450 166 5300
92 630 107 975 122 1500 137 2300 152 3550 167 5450
93 650 108 1000 123 1550 138 2360 153 3650 168 5600
94 670 109 1030 124 1600 139 2430 154 3750 169 5800
95 690 110 1060 125 1650 140 2500 155 3875 170 6000
96 710 111 1090 126 1700 141 2575 156 4000 171 6150
97 730 112 1120 127 1750 142 2650 157 4125 172 6300
98 750 113 1150 128 1800 143 2725 158 4250 173 6500
99 775 114 1180 129 1850 144 2800 159 4375 174 6700
100 800 115 1215 130 1900 145 2900 160 4500 175 6900
101 825 116 1250 131 1950 146 3000 161 4625 176 7100
102 850 117 1285 132 2000 147 3075 162 4750 177 7300
103 875 118 1320 133 2060 148 3150 163 4875 178 7500
104 900 119 1360 134 2120 149 3250 164 5000 179 7750

Chart 2 - Speed Codes

SPEED CODE kph mph % Variation factor (*)

for different speeds

A2
A3
10
15
6
9
+ 67%
+ 50%
6
A4 20 12 + 39%
A5 25 15 + 28%
A6 30 19 + 11%
A7 35 22 + 4%
A8 40 25 0
B 50 31 - 9%

(*) The % variation factors are based on recommendations by the

European Tyre And Rim Technical Organization (ETRTO).

163
Tyres, Wheels, Ballasting

Tyre And Wheel Service Tyre Installation

To get the correct traction and cleaning action of the lugs,
WARNING: Do not remove, install or make the tyres must be installed on the wheels so the tread
repairs to tyres or rims. Take the tyre and pattern is turning as shown. DO NOT try to remove, repair
rim to a tyre specialist where persons with or install a tractor tyre on a wheel.
special training and special safety tools are
available. If the tyre is not correctly posi-
tioned on the rim, or if over inflated, the tyre
bead can loosen on one side and cause air
to leak at high force and can thrust the tyre
in any direction. Explosive separation of the
tyre can cause serious injury.

WARNING: DO NOT weld to wheel or rim when

a tyre is installed. Welding will cause an ex-
plosive air/gas mixture that will be ignited
with high temperatures. This can happen
to tyres inflated or deflated. Removing air
or breaking bead is not adequate. The tyre
MUST be completely removed from the rim
prior to welding.

WARNING: Explosive separation of the tyre

and/or rim parts can cause injury or death.
When tyre service is necessary, have a quali-
fied tyre mechanic service the tyre.

Always have a qualified tyre mechanic service the tyres

and wheels on this machine. If the tyre has lost all air
pressure, take the tyre and wheel to a tyre specialist for
service. The use of correct equipment and correct service/
repair procedures will prevent accidents.

164
 Tyres, Wheels, Ballasting

Wheel removing procedure

WARNING: If a wheel has to be removed (e.g.

to remove a punched tyre), this operation
must be carried out by a suitably equipped
workshop. If the suitable equipment or such a
workshop are not available, take the tractor
to a specialised workshop, where the tractor
will be lifted with an equipment suited to its
weight and dimensions.

Procedure
- Turn off the engine, engage the parking brake and the
first gear. Engage the Park Lock (if equipped).
- To remove a front wheel apply a jack lift of suitable
capacity at the front axle next to the wheel to be remove
(Fig. a).
- To remove a rear wheel, use wooden wedges on the front
axle to block completely any tractor swing. Use a jack lift
of suitable capacity in the centre of the rear axle (Fig. b).
- Loosen the nuts (bolts) fastening the wheel of about one
turn by the provided wrench.
- Before lifting the tractor, check there are no persons next
to it and do not touch the tractor again until it is not again
lowered to the ground.
- Lift the tractor a few centimetres.
- Unscrew all nuts (bolts) that fasten the wheel and re-
move the wheel
- Inflate the tyre if required. See the inflating procedure
in this chapter.
- Mount the wheel taking to exactly match the locating
pins. Screw the nuts (bolts) down again.
- Lower the tractor to the ground. Remove the jack and
fully tighten the nuts (bolts) alternating a nut (bolt) with
the opposite one. 6
- As soon as possible, take your tractor to the service
workshop to tighten the wheel nuts (bolts) to the pre-
scribed torque.

Fig. a Fig. b

165
Tyres, Wheels, Ballasting

FRONT WHEELS TOE-IN

A: FRONT; B: REAR Adjustments

OPERATION 1 OPERATION 3

Park the machine on hard level ground, engage the park Measure the distance between the rim edges at the front
brake and stop the engine. (dimension A in the diagram).

OPERATION 2 Rotate each wheel 180 degrees so that the marks are at
the rear, at the same height as the centre of the hub.
Raise the front of the tractor so that both front wheels are
off the ground and the steering is free to turn through the Measure the distance between the marks at the rear
full range LEFT AND RIGHT. (dimension B in the diagram).

OPERATION 4
Subtract the front dimension (A) from the rear dimension
(B), this is the toe -in measurement.

MFD - The end play must be between 0 to 2 mm.

If the toe-in is less, increase the length of the tie rods. If

the toe-in is more, decrease the length of the tie rods.

166
 Tyres, Wheels, Ballasting

To change the length of the tie rods, proceed as described

below:

MFD

OPERATION 1
Loosen the clamp bolts (1), one each side to free the tie
rod tubes (2).

OPERATION 2
Turn the adjusting rods (3), at each side, an equal amount
to increase or decrease the length.

OPERATION 3
Tighten the clamp bolts and check the toe-in.

NOTE: Make sure the tie rod ball joints are central.

Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the correct toe-in has been

6
achieved.

IMPORTANT: Make sure the tyres do not contact the

steering cylinder when on full lock.

167
Tyres, Wheels, Ballasting

AXLE - STEERING AND OSCILLATION STOPS

Steering Stops Steering stops (if equipped)

The steering stops are used to give the required steering

clearance between the front tyres and tractor frame.

The stops are placed on the rear of each king pin hous-
ing.

Stop IN USE - 7° OSCILLATION

OPERATION 1

Loosen the lock nuts (1).

OPERATION 2

Adjust the end-of-travel bolts (2) until the right steering

angle is acquired. Tighten the lock nuts.

The steering angles are to be chosen according to the

following data: Stop AT REST - 12° OSCILLATION

1. The size of the front tyres installed. When the oscillation stops are at rest or not mounted, the axle
has a maximum slant of 12°. When stops are mounted, maximum
2. The wheel tread width setting.
slant is only 7°.
3. If front fenders are installed.
4. Installation of oscillation stops. IMPORTANT: Pay great attention during repositioning of
5. Installation of a downward facing exhaust muffler. the oscillation stops, as the steering stops also need to be
adjusted again.
IMPORTANT: After adjustment:
1. Raise the front of the tractor so the axle can be moved
into maximum oscillation.
2. Start the engine and turn the steering wheel to full lock
in both directions.
3. Check to make sure the tyres or fenders (if equipped)
DO NOT touch the tractor frame.

IMPORTANT: During the mounting of a front loader, pay

attention to the recommendations of the manufacturer
regarding steering stops.

168
 Tyres, Wheels, Ballasting
MFD FRONT WHEEL TREAD WIDTHS
The MFD front wheel tread widths (measured between CENTRE OF TRACTOR
tyre centres at ground level) can be adjusted to eight dif-
ferent positions as needed for your operation.

IMPORTANT: The steering stops on the axle must be in-

stalled in the correct position for the tread width and tyre
size being used.

- Use wooden wedges to block completely any axle

swing.
A
- Use a jack lift of suitable capacity at the centre of the
axle to lift the front axle.
The tread width can be adjusted by turning the wheel
discs and/or the wheel rims in or out. The wheel disc can
also be installed on either side of the mounting lugs on B
the rim. Install the wheel discs and rims in the positions
shown for the wheel tread needed.

Dual Wheels
WHEEL TREAD WIDTH W7 x 24
C
RIM IN RIM IN
DISC IN DISC OUT
A LUG IN E LUG IN

1,383 mm 1,683 mm

RIM IN RIM IN
DISC IN DISC OUT D
B F LUG OUT
LUG OUT

1,415 mm 1,715 mm
RIM OUT RIM OUT
DISC IN DISC OUT
C LUG G LUG E
6
IN IN

1,478 mm 1,778 mm
RIM OUT RIM OUT
DISC IN DISC OUT
D LUG H LUG
OUT OUT
F
1,510 mm 1,810 mm

WHEEL TREAD WIDTH W10/W12 x 24

RIM IN RIM IN
DISC IN DISC OUT G
A LUG IN E LUG IN

1,299mm 1,599 mm

RIM IN RIM IN
DISC IN DISC OUT
B F LUG OUT
LUG OUT

1,394 mm 1,694 mm H
RIM OUT RIM OUT
DISC IN DISC OUT
C LUG G LUG
IN IN WARNING: When you lift up the tractor to
1,499 mm 1,799 mm
adjust the wheel tracks, follow the directions
for lifting in the Safety Notes section.
RIM OUT RIM OUT
DISC IN DISC OUT
D LUG H LUG WARNING: Maximum attention must be used
OUT OUT when dismounting the front wheels: because
of their weight, a suitable hoist must be used
1,594 mm 1894 mm
to remove and handle the wheels.

169
Tyres, Wheels, Ballasting

Non-dual wheels FRONT WHEEL BOLT TORQUES

CENTRE OF TRACTOR MFD

OFFSET FOR RIM IN

W9.00 x 18 - 1,512 mm
W11 x 18 - 1,544 mm 1. Tighten the disc-rim bolts at 280-340 Nm following the
W9 x 20 - 1,512 mm above sequence.
W11 x 20 - 1,544 mm
2. Tighten the disc-hub bolts of the front axle at 300-350
Nm following the above sequence.

CENTRE OF TRACTOR The disc must fit flush against the rim lugs when as-
sembled.

IMPORTANT: After removing and fitting the wheels back

again, it is important to check the torques of all bolts by
means of a torque wrench at the following intervals:
- First check after 10 work hours.
- Second check after 50 work hours.
- Third check and further checks every 500 work hours.

OFFSET FOR RIM OUT

W9.00 x 18 - 1,716 mm
W11 x 18 - 1,684 mm
W9 x 20 - 1,716 mm
W11 x 20 - 1,684 mm

170
 Tyres, Wheels, Ballasting

FRONT TO REAR TYRE SIZE COMBINATIONS

Tractors equipped with Mechanical Front Drive and IMPORTANT: The tyre size combinations are specified to
Independent Front suspension must use front and rear provide matched ground speeds of the front and rear tyres.
tyre combinations that are correctly matched. The use Mixing worn and new tyres or tyres of different diameters,
of recommended tyre combinations will give maximum manufacturers, or loaded radii can give incorrect ground
tractor performance, extended tyre life and reduced wear speed match. When replacing tyres refer to the tables on
on drive train components. the following pages. If the tyres required are not listed or
you are in any doubt, consult your dealer.
The LEAD/LAG (how fast the front tyre rotates compared
to the rear tyre) should be between 0 and 5% lead, with IMPORTANT: If you change the tyre size combination,
+1 to +3% being ideal. To calculate the LEAD/LAG, use the rear hitch MUST be calibrated to suit the new tyre
the following formula: sizes. See your dealer.

RCFxIRR x 100 = lead

----------------
RCR

RCF = Rolling Circumference of Front tyre (Refer to the

tyre Manufacturer's Handbook).
RCR = Rolling Circumference of Rear tyre (Refer to the
tyre Manufacturer's Handbook). NOTE: For a correct setting of the instrument cluster to the
IR = Inter Axle Ratio (see Technical Specifications). correct size of the actually mounted rear tyres, see Tyre
size in the Instruments and Programming section.
IMPORTANT: To minimize tyre wear, MFD tractors must
have MFD disengaged if the tractor is going to be run at
high speeds and low loads (roading). This procedure will
also reduce power loss, increase fuel economy and ride
stability.

IMPORTANT: NEVER exceed the load capacity or the infla-

tion pressure for a particular tyre. Refer to the tyre LOAD
AND INFLATION CHART in this manual.

171
Tyres, Wheels, Ballasting

Front To Rear Tyre Size Combinations

Front wheels Rear wheels

Tyres Rims Tyres Rims

420/70R24 W12-24 460/85R34 DW15L-34

420/65R24 W12-24 540/65R34 DW15L-34

360/70R24* W10-24 420/85R34* DW15L-34

360/70R24 W10-24 480/70R34 DW15L-34

360/70R24 W10-24 340/85R38 DW12-38

360/70R24 W10-24 540/65R34 DW15L-34

380/70R24 W12-24 480/70R34 DW15L-34

380/70R24 W12-24 420/85R34 DW15L-34

380/70R24 W12-24 460/85R34 DW15L-34

380/70R24 W12-24 480/70R34 DW15L-34

380/70R24 W12-24 520/70R34 DW15L-34

380/70R24 W12-24 600/65R34 DW15L-34

320/85R24 W10-24 420/85R34 DW15L-34

320/85R24 W10-24 480/70R34 DW15L-34

320/85R24 W10-24 340/85R38 DW12-38

320/85R24 W10-24 540/65R34 DW15L-34

280/85R24 W10-24 420/85R30 DW15L-30

280/85R24 W10-24 480/70R30 DW15L-30

280/85R24 W10-24 380/85R38 DW12-38

340/85R24 W12-24 460/85R34 DW15L-34

340/85R24 W12-24 480/70R34 DW15L-34

340/85R24 W12-24 520/70R34 DW15L-34

340/85R24 W12-24 340/85R38 DW12-38

340/85R24 W12-24 600/65R34 DW15L-34

440/65R24 W12-24 460/85R34 DW15L-34

440/65R24 W12-24 520/70R34 DW15L-34

440/65R24 W12-24 600/86R34 DW15L-34

360/70R24 W10-24 420/85R34 DW15L-34

280/85R24 W10-24 460/85R30 DW15L-30

340/85R24 W12-24 420/85R38 (130A8) W15-38

420/70R24 W12-24 480/85R38 (145A8) W15/DWW15L-38

* This combination is only valid for CX with power reverse shuttle.

NOTE: Some of the tyre combinations considered here as acceptable MIGHT not be suited to all tractor models. To know
the tyre combinations not listed here or for further information, see your dealer.

172
 Tyres, Wheels, Ballasting

FRONT WHEEL FENDERS (if equipped)

Front wheel fenders are available for all tractor models. Vertical Adjustment
On MFD and Front Suspension models the fenders are
fully adjustable to ensure the tyre is covered at all tread Loosen the support brace mounting bolts (1) and slide
widths. the support brace (2) up or down to the correct position.
Tighten the mounting bolts to a torque of 50 Nm (37 Ib
NOTE: To provide the necessary clearance between the ft).
fender and other tractor components, the fender mount-
ing position must be adjusted for the tread width and tyre NOTE: The distance between tyre and support brace must
size being used. be 50-100 mm (2 to 4 in).

The front fenders provide greater safety and keep the trac-
tor cleaner, therefore improving operation and durability.

Horizontal Adjustment
Loosen the fender bracket mounting bolts (3) and slide
the fender bracket left or right until the fender is central
over the tyre. Tighten the mounting bolts. 6

173
Tyres, Wheels, Ballasting

REAR WHEEL TREAD ADJUSTMENT

Important information for EEC Flanged Type Axle Tread Widths
Member States:
The rear wheels are disc wheels with removable rims. The
illustrations on the following pages show the rim and disc
- Overall widths above 3000 mm (118 in) WILL require positions for the various tread widths. When the rims are
local authorization for use on the highway. An overall reversed to change the tread width, install the right hand
width of 2550 mm to 3000 mm (8 to 10 feet) MAY require tyre and rim on the left disc and the left tyre and rim on
local authorization for use on the highway, check before the right disc to make sure that the tread pattern is in the
operation. correct direction for maximum traction as shown by the
arrow on the tyre.
- The legal requirement states, when using public roads,
the distance from the extreme outer edge of the tractor When adjusting to the minimum tread position, make sure
and that of the rear stop lamp lens should not exceed that there is a clearance of at least 50 mm between the
400mm (16in) - Dimension A. tyres and components of the fenders.

Depending on soil conditions, the use of dual wheels

on your MFD tractor is generally not required or recom-
mended. For maximum fuel economy, the use of dual
wheels is only recommended where required to carry
heavy three-point hitch mounted equipment or for floata-
tion purposes for seed bed preparation.

IMPORTANT: Before making any adjustment make sure

that the tractor is correctly supported. Apply the park brake
and put blocks in front of and behind both front wheels
and the other rear wheel. Check torques after the first 30
minutes of operation and then every 10 hours of operation
until torques stabilize. This tightening and checking proce-
dure is necessary after any wheel repositioning operation,
see "REAR WHEEL BOLT TORQUES" on the next pages for
correct torques and tightening sequence.

WARNING: When you lift up the tractor to

adjust the wheel tracks, follow the directions
for lifting in the Safety Notes section.

WARNING: Maximum attention must be used

when dismounting the rear wheels: because
of their weight, a suitable hoist must be used
to remove and handle the wheels.

174
 Tyres, Wheels, Ballasting

CENTRE OF TRACTOR
WHEEL TREAD WIDTH
RIM RIM
OUT IN
DISC IN DISC OUT
A LUG IN D LUG IN

1,424 mm 1,725 mm

A
RIM RIM
OUT OUT
DISC IN DISC OUT
B LUG OUT E LUG IN
1,524 mm 1,824 mm

RIM RIM
IN OUT
F DISC OUT
C DISC OUT
LUG IN LUG IN B
1,625 mm 1,924 mm

D
6

175
Tyres, Wheels, Ballasting

REAR WHEEL BOLT TORQUES

IMPORTANT: After removing and fitting the wheels back
again, it is important to check the torques of all bolts by
means of a torque wrench at the following intervals:
- First check after 10 work hours.
- Second check after 50 work hours.
- Third check and further checks every 500 work hours.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT lubricate the threads.

Flanged Axle

TIGHTENING SEQUENCES

1. After the mounting, tighten the NUTS WHEEL DISC-
RIM to 280-340 Nm according to the above shown
sequence.

2. Mount the wheel onto the axle and tighten the NUTS
OF THE FLANGED AXLE ON THE WHEEL (2) to a
torque of 278-298 Nm, according to the above shown
sequence.

DO NOT LUBRICATE THE THREADS OF THE AXLE

STUDS.

176
 Tyres, Wheels, Ballasting

TRACTOR BALLAST
Loads Matched to Tractor Tractor Weight Distribution
The life of the tractor will be increased by operating in The optimum distribution of static weight for MFD tractors
the highest possible gear without labouring the engine. is shown below. The correct static weight distribution
Match the implement to the tractor to get the best for- and the correct amount of wheel slip will give maximum
ward speed. Operating at 8 kph (5 mph) or above is best tractive efficiency, maximum productivity and extended
for long life of main components. Too much ballast and service life for the tractor components.
excessive loads decrease tyre life, wastes fuel and often
reduces output. The amount and type of front and rear mounted equipment
being used will affect the weight distribution to the front
- The best traction occurs when wheel slip is between and rear tyres. Do not add more ballast than necessary
12 and 16%. to maintain a correct distribution of weights on the tractor
- Remove the ballast when not needed for lighter and comply with the correct wheel slip percentage. .
loads.
- Pull lighter loads at a little faster speed to do more work IMPORTANT: Whatever the state of loading of the tractor,
and increase efficiency. Do not overweight the tractor the weight transmitted to the road by the wheels of the
to pull very heavy loads. front axle must not be less than 20 percent of the unladen
weight of the tractor.
Operating a tractor with too much weight can cause:
IMPORTANT: The total tractor weight with all equipment
A. A decrease in horsepower available at the imple- and ballast weight must never be more than the maxi-
ment and then, a decrease in amount of field mum allowed operating weight (see Maximum Operating
worked. Weights). Comply with tyre capacities and any possible
legal limitations.
B. An increase in amount of fuel used.
See below a few examples concerning the recommended
C. A decrease in tyre life. distribution of weights in the tractor.

D. The soil to be compacted.

E. Too much force on the power train which will

decrease the life of the power train and cause
high operating cost.
Mechanical Front Drive (MFD) Tractors
6
The most important item in field operations is the amount
of horsepower available at the hitch or drawbar. Power
% FRONT % REAR
needed to move a tractor that has too much weight will
decrease the power that is available to pull the imple- 40% 60%
ment.

IMPORTANT: The total tractor weight with all equipment Weight distribution ratios are based on total weight of a
and ballast weight must never be more than the maxi- tractor with full equipment (ballast included).
mum allowed operating weight (see Maximum Operating
Weights). Comply with tyre capacities and any possible
legal limitations.

177
Tyres, Wheels, Ballasting

Front end weights, rear wheel weights and liquid ballast Tyre thread marks on soil
in the tyres can be used to ballast your tractor. Operating
and soil conditions dictate the amount of ballast required
for efficient operation and field performance. Inadequate NOTE: When you have too much ballast installed on the
traction and excessive wheel slip can waste up to thirty tractor, you will see the clear shape of the tyre tread in
percent of tractor horsepower. the ground which is an indication of no slippage. With too
little ballast, the tyre tread marks will not show because
of the tyre slippage.
IDEAL WHEEL SLIP 9 -16%

1 2 3

The proper ballast weight for the tractor should keep

wheel slipping within 9 and 16 percent.

1 2 3
NO RIGHT TOO MUCH
SLIPPING SLIPPING SLIPPING

TOO MUCH RIGHT NOT ENOUGH

BALLAST BALLAST BALLAST

If you add weight to the tractor to reduce wheel slip to

less than 9%, the added weight will consume more engine
power due to the increased rolling resistance caused by
the tyres sinking into the soil.

Add ballast weight only as necessary to maintain the

correct tractor weight distribution and the recommended
amount of wheel slip.

IMPORTANT: The total tractor weight with all equipment

and ballast weight must never be more than the maxi-
mum allowed operating weight (see Maximum Operating
Weights). Comply with tyre load capacities and any pos-
sible legal limitations.

178
 Tyres, Wheels, Ballasting

Front End Weights (if equipped)

Front end weights can be mounted on the front of the
tractor with a weight frame. The weights and weight
frame are available from your Dealer.

The weight frame can accomodate a max. of 7 or 9 ballast

weights. Each ballast weights 45 kg (100 Lbs) and the
frame weights about 100 kg.

Front end weights are needed to provide effective steering

control and front end stability and to achieve maximum
operating efficiency and tractor field performance. See
Tractor Weight Distribution in this manual for ballasting
procedure.

IMPORTANT: The total tractor weight with full equipment

and ballast weight must never be more than the maximum
allowed operating weight. See Maximum Allowed Operat-
ing Weights in this manual. Comply with tyre capacities
and any possible legal limitations.

The ballasts must be mounted on the weight frame one

at a time using suitable support aids.
Insert the threaded rod (19) into the hole in the weights.
Install the washer and the retainer nut (2).
Tighten the nut.

WARNING: Due to the great weight of each bal-

last, manual lifting of front and rear ballast
weights could be dangerous for your safety.

Use exclusively a hook or suitable equipment 6

to lift front and rear ballast weights.

Central ballast with front tow hook

(option)
Mount the central ballast first, then the three side ballasts
on both sides.
Insert the threaded rod into the hole in the weights.
Install the washer and the retainer nut (2).
Tighten the nut.

NOTE: Check the check screw in the tow hook pin for
correct mounting.

179
Tyres, Wheels, Ballasting

Ballasting the rear wheels

Two rings can be applied on each rear wheel (see figure).
The first one is directly fixed to the wheel, the second one
on the first ring.

The total weight that can be applied is therefore:

4 rings (2+2) each weighing 60 kg: total 240 kg.

WARNING: Due to the great weight of each bal-

last, manual lifting of front and rear ballast
weights could be dangerous for your safety.

Use exclusively a hook or suitable equipment

to lift front and rear ballast weights.

IMPORTANT: Ballasting the rear wheels. Max. 2 rings on each wheel.

- Do not ballast the tractor over its rated carrying

weight.
- When using the tractor for light work, transport and
on-road towing, remove the ballast weights to avoid
unnecessary strain on the mechanical components.
- With semi-mounted and fully mounted implements
(which inevitably increase the load on the rear axle
of the tractor), ballast must only be used when strictly
necessary. There is no point in increasing grip beyond
the level required for efficient work, as this will reduce
tyre life.
- Carefully check the tyre inflation pressure since this will
make the tyre last longer and ensure a more regular
wear.
- The softer the soil, the lower tyre inflation must be, while
the tyre should be inflated to a greater extent as the soil
becomes more compact.

IMPORTANT: The total tractor weight with full equipment

and ballast weight must never be more than the maximum
allowed operating weight. See Maximum Allowed Operat-
ing Weights in this manual. Comply with tyre capacities
and any possible legal limitations.

180
 Tyres, Wheels, Ballasting

Fluid Ballast
When liquid ballast is used, inflate the tyres 0.14 bar (2
Use tyre liquid ballast as needed to provide safe and ef- PSI) more than the recommended pressure. This will
ficient tractor operation. See Tractor Weight Distribution compensate for aeration that occurs when the tyre is in
of this manual for recommendations. The chart shows motion.
the liquid weight each tyre will hold when 75% filled (to
valve level), with water or calcium chloride and water When dual wheels are installed, use liquid ballast in the
solution. inside tyres only.

Calcium chloride (CaCl2) keeps the water from freezing. IMPORTANT: The total tractor weight with all equipment
Water will start to freeze at 0°C. and ballast weight must never be more than the maximum
recommend operating weight. See "Maximum allowed
operating weights" in this manual. Comply with tyre capaci-
ties and any possible legal limitations.

NOTE: This table contains only indicative data. The operator should ballast wheels with water on the base of the tables
issued by the tyre manufacturer and according to the use anticipated for the tractor.

LIQUID BALLAST FOR TYRES, IN LITRES AND KILOGRAMS

DIMENSIONS WATER ONLY 1 kg CaCl2 in 1.6 kg CaCl2 in 2.3 kg CaCl2 in
TYRE 4.5 litres water 4.5 litres water 4.5 litres water
LITRES WEIGHT LITRES WEIGHT LITRES WEIGHT LITRES WEIGHT
WATER TOTAL WATER TOTAL WATER TOTAL WATER TOTAL
IN kg IN kg IN kg IN kg

11.2-24 91 91 83 103 76 107 72 115

12.4-24 113 113 106 132 98 140 95 151

13.6-24 144 144 129 160 121 172 113 181

18.4-26 299 299 276 342 257 365 242 387 6

14.9R28/14.9-28 182 182 163 205 154 216 145 232

14.9R30/14.9-30 189 189 163 205 154 216 145 232

16.9R30/16.9-30 277 277 254 315 236 339 227 357

18.4R30/18.4-30 336 336 309 384 290 414 272 436

12.4R32/12.4-32 131 131 122 154 118 165 113 181

16.9R34/16.9-34 309 309 281 352 263 376 250 402

18.4R34/18.4-34 378 378 344 427 322 456 306 490

12.4-36 140 140 122 154 118 165 113 181

13.6R36/13.6-36 182 182 163 205 154 216 145 232

13.6R38/13.6-38 213 213 195 244 186 264 172 280

1. Water freezes at 0°C.

2. A solution of 0.91 kg of calcium chloride in 4.5 litres water gives protection up to -8°C and freezes at -31°C.
3. A solution of 1.59 kg of calcium chloride in 4.5 litres water gives protection up to -26°C and freezes at -47°C.
4. A solution of 2.27 kg of calcium chloride in 4.5 litres water gives protection up to -47°C and freezes at -54°C.
5. 4.5 litres water weight 4.5 kg.

NOTE: DO NOT use antifreeze fluid for radiators in tyres.

181
Tyres, Wheels, Ballasting

Filling Procedure
STEP 1 (Mixing The Solution)

Add the correct amount of calcium chloride (CaCl2) into

the correct amount of water, see previous charts for the
required degree of protection from freezing.

WARNING: SLOWLY add calcium chloride

to water, stirring continuously. NEVER ADD
WATER TO CALCIUM CHLORIDE. To do so
will cause a violent reaction. When correctly
mixed, the solution will increase in tempera-
ture. Allow the solution to cool before adding
to the tyre. See your authorized dealer for
details.

OPERATION 2

Raise one side of the tractor and turn the wheel so that
the valve is at the top, see illustration opposite.

OPERATION 3

Remove the valve core and connect the hand pump.

OPERATION 4
1. AIR
Measure the amount of solution to be added to the tyre 2. WATER ENTERING TYRE
(refer to tyre manufacturers recommendations). 3. WATER INPUT
4. AIR INPUT
OPERATION 5 5. AIR VENT

When sufficient weight has been added, remove the

pump. Install the valve core. Inflate the tyre to the cor-
rect pressure.

NOTE: When liquid ballast is used, inflate the tyres 0.14

bar (2 PSI) more than the recommended pressure. This
will compensate for aeration that occurs when the tyre Draining
is in motion.
- Jack up the tyre to be drained and set it with its valve
NOTE: Never use ballasting systems differing from the pointing downwards.
ones indicated above.
– Unscrew the mobile union of the valve and allow the
WARNING: Ballasting with water and calcium chlo- water to drain from the tyre.
ride antifreeze solution can increase corrosion
of the components that come into contact with the - Screw the required union on the valve seat.
mixture.
– Introduce air at a pressure through the union (4):
water will come out from the tube (5).

– Remove the union (3), replace it with the valve

retainer, then inflate the tyre.

182
 Tyres, Wheels, Ballasting

This page has been left blank intentionally

183
Tyres, Wheels, Ballasting

This page has been left blank intentionally

184
Maintenance

Section 7
Maintenance 7

185
Maintenance

RECOMMENDATIONS BEFORE YOU SERVICE

WARNING: Before servicing, carefully read Put a warning tag, as shown below, on or near the key
the instructions in this section. There is a risk switch before carrying out servicing or repairs to the trac-
of injury or death if servicing is not carried tor. Warning tags (publication number 2-1000) are available
out or if the following instructions are not from your dealer.
followed correctly. If you do not understand
a service or adjustment procedure, see your
dealer.
Before any adjustments are made carry out
the following:
1. Park the tractor on hard level ground and
apply the parking brake.
2. Stop the engine and remove the key.
3. Put blocks in front of and behind the front
and rear wheels.

WARNING: When handling lubricants (oil,

grease etc.) and other chemical products,
always follow instructions for their proper
use. Use proper containers to collect fluid.
Dispose of fluids and filters responsibly and
in accordance with the law. DO NOT smoke
or use an open flame during the service pro-
cedure. Use eye protection.

Environment
Before you service this machine and before you dispose
of the old fluids, lubricants and filters always consider
Read the safety decals and information decals on this trac- the environment.
tor. Read the operator's manual. Understand the operation
of the tractor before you start servicing. DO NOT pour oil or fluids in the ground, down drains or
into containers that can leak.

Dispose of all old fluids, lubricants and filters in accord-

ance with local regulations.

Check with your local environmental recycling center or

your dealer for correct information.

Plastic And Resin Parts

Avoid using petrol, paraffin, paint thinner, etc., when
cleaning plastic, e.g. console, instrument cluster, moni-
Use the correct safety clothing and safety equipment.
tors and gauges etc.
If you wear clothing that is too loose or do not use the
correct safety equipment for your job, you can be injured.
Use ONLY water, mild soap and a soft cloth when you
Always wear clothing that will not catch on objects. Extra
clean these parts.
safety equipment that can be required includes hard hat,
safety shoes, ear protection, eye or face protection, heavy
Using petrol, paraffin, paint thinner etc., will cause crack-
gloves and reflector clothing.
ing or deformation of the part being cleaned.
Establish where your nearest first aid kit and fire extin-
guisher are located. Undertake suitable training to make
sure you know how the fire extinguisher works.

186
 Maintenance

SERVICE ACCESS
Access for inspection and mainte-
nance
WARNING: Do not carry out inspections, main-
tenance work or adjustments on the tractor
whilst the engine is running. Wait for all mo-
ving parts to come to a complete stop.

WARNING: The surfaces inside the bonnet

are hot. Be extremely careful and wait for
the surfaces to cool down before operating
inside the bonnet to avoid burns.

WARNING: Open the bonnet and remove the

side panel only with engine off and rotating CX - SWB: - Pull the hood release lever.
parts completely at standstill.

WARNING: A gas ram controls opening and

closing of the bonnet. Replace the gas ram if
not properly operating to avoid accidental
fall of the bonnet.

WARNING: If the tractor is equipped with front

hitch and power take-off, before opening the
bonnet lower the links completely, whether
there are implements or not.

How to open the bonnet

- Park the tractor on hard, level ground and apply the
park brake.

CX - To open the bonnet, insert the tool (1 - Fig.1) in the Fig. 1

front slit and hook up the bonnet closure device.
- Release the locking mechanism.
- Release the bonnet (Fig. 2) and push the front upward
keeping clear until the hood is fully raised. The gas strut
will hold the bonnet in the upright position.

IMPORTANT: When opening the bonnet in windy condi-

7
tions, put the front of the tractor towards the wind with
the back of the tractors against the wind direction.

- To close, pull the cable and push the front down hard
to close.

CX - Remove the tool.

WARNING: Replace all covers or guards remo-

ved, close the bonnet and close any service 9
access doors after servicing or cleaning this
machine. NEVER operate the machine with
any covers or guards removed or with the
bonnet or service door open. Fig. 2

187
Maintenance

Tool Box
The tool box (if equipped) is placed in the front of the cab,
on the right-hand side.

To remove the tool box, proceed as follows:

NOTE: The steps are removed for illustration purposes.

Open the cover. Remove the central fixing pin (1) on the
rear of the tool box.

Lift the tool box and pull it out.

188
 Maintenance
IMPORTANT: ARGO Tractors recommends the AGROLUBE lubricants as shown in the table.
To allow other operators on the lubricant market to propose the use of other brands, however, the table also shows
specifications and technical standards. Alternative products must be of equivalent quality and comply with the indicated
international specifications. They should also be approved by the Technical Service at Argo Tractors for compliance with
the Company’s specifications.

LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

COMPONENT Q.ty SPECIFICATIONS AMBIENT CORRESPONDING SPECIFICATIONS
litres TEMPERATURE AGROLUBE

Fuel tank capacity

155

AGROLUBE MUREX Concentrated antifreeze fluid to be used in the Degrees °C -8° -15° -25° -35°
COOLING CIRCUIT 17,5 following percentages:
Specifications: GM 1899M (1970); FORD ESE-M97B % 20 30 40 50

Viscosity at Viscosity at
40°C, cSt 100°C, cSt

ENGINE 7,3 ACEA E7/E5/E3/B3 ANY SOLEA

TEMPERATURE LD 15W40 115 15,2
API CH-4/SL

API GL - 4 U.T.T.O VELA/C

XTRASHIFT GEARBOX AND 52 MF 1145 ANY 56 9,8
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM (1) TEMPERATURE o
LANDINI I-ENG-D-302 VELA/HTX

POWERSHIFT GEARBOX
AND 2-SPEED SYNCRO- API GL - 4 U.T.T.O VELA/C
37 MF 1145 ANY o 56 9,8
MESH DEVICE (MECHANIC) TEMPERATURE
AND HYDRAULIC SYSTEM LANDINI I-ENG-D-302 VELA/HTX
(1)

API GL - 5 ANY
FRONT AXLE (1) 5,0 ZF TE-ML 05C,12C,16E CARINA LS 90 174 16,8
TEMPERATURE

FRONT FINAL DRIVES

0,6
API GL - 5 7
WITHOUT BRAKE DISCS MF1134M ANY CARINA 80W-90 174 16,8
(1) FORDM2C 108C TEMPERATURE
MIL-L-2105 D

CX - MECHANICAL LANDINI AZA

155 ANY 22,5 5,6
CLUTCH CONTROL CIRCUIT S/ENG/I 102 TEMPERATURE RED (2)

FRONT POWER TAKE-OFF API GL - 4 U.T.T.O

2,7 MF 1145 ANY VELA/C 56 9,8
(if equipped) TEMPERATURE
LANDINI I-ENG-D-302

ANY —
9
GREASE POINTS — — GENA GREASE —
TEMPERATURE EP

(1) Use only oils conforming to the required specifications.

(2) AGROLUBE AZA RED, Mineral based oil for brake circuits complying with LANDINI S/ENG/I 102 specifications.

189
Maintenance

SERVICING YOUR TRACTOR

All tractors continued value, operation and reliability de- Engine Hour meter
pend to a large extent on regular servicing. McCormick
tractors have been designed to provide easy daily and Use the engine hour meter, along with the Service Charts
routine access. on the following pages, to service your machine at the
correct intervals.
When servicing your tractor ONLY use original McCormick
service parts, oils, lubricants, coolants, filters etc. which With the key switch in the ON position, the engine hour
are released by McCormick or are McCormick Approved, meter (1) shows the actual hours the engine has run the
to avoid affecting the working life of this tractor. number after the decimal point is tenths of an hour.
Services must be carried out at varying Engine Hour
intervals or periodically through out the year, depending To view the hours for the routine servicing, see in Acces-
on which comes first, see below for a list. sory menu the "Service timer" on the instrument panel.

Every 10 Hours, or daily

Every 50 Hours, or weekly

Every 100 Hours, or bi-weekly

Every 250 Hours, or weekly

Every 500 Hours, or every 6 months

Every 1000 Hours, or every year

Every 2000 Hours, or every 2 years

WARNING: Prior to commencing any servic-

ing procedures on the tractor, make sure the
engine is not running and the keyswitch is in
the OFF position.

190
 Maintenance

Service Indicator Lamps And Gauges First service operations required before the pro-
grammed ones

A few operations are required that are not included in

regular servicing. Such operations are listed below.

After adjusting wheels/axles, after the first 30 min-

utes usage (then every 10 hours, until the torque
value stabilizes):

- Check all tyre bolts/nuts for torque values.

- Check all bolts/nuts of the front axle for torque val-

ues.

After the first 20 hours of use of the front power

Warning and indicator lamps (see above) indicate the con-
take-off (then at 500 hours, and thereafter every
dition of the monitored system. If a lamp goes on when
the engine is running, a service or repair are required. 500 hours of use with the front PTO):

The operation of the indicator lamps and gauges is - Change oil in the front PTO.
described in the INSTRUMENTATION Section of this
manual. After the first 20 hours of engine running (then after
500 hours, and thereafter every 500 hours):
When the ignition key is switched to the ON position, the
instrument panel automatically checks all monitored sys- - Change oil filter of gearbox/hydraulic system.
tems. Some warning lamps, indicator and digital displays
light up for 3.5 seconds. After the first 50 hour of operation (then at 250
hours, and thereafter every 25 hours operation):
Before starting the tractor, make sure all systems are
operating. - Check drive belts for tension.

Service intervals can be programmed into the Digital

After the first 250 hour of operation (then at 1000
Instrument Cluster by your Dealer's personnel to remind
hours, and thereafter every 1000 hours opera-
you when service is required.
tion):

- Change oil in the MFD axle differential.

7
- Change oil in the MFD axle epyciclic reduction gears.

191
Maintenance

Routine maintenance guide OPERATION

REQUIRED
SERVICE
HOURS

SEE PAGE
REPLACE
SERVICE POINTS

GREASE

CHECK

CLEAN
DRAIN
Every 10 hours (or daily)
General tractor inspection (Note 1) X -
Front wheel nuts X 170
Rear wheel nuts X 176
Fuel level X 194
Transmission/hydraulic oil level X 194
Engine oil level X 195
Coolant recovery reservoir level X 195
Front PTO oil level (Note 6) X 196
Pneumatic trailer brake reservoir X 196

Every 50 hours (or weekly)

Air pressure in tyres X 161
Greasing point in MFD front axle (Notes 6 and 8) X 197
Radiator and Coolers X 198
Fuel water trap - Fuel filter X 199
Engine air filter valve (Notes 4 and 6) (change every 1000 hours) X 199
Cab air recirculation filter X 199

Every 100 hours (or every 2 weeks)

Rear three-point linkage, adjustable rods (Note 8) X 200
Front three-point linkage, adjustable rods (Note 8) X 200
Cab air intake filter X 201

Every 250 hours (or every month)

Trailer hitch or auto pick-up hitch, moving parts (Notes 2, 6, 8) X 205
Trailer hitch, bolt torques (Note 6) X 205
Draw-bar, bolt torques (Note 6) X 206
Front axle differential and planetary oil (Note 6)
(Change after the FIRST 250 hours) X 206
Battery(s) X 207
Parking brake engagement check X 208
Fan and alternator belt, compressor belt (Note 6)
(Check tension after the first 50 hours) X 208
Power steering circuit oil filter X 208

192
 Maintenance

Routine maintenance guide OPERATION

SERVICE REQUIRED
HOURS

SEE PAGE
REPLACE
SERVICE POINTS

GREASE

CHECK
CLEAN
DRAIN
Every 500 Hours, or every 2 months
Engine Oil and Oil Filter (Note 10) X 209
Transmission/hydraulic system oil filter (change after the first 250 hours) X 210
Engine Fuel Filters X 211
Operator presence switch operation (only with Powershift) X 213
Front PTO oil (if equipped) X 214
Adjustment of automatic hitch rods (Notes 2 and 6) X 215

Every 1000 hours, or once in a year

MFD sleeve (Note 6) X 216
Engine Valve Clearances X 216
Cooling system anti-freeze (yearly before winter) X 216
Grease door locks and hinges X 216
Engine air intake system X 218
Engine primary air filter (Notes 2 and 4) X 218
Engine secondary air filter X 218
Dust discharge valve of engine air filter X 218
Transmission/hydraulic oil X 220
Oil in epyciclic reduction gears and differential (all MFD axles) (Note 6)
(change after the FIRST 250 hours) X 222
Cab intake air filter (Note 3) X 223
Fuel Injectors X 225

Every 2000 Hours (or every 2 years)

Engine Coolant Change X 226
Fuel system general inspection X 227

7
General Maintenance
Air conditioning system X 228
General Inspection X 229

NOTE 1: Check the tractor for leaks, rubbing, squeezed or cracked hoses, loose nuts or bolts and trash build up.
Repair all leaks, hoses and tighten loose nuts/bolts before operation.
NOTE 2: Check for wear and function.
NOTE 3: In dusty conditions the cab filter will require more frequent cleaning. 9
NOTE 4: Also clean the filter element whenever the service monitor illuminates.
NOTE 5: Change after the first 20 hours of PTO use.
NOTE 6: If equipped.
NOTE 7: After 250 hours of PTO use.
NOTE 8: In extreme work conditions, a daily greasing is recommended.
NOTE 9: After any wheel adjustments, check after 30 minutes, then every 10 hours until torque values stabilize.
NOTE 10: 500 hours is the maximum tolerated frequency for oil changes. The oil must be changed more frequently (e.g.
every 250 hours) if the tractor is used in heavy duty conditions.

193
Maintenance

10 HOURS OR DAILY SERVICE

Check fuel level WARNING: Hydraulic oil or diesel fuel leaking
under pressure can penetrate the skin and
cause infection or other injury. To prevent
injury: release all pressure, before discon-
necting fluid lines. Before applying pressure,
make sure all connections are tight and
components are in good condition. Never use
your hand to check for suspected leaks under
pressure. Use a piece of cardboard or wood
for this purpose. If injured by leaking fluid,
see a doctor immediately.

NOTE: Never use galvanised containers to store fuel.

Check transmission/hydraulic oil

Fill the fuel tank at the end of each day after work has been level
completed to prevent condensation in the fuel tank.
To check the transmission oil level, put the tractor on
Diesel Fuel level ground.
Use a high grade diesel fuel. The use of a low grade
fuel will result in loss of engine power and high fuel IMPORTANT: It is recommended to check the oil level be-
consumption. fore starting the engine (transmission oil cold before using
the tractor for the work day). If the tractor has already been
Fuel storage operated, WAIT for the transmission oil to set (time varies
If you keep fuel in storage for a period of time, you can get according to how long the tractor has been in use).
foreign material or water in the fuel storage tank. Many
engine problems are caused by water in the fuel. Make sure the dipstick (1) is pushed completely in before
checking the level.
Keep the fuel storage tank outside and keep the fuel as
cool as possible. Remove water from the fuel storage
tank at regular intervals.

IMPORTANT: Different grades of diesel fuel are required

for summer and winter operations. See your fuel supplier
for winter fuel requirements in your area.

WARNING: Never refuel the machine when

the engine is hot or running. Never smoke
while refueling.

WARNING: Engine fuel is flammable and can

cause a fire or an explosion. DO NOT fill the
fuel tank or service the fuel system near an
naked flame, welding, burning cigars, ciga-
rettes etc.

If the oil level is below the FULL mark on the dipstick, add
the recommended oil in through the fill tube (2) located
at the rear of the transmission.

If working in extreme hilly conditions make sure the oil

level is raised to the MAX mark on the dipstick.

194
 Maintenance

10 HOURS OR DAILY SERVICE

Check engine oil level Check coolant level

To check the engine oil level, put the tractor on level Check the coolant level when the coolant is cold and with
ground and stop the engine. the engine stopped. DO NOT REMOVE THE RADIATOR
CAP.
Wait for 15 minutes for the oil to settle before checking
the oil level. The coolant level must be within the normal cold range
marks (1) on the reservoir. If the level is below the mini-
Make sure the dipstick (1) is pushed completely down mum mark, fill the reservoir to the top mark with correct
before checking the oil level. coolant mixture (this will depend upon market require-
ments).
If the oil level is under the ADD mark, add oil through the
filler tube (2), to raise the oil to the correct level (FULL).
DO NOT add oil over the FULL mark.

Quick Reference Guide

in the following percentages:
Ambient temperature (°C) -8 -15 -25 -35

7
Ambient temperature (°F) -18 -5 -13 -31
Percentage of antifreeze % 20 30 40 50

WARNING: Hot coolant can spray out if the

coolant recovery reservoir cap or radiator
cap is removed while system is still hot. DO
NOT REMOVE THE RADIATOR CAP. To remove
the coolant recovery reservoir cap or ra-
diator cap, let system cool, turn cap to first
notch, then wait until pressure is released.
Scalding can result from fast removal of 9
radiator cap.

195
Maintenance

10 HOURS OR DAILY SERVICE

Check front PTO oil level (if Drain pneumatic trailer brake reser-
equipped) voirs (if equipped)

To check the power takeoff oil level, put the tractor on

level ground.
Remove the fill/level plug (1) located on the Operate the drain valve plunger under each reservoir to
front of the housing. If the oil level is low, add the recom- drain any water which has collected.
mended oil type to raise the oil level to the bottom edge
of the fill hole. Install the plug and tighten.

Servicing the front power take-off Check windshield washer reservoir

level
Periodically throughout the year, additional attention
should be made to the following:
- Check all bolts, screws and fixings etc. are tight.
- Check the PTO gearbox for any leaks.
Operating the Front PTO at low oil levels can cause
damage to the gearbox, incorrect operation of the PTO
clutch and also damage to the environment.
- Check the condition of the flexible rubber drive cou-
pling, mounted to the crankshaft pulley. Make sure the
coupling is installed correctly and is not brittle.
- Apply grease to the drive shaft spline.

If the fluid level is low fill the reservoir.

196
 Maintenance

50 HOUR MAIN SERVICE

Grease Points
NOTE: Use lithium grease of the prescribed type.
NOTE: In severe conditions lubricate these points more frequently.

Mechanical Front Drive (MFD) Axle

Front axle pins (front and rear)

Steering knuckle swivel pins - 2 points each side

9

197
Maintenance

50 HOUR MAIN SERVICE

Clean grille screens and radiator OPERATION 4
area
Clean the grille screens, air conditioning condenser, oil
cooler, fuel cooler, charge cooler (as equipped) and radia-
tor area every 50 hours of operation, or more frequently if
required when operating in dirty conditions.

IMPORTANT: Be careful not to bend or damage the fins

during cleaning. Areas with restricted access should be
carefully cleaned with compressed air.

IMPORTANT: If you clean using compressed air use an air

hose with a safety ON/OFF control nozzle and ALWAYS
WEAR FACE PROTECTION.

WARNING: DO NOT steam clean any air con-

Pull forwards the top of the oil cooler or of the air condi-
ditioning system parts while the system is
tioner condenser (if equipped).
charged. The heat will cause the refrigerant
to rise to a pressure that could cause the
Clean as required.
system to explode.

Check the clutch oil reservoir level

To gain access:

OPERATION 1

Remove both side panels (if equipped).

OPERATION 2

Lift the hood, if it is the tilting type.

Remove the hood, if it is the fix type.

OPERATION 3

To check the level, place the tractor on flat ground. If the

level is below the minimum, top to the maximum level
with oil of the prescribed type.

Loosen the bolts fixing the condenser on both sides of the

oil cooler of the air conditioner condenser (if equipped).

198
 Maintenance

50 HOUR MAIN SERVICE

Drain fuel/water separator Clean cab air recirculation filter

OPERATION 1

The drain plug is located on the bottom of the fuel/water

separator. Loosen the plug to let any water or sediment
drain from the filter. Tighten the drain plug after the water Remove the four screws from the recirculation grille.
has drained.
OPERATION 2
IMPORTANT: Dispose of fuel in accordance with local
regulations. DO NOT drain on the ground, into a drain
or into a container that can leak. Be responsible for the
environment.

Check engine air filter dust valve

(if equipped).

7
Remove the recirculation grille and the filter.

OPERATION 3

Clean the filter using mild soap and water. Rinse with clear
water and squeeze out the excess.

OPERATION 4
1
Install the filter in the recirculation grille.
9
OPERATION 5
Squeeze the rubber dust valve (1) under the filter body
cover to remove any dust. Install a new dust valve if dam- Install the grille and filter. Install and tighten the screws.
aged, or not operating correctly.

IMPORTANT: A new rubber dust valve MUST be installed

every 1000 hours.

199
Maintenance

100 HOUR MAIN SERVICE

Grease Points
NOTE: Use lithium grease of the prescribed type.

NOTE: In severe conditions lubricate these points more frequently.

Front 3 point hitch (if equipped)

NOTE: Lubricate if not used frequently and also after washing with water pressure hose.

Rear 3 Point Hitch Front 3-point hitch

(if equipped).

Top of lift cylinder, 2 points.

Turnbuckles, 2 points each side

Bottom of lift cylinder.

Stabilizers, if equipped.
NOTE: Lubricate if not used frequently and also after
washing with water pressure hose.

200
 Maintenance

100 HOUR MAIN SERVICE

Check and clean cab air intake fil-
ter
Check and clean the intake air filter every 100 hours or
more often if needed. Keep the air filter clean for efficient
operation of the heating and cooling system. Replace
with a genuine McCormick part if damaged or when the
filter can not be cleaned.

WARNING: Cab air filters remove dust in the

air, but are not capable of removing chemi-
cals used in spraying crops or in weed con-
trol. Many chemicals used for these purposes
are toxic when improperly used, and can be
hazardous to operators and others in the
area. Follow the instructions of manufactur- Cab air filter (1)
ers of both the equipment and the chemicals
regarding prohibitions against inhalation WARNING: Remember that the cab filter is not
of dust or spray, personal hygiene practices, suitable for chemicals in general.
and other precautions noted by the manu- Absolute protection against these products
facturers. can therefore only be achieved by taking
the precautionary measures required by the
IMPORTANT: Always wear protective clothing, e.g.: degree of harmfulness of the actual products
overalls, goggles, gloves and face mask when preparing used.
equipment for chemical spraying operations and ALWAYS This latter precaution must be strictly obser-
follow the chemical manufacturers instructions. ved for filters of any type.

DELUXE CAB - This type of tractor CANNOT be used to CAUTION:Take the filter off before washing the cab.
spray chemicals, unless the operator within the cab is If the cab is washed and the filter has not been de-
wearing a complete protective suit. mounted, take care to prevent the jet of water from
splashing on to the protective grille otherwise your
LOW PROFILE CAB - This type of tractor CANNOT be used cab’s filter will be irreparably damaged.
to spray chemicals, unless the operator within the cab is
wearing a complete protective suit. CAUTION: If active carbon filters are used, mount only
original filters supplied in a sealed package: follow the
The air intake filters should be checked weekly or daily if instructions for use on the container and attached to
used in extreme conditions. The standard paper element any filter package. Carefully comply with the operating
has the following efficiency with a maximum differential
pressure increase of 2 mbar. SAE gross gauze mesh
instructions on the filter packages or labels. Replace the
filters at the intervals specified by the filter manufacturer.
7
99.5%. Contact your Dealer if specific filters against chemicals
must be used.
NOTE: This element gives no protection against chemical Always wear individual protections suitable to the harm-
spray. fulness of the actual product used.

Protection level
CAUTION: The Manufacturer has no responsibility wha-
tever, either direct or indirect, for application of special
filters and/or changes to the air intake system of the cab. 9
Every change to the cab intake system can result in a
health hazard for the operator and significantly alter the
performance of the air conditioning system. In any case,
the cab is not guaranteed as perfectly dust-tight. Always WARNING: Tractors with cab have no protection
wear individual protections when working in particularly against harmful substances and dusts (protection level
dusty environment. 1). If the tractor is used in dusty environment and to
spray phytosanitary products or chemicals generally
thought of as hazardous to health, the operator must
NOTE: Replace the element(s) with genuine parts. wear individual protections (mask, goggles) suitable
to the harmfulness of the actual product used.

201
Maintenance

100 HOUR MAIN SERVICE

WARNING: Do not stand on the tractor to serv- OPERATION 3
ice the filter, use the correct equipment for a The filter element can be cleaned by one of the following
safe standing platform or injury can result. two methods:

For best performance, this filter should be serviced more A. Tap it on a flat surface.
often when working in particularly dusty environment. or
Replace with a genuine McCormick part if damaged or B. Blow it clean with compressed air.
when the filter can not be cleaned.
METHOD A
IMPORTANT: Respiratory protection equipment and pro-
tective clothing appropriate to the environment that the
filter has been in contact with MUST be used during the
cleaning of the filter.

Deluxe cab

OPERATION 1

If the dirt mainly consists in dust, this method can be

used to clean the filter. Tap the dusty side of the filter on
a flat surface. Do not use excessive force that can cause
damage to the filter.

Loosen both knobs (1) fixing the cover. METHOD B

Open the filter cover.

OPERATION 2

Remove the filter element and clean the filter seat.

To next page...

Use compressed air to blow dust away. Move the flow of

air up and down the clean the side of the filter. Maximum
air pressure must exceed 2 bar. Too much pressure will
damage the filter.

IMPORTANT: Always use an air hose with a safety ON/OFF

control nozzle and ALWAYS WEAR FACE PROTECTION.

OPERATION 4
Insert the filter element under the filter cover.
Close the cover and fix it with both knobs.

202
 Maintenance

100 HOUR MAIN SERVICE

Low Profile Cab (LP) OPERATION 2

IMPORTANT: Respiratory protection equipment and pro-

tective clothing appropriate to the environment that the
filter has been in contact with MUST be used during the
cleaning of the filter.

OPERATION 1

LP CAB WITHOUT AIR CONDITIONING

Slide the filter element out.

LP CAB WITHOUT AIR CONDITIONING

LP CAB WITH AIR CONDITIONING

Release the retainer and pull out the filter element.

7
IMPORTANT: If at any time the tractor has been used for
chemical spraying operations, remove the filter and ac-
cess cover immediately from the cab. Take care not to
deposit any dirt from the filter and access cover on the
LP CAB WITH AIR CONDITIONING cab interior.

Loosen and remove the screws fixing the filter cover. OPERATION 3
Clean the filter seat.

OPERATION 4
The filter element can be cleaned by following
one of two methods:
9
A. Tap it on a flat surface.

or

B. Blow it clean with compressed air.

To next page...

203
Maintenance

100 HOUR MAIN SERVICE

METHOD A OPERATION 5

LP CAB WITHOUT AIR CONDITIONING

If the dirt mainly consists in dust, this method can be
used to clean the filter. Tap the dusty side of the filter on
a flat surface. Do not use excessive force that can cause
damage to the filter.

METHOD B

LP CAB WITH AIR CONDITIONING

Install and fix the clean filter element. Replace the access
cover and tighten the retaining screws.

Use compressed air to blow dust away. Move the flow of

air up and down the clean the side of the filter. Maximum
air pressure must exceed 2 bar. Too much pressure will
damage the filter.

IMPORTANT: Always use an air hose with a safety ON/OFF

control nozzle and ALWAYS WEAR FACE PROTECTION.

204
 Maintenance

250 HOUR MAIN SERVICE

Grease Points Check the torque of the trailer

hitch bolts (if equipped)
Locking latches for auto hitch
Check the torque values of all bolts for ALL hitch types
before the delivery, then every 250 hours.

Torque the bolts (1) to 405-460 Nm.

Torque the bolts (2) to 360-405 Nm.

Torque the bolts (3) to 230-260 Nm.

1
Locking latches and rear pivot points.

NOTE: Use lithium grease of the prescribed type.

NOTE: In severe conditions lubricate these points more

frequently.

Grease the trailer hitch slide rails

and the moving parts of the hitch
latch.
1. The hitch should be carefully cleaned every 250 hour
operation, and the moving parts (also inner slide rails)
should be greased to avoid corrosion.

2. Make sure that all moving parts move freely and operate
7
correctly.

NOTE: In heavy duty operating conditions, the hitch could

require a more frequent greasing to ensure it operates
correctly. 1 1
IMPORTANT: The hitch clevis and pin are copiously
greased before delivery from the manufacturing plant to
ensure a correct operation for a long time. In heavy duty
3 3
conditions, however, a more frequent lubrication of these
points could be required. In this case, the operation must 9
be performed EXCLUSIVELY by your Dealer.
3 3

205
Maintenance

250 HOUR MAIN SERVICE

Check drawbar support bracket Check differential oil level
bolts torques
Check the torque of the drawbar support bracket bolts
every 250 hours.

1. Torque the bolts (1) to 135-152 Nm.

2. Torque the bolts (2) to 45-50 Nm.

To check the differential oil level, put the tractor on level

ground. Remove the fill/level plug (1).

The oil must be level with the bottom edge of the hole.
1 Add the recommended oil type to raise the oil to the cor-
1 2 rect level if required. Install the plug and tighten.

Check planetary oil level

To check the planetary oil level, park the tractor on level

ground.

Turn the wheel hub until the plug (2) is in the 3 or 9 o'clock
position. Remove the plug and check the oil level. The
oil must be level with the bottom of the plug hole, add
the recommended oil type to the correct level if required.
Install the plug and tighten.

206
 Maintenance

250 HOUR MAIN SERVICE

Batteries OPERATION 2

Check the electrolyte level in each cell if the tractor is

equipped with a low maintenance battery.

WARNING: BATTERY ACID CAUSES SEVERE

BURNS. Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Antidote:
EXTERNAL - Flush with water.
INTERNAL - Drink large quantities of water or
milk, DO NOT induce vomiting. Seek medical
attention immediately.
EYES - Flush with water for 15 minutes and
get medical attention immediately.
BATTERIES PRODUCE EXPLOSIVE GASES.
Keep sparks, flame and cigarettes away.
Ventilate when charging or using in enclosed
area. Always wear eye protection when work- Remove cell cover plates carefully.
ing near batteries. KEEP OUT OF REACH OF
CHILDREN. Add distilled water to just cover the top of the separators.
DO NOT OVERFILL. Do not use water which contains
minerals. The right level should be 3 to 6 mm under the
breather.
Check Electrolyte Level
When distilled water is added at ambient temperatures be-
OPERATION 1 low 0°C (32°F) the batteries must be charged immediately
to mix the water and electrolyte or the water will freeze,
NOTE: The level of the electrolyte must be checked with because the water will stay on top of the electrolyte.
the engine off, the tractor parked on flat ground and the
battery cold.

NOTE: Make sure that the battery terminal nuts are well Battery cables and terminals
fixed to their terminals.
The battery terminals must be kept clean and tight.
Remove all corrosion with a wire brush, then wash with
a weak solution of baking soda or ammonia. Put some
petroleum jelly or light grease on terminals to prevent
more corrosion.
7
WARNING: When connecting the battery to
a charger, make sure that the positive (+)
lead of the charger is connected to the posi-
tive of the battery and the negative (-) to the
negative. Incorrect connection will damage
the diodes and the other circuit components.

Remove the front and rear screws from the battery box
9
cover and remove the cover.

NOTE: The steps and the toolbox (if equipped) were re-
moved for illustration purposes.

207
Maintenance

250 HOUR MAIN SERVICE

Check parking brake engagement Check drive belts tension
Check the tension of ALL drive belts, on the longest run of
the belt (1), every 50 hours during the first 100 hours of op-
eration until constant, then every 250 hours of operation.

The tension is right when the belt gives 10 mm on its

longest run when applying a pressure of 4.5 kgs with
your thumb.

Check the belt for cuts and wear. Replace as required.

Make sure that the ratchet locking mechanism of the

parking brake is secure and reliable.
The parking brake lever (1) should not be shifted more Filter on the delivery of the steering
than 3-4 marks so that the brakes can hold a fully loaded
tractor on a slope. circuit
Adjust the locking device as required.
Change the paper filter on the delivery after the first 250
hours service and then after every 250 hours.

208
 Maintenance

500 HOUR MAIN SERVICE

OPERATION 2
Change engine oil and filter

NOTE: 500 hours is the maximum tolerated frequency for

oil changes. The oil must be changed more frequently
(e.g. every 250 hours) if the tractor is used in heavy duty
conditions.

To change the engine oil, put the tractor on level ground

and stop the engine.

NOTE: For best results change the oil when the engine
is warm.

WARNING: Avoid contact with hot oil. Do not

change a hot filter due to risk of burning Turn the oil filter counterclockwise with a suitable wrench
skin on hands, Wait for the temperature to to remove.
fall under 50 °C.
OPERATION 3
OPERATION 1

Apply clean oil to the gasket on the new filter.

Install the filter. Turn the filter clockwise until the gasket
Put a suitable size container (see page 170 for engine comes in contact with the filter head.
capacity) under the drain plug (1).
Remove the drain plug and drain the oil. Take care of hot
oil when draining.
IMPORTANT: Only use an approved oil filter. These filters
have been specifically designed to provide superior engine
7
protection.
IMPORTANT: Dispose of oil and filters in accordance with
local regulations. DO NOT drain the oil on the ground, into IMPORTANT: DO NOT use a filter wrench to install the oil
a drain or put in a container that can leak. Be responsible filter or you can cause damage to the gasket and filter.
for the environment.
OPERATION 4
Install a new seal on the drain plug (1). Install the drain
plug in the crankcase and tighten.

OPERATION 5
Fill with the correct grade of engine oil, to the correct level,
9
see engine oil selection.

NOTE: Allow the oil to settle in the engine sump before

checking the level.

209
Maintenance

500 HOUR MAIN SERVICE

Change transmission/hydraulic oil and filter

1
2

5
6
4 5
1. MULTI-PURPOSE CONTROL VALVE
2. FILTER HOUSING
3. FIXING BOLT
4. WASHER
5. O-RING SEAL
6. FILTER ELEMENT

If the transmission oil needs to be changed, see Mainte- OPERATION 6

nance every 100 hours for a description. Install the unit with new o-ring seals in the filter sleeve
of the hydraulic circuit. Tighten the retainer bolt to 16-21
OPERATION 1 Nm. DO NOT overtighten.
Park the machine on hard level ground, engage the park
brake and stop the engine. OPERATION 7
Operate the hydraulic and steering systems a few times.
OPERATION 2
Place a suitable container under the multi-purpose control OPERATION 8
valve (1). Check the oil level in the transmission.

OPERATION 3 OPERATION 9
Remove the bolt (4) and the filter housing (3). Start the engine. Check for leaks around the drain plugs
and the oil filter. Check all systems for correct operation.
OPERATION 4
Remove and discard the old filter element (7) and o-ring
seals (6).

IMPORTANT: Dispose of oil and filters according to local

law requirements. Be responsible for the environment.

OPERATION 5
Install the new filter element.

IMPORTANT: Only use an approved oil filter, as such filters

are specifically designed to provide superior protection to
transmission and hydraulic system.

210
 Maintenance

500 HOUR MAIN SERVICE

Change Fuel Filter

WARNING: Engine fuel is flammable and can OPERATION 4

cause a fire or an explosion. DO NOT fill the
fuel tank or service the fuel system near an
naked flame, welding, burning cigars, ciga-
rettes etc.

OPERATION 1

Clean the filter head, filter and engine area next to the
filter before removing the filter.

OPERATION 2

Put clean oil or grease on the filter gasket of the new filter
before installing.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT fill the new filter with fuel before

installing.

IMPORTANT: Only use an approved fuel filter. These fil-

ters have been specifically designed to provide superior
engine protection.

Loosen the drain plug (1) on the bottom of the filter to OPERATION 5
drain any water. Install the filter by hand. Turn the filter until the gasket
contacts the filter head then turn a further 1/2 turn.
OPERATION 3
OPERATION 6

Fill the fuel tank and remove air from the fuel system. See
Fuel System Air Removal on the following pages.
7
IMPORTANT: DO NOT crank the engine before removing
all the air from the fuel system or the fuel injection pump
can be damaged.

9
Use a filter wrench to remove the filter.

IMPORTANT: Dispose of filter in accordance with local

regulations. DO NOT drain fuel onto the ground, into a
drain or into a container that can leak. Be responsible for
the environment.

211
Maintenance

500 HOUR MAIN SERVICE

Change fuel/water separator filter Bleeding air from the fuel system
element
Air can enter the fuel system in the following situations:
A. If the fuel tank becomes empty or is low on fuel.
OPERATION 1
B. After fuel system parts have been removed for service
Clean the filter head, filter and engine area next to the
or repairs.
filter before removing the filter.
C. If the tractor has been in a garage for a long period
of time.
OPERATION 2
IMPORTANT: DO NOT crank the engine before removing
all the air from the fuel system or the fuel injection pump
can be damaged.

On today's tractors no priming of the fuel system is

required, as an electric priming pump is present that
operates automatically and is controlled by the electronic
control unit.

Before cranking the engine, make sure there is fuel in the

tank and check the fuel level gauge.

Loosen the drain plug (1) on the bottom of the filter to

drain any water.

OPERATION 3
Remove the filter.

IMPORTANT: Dispose of filter in accordance with local

regulations. DO NOT drain fuel onto the ground, into a
drain or into a container that can leak. Be responsible for
the environment.

OPERATION 4
Smear with clean oil or grease the filter gasket of the new
filter before installing.
Install and tighten the new filter.
Turn the key switch to ON to energize the cut off solenoid.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT fill the new filter with fuel before
IMPORTANT: DO NOT crank the engine for too long, or
installing.
the starter motor, the battery and the fuel injection pump
could be damaged.
IMPORTANT: Only use an approved fuel filter. These fil-
ters have been specifically designed to provide superior
After starting the engine, check for fuel leaks around the
engine protection.
filter, the fuel lines and fittings. If the engine does not
run properly, repeat the start procedure to remove all air.
OPERATION 5
Fill the fuel tank and remove air from the fuel system.
IMPORTANT: Let the engine idle for at least two minutes
after removing air to ensure correct operation of the injec-
IMPORTANT: DO NOT crank the engine before removing
tion system.
all the air from the fuel system or the fuel injection pump
can be damaged.
WARNING: Never run the engine in a closed
building. Proper ventilation is required un-
WARNING: Engine fuel is flammable and can
der all circumstances.
cause a fire or an explosion. DO NOT fill the
fuel tank or service the fuel system near an
naked flame, welding, burning cigars, ciga-
rettes etc.

212
 Maintenance

500 HOUR MAIN SERVICE

Check function of the operator
presence switch
(ONLY Xtrashift tractors)
Check the switch for correct operation every 500 hours
or at least once in a year. The following checks should
be done in a clear open area with no other persons or
objects near the tractor.

OPERATION 1

While sitting on the operator's seat, with the engine run-

ning at low idle speed, and the F-N-R lever in NEUTRAL,
put the transmission into 1st range and release the clutch
pedal. Stand up out of the operator's seat while holding
onto the steering wheel and move the F-N-R lever from
NEUTRAL to either FORWARD or REVERSE. The Neutral
indicator “N” light will illuminate. The tractor MUST NOT
move. If the tractor moves, see your dealer for repair.

OPERATION 2

While sitting on the operator's seat, with the engine run-

ning at low idle speed, put the F-N-R lever in FORWARD,
the transmission in 1st range and release the clutch pedal
to start the tractor moving. Stand up out of the operator's
seat while holding onto the steering wheel, and move
the FNR lever out of the FORWARD position into the
REVERSE position. The Neutral indicator “N” light will
illuminate. The tractor MUST stop (default to Neutral). If
the tractor does not default to Neutral, see your dealer
immediately for repair.

IMPORTANT: If the operator presence switch circuit is

bypassed, the electronic system will sense the change
and the master warning lamp will illuminate.
7

213
Maintenance

500 HOUR MAIN SERVICE

Change front PTO oil and clean the oil filter
(Zuidberg front PTO)

OPERATION 1 OPERATION 3

Remove the pump cover (4). Remove the oil filter (5) from
the pump unit and clean the filter.

Put the tractor on level ground. OPERATION 4

Remove the hose (1) and allow the oil to drain into a suit- Install the clean oil filter, the pump cover (4) and tighten
able container. the bolt (3). Install the circlip (2).

For best results drain the oil after operation when the oil OPERATION 5
is warm. Once the oil has completely drained re-attach
the hose.

IMPORTANT: Dispose of oil in accordance with local

regulations. DO NOT DRAIN THE OIL ON THE GROUND
OR INTO A DRAIN. Be responsible for the environment.

OPERATION 2

Add the recommended oil type through the fill/level plug

hole (6) until the oil is level with the bottom edge of the
hole.

Wait approximately 5 minutes. Check the oil level again

and add oil as necessary. Install the fill/level plug.

Remove the circlip (2) and loosen the bolt (3).

214
 Maintenance

500 HOUR MAIN SERVICE

Check/adjustment of the auto hitch OPERATION 6
(if equipped)
As necessary or at least every 500 hours check the opera-
tion of the auto hitch and make sure the locking latches
(1) engage and the hitch is operating correctly.

OPERATION 1
Attach the loaded trailer to the auto hitch.

OPERATION 2
Raise the three-point linkage to maximum height. The
locking latches should snap into lock when the hitch
reaches its maximum height.

WARNING: When checking the operation of the

Remove the split pin (1) and remove the lift rod at the
auto hitch, stay well clear of moving parts or
lower end.
injury can result.
OPERATION 7
WARNING: Never run the engine in a closed
building. Proper ventilation is required un-
der all circumstances.

If the locking latches do not engage correctly, uniformly

adjust both lift rods as follows:

OPERATION 3
Unlatch the loaded trailer.

OPERATION 4
Raise the three-point linkage to maximum height.

IMPORTANT: Make sure the links are at max. height before

adjusting the lift rods.

OPERATION 5
Place all controls on the NEUTRAL position.
Stop the engine and remove the key from the key switch.
Turn the lift rod to the right to make it sorter, to the left
to make it longer. 7
OPERATION 8
Attach the lift rod again and apply the split pin.

OPERATION 9
Perform operations 1 to 3 to check that the lift rod are
adjusted by the same amount and that the locking latches
engage correctly.

IMPORTANT: If the lift rods are adjusted too precisely, the

hydraulic system of the tractor operates under a constant
pressure, with the risk of being damaged.
9

215
Maintenance

1000 HOUR MAIN SERVICE

MFD sleeve greasing Anti-freeze in engine cooling sys-
tem
NOTE: Use lithium grease of the prescribed type.
Once a year, before winter, check the anti-freeze fluid in
the engine cooling system.

Cab doors
Grease door locks and hinges

The shroud on the MFD drive shaft must be removed to

reach the greasing point.

Engine Valves
Have your dealer check the engine valve to tappet clear-
ances.

216
 Maintenance

1000 HOUR MAIN SERVICE

Check engine air induction system

Check all hoses for damage and that hose clamps are The primary (outer) filter is a high capacity filter designed
tight, correct torque = 3.4 Nm. to provide optimum protection to the engine.

Filter restriction indicator lamp The primary filter can be cleaned as required between
filter changes.
When the air filter restriction indicator lamp (1) on the
instrument cluster illuminates, the primary (outer) filter The secondary (inner) filter gives extra protection to the
element needs cleaning. Service the element after the engine if there is damage to the primary filter.
day's work is completed.
IMPORTANT: THE SECONDARY (INNER) FILTER MUST
NOT BE CLEANED. REPLACE THE FILTER IF DAMAGED
OR DIRTY, OR AT THE THIRD CLEANING OF THE PRIMARY
FILTER.

NOTE: If the air filter restriction indicator lamp* illuminates 1 2

after the primary filter has been serviced, check the fol-
lowing possible causes:

A. Secondary (inner) element is dirty.

B. Grille screen is dirty.

NOTE: If the service lamp of the air filter illuminates and

the intake system is clean, you should ask your dealer to 1. PRIMARY (OUTER) FILTER ELEMENT
check the operation of the transmitter to the restriction 2. SECONDARY (INNER) FILTER ELEMENT
indicator lamp.

WARNING: Before cleaning the filter with

IMPORTANT: Only use approved air filters, these filters
have been specifically designed to provide superior en- 7
compressed air, wear individual protections, gine protection.
in particular goggles and a mask to protect
your airways.

IMPORTANT: Dispose of filters correctly in accordance

with local regulations. Be responsible for the environment.

217
Maintenance

1000 HOUR MAIN SERVICE

Engine air filter service
OPERATION 1

Pull out the yellow tab (1), turn the cover (2) anti-clockwise
and remove.
5
OPERATION 2

Pull out the primary (outer) filter element (3).

OPERATION 3
4
Pull out the secondary (inner) filter element (4), if it has
to be changed.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT remove the secondary (inner) ele-

ment unless it has to be changed.

OPERATION 4

Clean the inside of the filter body (5).

1
IMPORTANT: Dispose of filters correctly in accordance
with local regulations. Be responsible for the environment.

OPERATION 5 3

Install a new secondary (inner) element (4), if necessary

or after the third cleaning of the primary filter (3). Apply
talcum powder or similar to the inner seal face before
installing the filter. Install with closed end outwards.
2
NOTE: NEVER use a petroleum base lubricant on the seal
area. Petroleum lubricant could "glue" the cover to the
element seal and damage the element. 6

218
 Maintenance

1000 HOUR MAIN SERVICE

OPERATION 6 OPERATION 8

Before installing the primary (outer) element, apply talcum

powder or similar to the inner seal face before installing
the filter. Install with closed end outwards. Install the
primary (outer) element, closed end outwards.

NOTE: NEVER use a petroleum base lubricant on the seal

area. Petroleum lubricant could "glue" the cover to the
element seal and damage the element.

OPERATION 9

Install the air filter cover, turn it clockwise and push on

the tab to lock the cover in its position.
If most of the dirt is dry, clean the primary element with
compressed air from the inside of the element to the
outside.
Keep the air nozzle approximately 130 mm (5 inches) away OPERATION 10
from the element and move the nozzle up and down while
turning the element.

IMPORTANT: The air pressure must not be more than 207

kPa, 2 bar (30 psi). Use an air hose with a safety ON/OFF
control nozzle and always wear face protection.

OPERATION 7

7
Replace the rubber dust guard (6) (if equipped).

To check that the clean element is not damaged or perfo-

rated, insert a light into the element and turn the element
Visually check the rubber gasket for damage. Check the
metal cover and filter material for damage. Replace an
element that is damaged.
9
IMPORTANT: Do not run the engine with the filters re-
moved.

219
Maintenance

1000 HOUR MAIN SERVICE

Transmission/hydraulic oil replacement
OPERATION 1 OPERATION 4

Park the tractor on hard, level ground, apply the park brake
and stop the engine.

OPERATION 2

Remove the drain plug from the PTO seat.

NOTE: The drain plug in the PTO seat (3) is covered by

the auto-hitch (that must be lowered) or by the drawbar,
if equipped (that must be removed.

Remove the front drain plug. OPERATION 5

In tractors with MFD, the drive shaft shroud has to be
removed to access the front drain plug. Install and tighten the drain plugs after the oil has drained.

IMPORTANT: Dispose of oil and filters according to local

law requirements. DO NOT drain the oil on the ground, into
OPERATION 3 a drain or into a container that can leak. Be responsible
for the environment.

OPERATION 6

Remove the drain plug (2) from the MFD gearbox (if
equipped). Remove the fill plug (1) and fill the transmission with
recommended oil to the correct level. Install a new trans-
mission housing breather (2).

220
 Maintenance

1000 HOUR MAIN SERVICE

OPERATION 7

Check the oil level.

IMPORTANT: Oil level should be checked before starting

the engine. If the tractor has already been operated, WAIT
for the transmission oil to set (time varies according to how
long the tractor has been in use, if oil is warm or cold etc.).

Make sure the dipstick is pushed completely down before

checking the oil level.

If oil level is under the FULL mark in the dipstick, top up

as required.

221
Maintenance

1000 HOUR MAIN SERVICE

Oil replacement in differential - MFD axle
OPERATION 1 Change MFD planetaries oil
Put the tractor on level ground and put a suitable size OPERATION 1
container under the drain plug.

OPERATION 2

Park the tractor on level ground and turn each hub until
Remove the drain plug (1), located on the bottom of the the plug (1) is at the bottom.
axle housing at the rear, and drain the oil.
For best results drain the oil when the oil is warm after OPERATION 2
operation.
Put a suitable size container under the plug. Remove the
IMPORTANT: Dispose of oil in accordance with local plug. For best results drain the oil when the oil is warm
regulations. DO NOT drain the oil on the ground, into a (after tractor operation).
drain or put in a container that can leak. Be responsible
for the environment. OPERATION 3

OPERATION 3 After the oil has drained, turn each wheel hub until the
Install the drain plug and tighten. plug is at the 3 or 9 o'clock position. Top up with oil of the
recommended type: oil should be level with the bottom
OPERATION 4 edge of the hole. Wait approximately 5 minutes for the
oil to settle, then check the oil level again and add oil if
necessary.

OPERATION 4

Install the plug and tighten.

IMPORTANT: Dispose of oil and filters in accordance with

local regulations. DO NOT drain the oil on the ground, into
a drain or put in a container that can leak. Be responsible
for the environment.

Remove the fill/level plug (2). Add the recommended oil

type until the oil is level with the bottom edge of the hole.
Wait approximately 5 minutes. Check the oil level again
and add oil as necessary.
Install the fill/level plug and tighten.

222
 Maintenance

1000 HOUR MAIN SERVICE

Change cab air intake filter WARNING: See at page 201 ot this handbook
rules and warnings concerning the correct
use of cab filters, and about the recommen-
IMPORTANT: Respiratory protection equipment and pro- ded precautions when using dangerous
tective clothing appropriate to the environment that the chemicals.
filter has been in contact with MUST be used during the
cleaning of the filter.

Deluxe cab
OPERATION 1

Remove both knobs (1) fixing the cover.

Remove the filter (2) and clean the filter housing.

IMPORTANT: The old filter MUST be put into a sealed

container and disposed of in accordance with local regula-
tions. Be responsible for the environment.

OPERATION 2

Install the new filter.

Close the cover and fix it with the knobs.
7
NOTE: Replace the filter only with original spare parts.

223
Maintenance

1000 HOUR MAIN SERVICE

Change cab air intake filter OPERATION 2
(Cont'd)
IMPORTANT: Respiratory protection equipment and pro-
tective clothing appropriate to the environment that the
filter has been in contact with MUST be used during the
cleaning of the filter.

Low profile cab (LP)

OPERATION 1

LP CAB WITHOUT AIR CONDITIONING

Slide the filter element out.

LP CAB WITHOUT AIR CONDITIONING

LP CAB WITH AIR CONDITIONING

Release the retainer and pull out the filter element.

IMPORTANT: If at any time the tractor has been used for

chemical spraying operations, remove the filter and access
cover immediately from the cab. Take care not to deposit
any dirt from the filter and access cover on the cab interior.
Clean the filter housing.

OPERATION 3
LP CAB WITH AIR CONDITIONING Clean the filter seat.
Loosen and remove the screws fixing the filter cover.
OPERATION 4
Install the new filter element.

NOTE: Replace the element with original spare parts.

IMPORTANT: The old element MUST be put into a sealed

container and disposed of in accordance with local regula-
tions. Be responsible for the environment.

224
 Maintenance

1000 HOUR MAIN SERVICE

OPERATION 5 Check condition of fuel injectors
The fuel injectors must not be cleaned. New injectors
must be fitted by your dealer if there is damage or a fault
occurs as listed below:

- Engine will not start or is difficult to start.

- Not enough power.

- Engine misfires or runs erratically.

- High fuel consumption.

- Black exhaust smoke.

- Engine knocks or vibrates.

LOW PROFILE CAB WITHOUT AIR CONDITIONING - Excessive engine temperature.

LOW PROFILE CAB WITH AIR CONDITIONING

7
Install and fix the clean filter element. Replace the access
cover and tighten the retaining screws.

225
Maintenance

2000 HOUR MAIN SERVICE

IMPORTANT: Dispose of drained coolant responsibly. DO
Engine coolant change NOT pour on the ground or into a drain. Be responsible
for the environment.
OPERATION 1
OPERATION 4
Remove the radiator cap slowly.
Close the radiator drain valve (2) and install the drain plug
WARNING: Hot coolant can spray out if the
(1) when the system is empty.
coolant recovery reservoir cap or radiator
cap is removed while system is still hot. DO
OPERATION 5
NOT REMOVE THE RADIATOR CAP. To remove
the coolant recovery reservoir cap or ra-
Use a good quality radiator cleaner and fill the system.
diator cap, let system cool, turn cap to first
Follow the instructions given with the radiator cleaner to
notch, then wait until all pressure is released.
clean the system.
Scalding can result from fast removal of
radiator cap.
OPERATION 6

Remove the engine block drain plug and open the radiator
drain valve. Flush the system with clean water to remove
OPERATION 2
the radiator cleaner solution.

IMPORTANT: Allow cleaning solution to drain into suitable

containers. Dispose of the cleaning solution responsibly.
DO NOT pour on the ground or into a drain. Be responsible
for the environment.

OPERATION 7

Inspect the hoses and fittings for damage and leaks.

OPERATION 8

Install the engine block drain plug, close radiator drain

valve and remove drain hose.
Put a suitable container under the engine block drain plug
OPERATION 9
(1) and remove plug.
Fill the cooling system with the coolant solution as speci-
OPERATION 3
fied below.

Start the engine and run at low idle for approximately 10

minutes.

Stop the engine and check the coolant level.

Replenish as required.

Put a hose on the radiator drain valve (2) and open valve.
Drain coolant into a suitable container.

226
 Maintenance

2000 HOUR MAIN SERVICE

Coolant Solution Fuel system general inspection
(Anti Freeze)
Every 2000 hours of operation see your Dealer for an
To prevent the coolant freezing in cold temperatures the inspection of the fuel system and fuel injection nozzles.
cooling system is filled with an ethylene glycol/water Moreover, have the engine checked for tuning-up.
coolant solution that has a low freezing point and a high
boiling point. To prevent dirt or water from reaching the injection parts
and causing damage and decreased performance, use
IMPORTANT: The heat generated by the diesel engine clean fuel, keep the fuel tank full, drain any water from the
causes a natural change in the inhibitors in the coolant fuel primary filter at regular intervals and service the filters.
which results in loss of corrosion protection. The loss of the
inhibitors may cause water pump cavitation and cylinder
block erosion.

Use only low silicate ethylene glycol coolant solution in

the cooling system. Use a good quality, high boiling point,
ethylene glycol that does not have any additives to stop
leaks. The silicate content must not exceed 0.1 percent.

Do not use rust inhibitors that are not approved. It is pos-

sible that the rust inhibitors and ethylene glycol will not
mix, and work against each other to decrease corrosion
protection, form deposits in the cooling system and cause
damage to the cooling system and the radiator.

Do not use a low boiling point, alcohol type coolant solu-

tion. Because the boiling point of alcohol is below the
tractor minimum operating temperature, loss of coolant
from evaporation will result.

IMPORTANT: Always have a minimum of 33 percent eth-

ylene glycol in the cooling system at all times and at all
ambient temperature ranges. Never use a solution of more
than 50 percent, unless the ambient temperature is below
-37 degrees C (-34 degrees F). More than 50% ethylene
glycol decreases heat transfer and will increase the engine
surface temperature to more than normal.

Prepare the coolant solution as follows:

7
A. Use clean water (distilled or deionized preferred).

B. Mix the correct ratio of ethylene glycol and water to

suit the market requirements.

C. Fill the radiator and coolant recovery reservoir using

the following procedure.

227
Maintenance

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Air conditioning system (if equipped)
WARNING: Never attempt to open the air conditioning system. Liquid refrigerant can cause severe and
painful frostbite. Contact your dealer, who is experienced in servicing and handling of refrigerants.

System check Compressor

The cab air conditioner is equipped with a system to During cold weather if the air conditioner has not been
protect the compressor from high or low refrigerant used for at least 30 days, operate the air conditioner
pressures. for a period of 10 to 15 minutes, at an engine speed of
1500 rpm. This will lubricate the seals to prevent them
Have your conditioning system checked once a year by becoming brittle and help prevent the loss of refrigerant
specialised personnel at your Dealer's. from the system.

DANGER: Always wear protective clothing in IMPORTANT: This tractor is equipped with HFC-134a
case of leaks. Coolant can injury the eyes. refrigerant, which will not destroy the ozone layer. Never
The coolant produces a toxic gas if it contacts recharge the air conditioning system with refrigerant other
a flame. than HFC-134a as this will result in loss of cooling and
permanent damage to all air conditioning components.

Hoses and wiring

Check all hoses for damage and leakage. Check that the
hose clamps are correctly tightened:

correct torque = 3.4 Nm.

Check all wiring for damage. If damage is found see your

Dealer for replacement of parts or refrigerant.

228
 Maintenance

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Viscous fan drive Inspection and maintenance of
safety belts (if equipped).
WARNING: Securely fasten your seat belt. Your
tractor is equipped with a ROPS cab or frame
for your protection. The seat belt can help in-
sure your safety if it is used and maintained.
Never wear a seat belt loosely or with slack
in the belt system. Never wear the belt in a
twisted condition or pinched between the seat
structural members.

- Keep sharp edges and items that can cause damage,

away from the belt.
During cleaning and maintenance of the engine and
- From time to time, check belt, buckles and mounting
radiator, be careful not to cause damage to the viscous
bolts for damage.
fan drive.
- Replace all parts that are worn or damaged.
During cleaning and maintenance of the engine and
radiator, be careful not to cause damage to the viscous
- Replace a belt that has cuts that can weaken the belt.
fan drive.
- Check that the bolts are tight on the seat bracket.
DO NOT restrict the fan blade rotation during engine
operation.
- Keep seat belt clean and dry.
DO NOT remove the bi-metal coil (1) on the front of the
- Clean belt only with a soap solution and warm water.
drive.
- Do not use bleach or dye on the belt because this can
Check the fan and drive for external damage or erratic
make the belt weak
operation. See your dealer if service is required.

Clean the operator's seat

Before removing stains, use a vacuum cleaner to remove
loose dirt.

Find what type and how old the stains are. Some stains
can be removed with water or soap solution.
7
CLEANER FLUID - This type of cleaner can be used for
grease or oil stains, follow manufactures instructions.

FOAM CLEANER: This type of cleaner is good for all stains,

follow manufactures instructions.

WARNING: Never use petroleum spirit, naptha

or any other volatile material for any clean-

9
ing purposes. These materials may be toxic
and/or flammable.

NOTE: Do not make the material wet or clean with a hard

brush. Clean with a damp cloth only. Immediately after the
material is clean, dry the material with dry cloth.

229
Maintenance

PUTTING THE TRACTOR INTO STORAGE

Preparing the tractor for storage OPERATION 8

When your tractor is not going to be used for some time, The batteries do not need to be removed from the tractor,
store the tractor in a dry protected place. Leaving your except for extended storage (more than 30 days) below
tractor outside, open to the weather, will shorten its life. freezing temperatures. The batteries must be fully charged
to prevent freezing. Disconnect the negative (-) ground
Follow the procedure below when your tractor is placed cable at the batteries to prevent possible discharge. Check
in storage for periods up to six months. the battery charge every 30 days.
See your dealer for the procedure on longer periods of
storage. OPERATION 9

OPERATION 1 Store the tractor where there is protection from sunlight.

Clean the tyres before storage. Support the tractor so that
Wash or clean and completely lubricate the tractor. See the load is off the tyres. If the tractor is not supported,
the Lubrication Section in this manual. inflate the tyres at regular intervals.

OPERATION 2 OPERATION 10

Clean the inside of the operator's cab and instrument Coat all exposed cylinder rods with light grease to pre-
console. vent rust.

OPERATION 3 Removing the tractor from storage

Rodents can damage a tractor in storage. Rodents will It is recommended that caution be used when starting an
attack plastic, insulation or rubber material. Clean the engine that has been in storage.
areas where rodents may nest. Leave access panels and
doors open to remove convenient nesting pockets. In OPERATION 1
some conditions leaving moth balls will help discourage
rats and mice. Open the fuel filter drain plug and remove contaminated
fuel. Close the drain plug.
OPERATION 4
OPERATION 2
Run the engine long enough to completely warm the oil in
the crankcase before draining the oil. Remove and replace Check that the grade of oil in the engine crankcase is as
the oil filter as instructed. Fill the crankcase with fresh oil specified in this Manual.
and run the engine for two to five minutes.
OPERATION 3
OPERATION 5
Check the coolant level in the reservoir and radiator.
Open the drain on the fuel filter and drain the water and
sediment before closing. Fill the fuel tank with a premium OPERATION 4
grade diesel fuel. If this fuel grade has not been used
regularly, drain the fuel tank and fill with premium diesel Check that the batteries are fully charged.
fuel. Run the engine for five minutes to circulate the fuel
through the fuel injection system. OPERATION 5
OPERATION 6 Connect the ground cable(s) (-) and tighten all terminals.
Clean the engine air filter and body. OPERATION 6
OPERATION 7 Check the transmission/hydraulic fluid level and linkages.
Drain, flush and fill the cooling system with the correct
antifreeze mixture to protect the tractor to the lowest
anticipated temperature.

230
 Maintenance

OPERATION 7 Fire prevention

Check and adjust the tension on all drive belts. Fire risks can be minimized by frequent removal of accu-
mulated crop material, trash or debris from the machine.
OPERATION 8
Remove all crop material, trash or debris at the start of
Do not accelerate the engine rapidly, or operate at high each working day. Take extra care to make sure the engine
RPM immediately after starting. area and exhaust system are clean.

OPERATION 9 It is your responsibility to remove and/or clean your ma-

chine on a regular basis.
Inflate the tyres to the correct operating pressures.
Fire risk can also be minimized by prompt repairing of
OPERATION 10 leaks and cleaning up fuel and oil spills.

Make sure that all shields and guards are in the correct Engine fuel is flammable and can cause a fire or an
position. explosion. DO NOT fill the fuel tank or service the fuel
system near an naked flame, welding, burning cigars,
cigarettes etc.
WARNING: Before starting the engine, be sure
all operating controls are in neutral and the Sparks or flames can cause the hydrogen gas in a battery
park brake applied. This will eliminate acci- to explode. To prevent an explosion, do the following:
dental movement of the machine on start-up
or power driven equipment. - When disconnecting the battery cables, disconnect
the negative (-) cable first. When connecting the bat-
tery cables, connect the negative (-) cable last.
WARNING: Do not operate the engine in a
closed building. Proper ventilation is re- - DO NOT connect jumper cables to start the engine.
quired under all circumstances. The engine can be started ONLY by the ignition
procedure described in this manual.

- DO NOT short circuit the battery posts with metal

items.

- DO NOT solder or smoke near the battery.

Check the electrical system for loose, tampered with or

poorly insulated connections. Repair or replace the loose
or damaged parts. 7

231
Maintenance

This page has been left blank intentionally

232
Electrical system

Section 8
Electrical system 8

233
Electrical system
BATTERIES

Recommendations
WARNING: The following rules must be respected to preserve an
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories efficient battery:
contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals - Keep the battery clean and dry, particularly on top.
known to the State of California to cause cancer - If the battery acid must be topped up, use distilled water
and reproductive harm. Wash your hands after only,
handling these parts. - Make sure that the cable terminal nuts are well fixed to
the battery terminals.
- Always use a wrench and not pliers to tighten and
loosen the terminal nuts.
WARNING: Do not use acid to top up the bat- - Smear terminals with petroleum jelly (not grease) to
tery. The electrolyte will boil over. Use only protect them from oxidation.
deionised distilled water and top up to a level - Never let the battery run completely down. If possible,
of 5/6 mm over the battery cells. recharge monthly.

WARNING: According to the Law it is man-

datory to dispose of batteries in suitable
containers provided to this purpose at au-
thorized centres. DO NOT dispose of them in
the environment.

WARNING: Battery electrolyte contains sul-

furic acid and can cause serious burns.
The following good practices are therefore
recommended.
- Wear leather heavy-duty gloves and protec-
tive clothes. In case of contact with the skin,
wash with plenty of water.
- Batteries release flammable gases that can
cause an explosion.
- DO NOT go near the battery with naked
flames or cigarettes.
- In case of contact with the eyes, first flush
with water, then seek medical help.
- Keep batteries well out of children’s re-
ach.
- It contains lead: NEVER dispose of batteries
in general waste.
- Deliver and dispose of exhausted batteries
only in suitable containers provided to this
purpose at authorized centres, according to
local rules.

234
 Electrical system

WARNING: Battery explosion and/or damage Removal and installation of batter-

to electrical components can result from
improper connection of booster batteries or ies
charger. Connect positive to positive and
negative to negative. Externally, battery acid OPERATION 1
can cause burns and blindness, and taken
internally is poison.

Keep the batteries in good operating condition as fol-

lows:

- Keep the batteries clean and dry, and the vents clear.

- Make sure the batteries are fastened securely in posi-

tion. Do not over tighten the clamps.

- LOW MAINTENANCE BATTERIES - Add distilled water

as needed to keep separators under water. Before you
add water, check each cell with a hydrometer. The
specific gravity in each cell must indicate a full charge
of 1.270 SG. Remove the front and rear screws from the battery box
cover and remove the cover.
NOTE: Cold temperatures of approximately -18 °C will
cause freezing of a battery with specific gravity of 1.175 NOTE: The steps and the toolbox (if equipped) were re-
SG. moved for illustration purposes.

Keep the batteries fully charged. Charge at the lowest rate OPERATION 2
possible to reduce gas formation. If a battery will not keep
a charge, install a new battery that has the specifications
given in "Specifications" section.

WARNING: Do not charge a frozen battery: it

could explode and cause serious injury.

.
When batteries are not in use
When the tractor is not being used for a long time, the
batteries should be recharged every six weeks to keep
them charged. Storage batteries not in use will slowly
discharge. A battery that has discharged can freeze at
low ambient temperatures and cause damage to the Lift the front panel to make access easier.
battery and tractor.
To remove the battery, disconnect the battery cables (1)
NOTE: Discarding old batteries can cause an environ-
mental liability. Check with your local environmental or
and remove the battery. When the battery is installed, 8
make sure the cables are connected to the correct termi-
recycling center or your dealer for the correct disposal nals. The electrical system is 12 volt, negative ground.
information.
IMPORTANT: Always disconnect the ground cable first
and connect the ground cable last to prevent sparks. Do
not start or operate the engine with the electrical system
not completely connected.

NOTE: The batteries can be disconnected without affect-

ing any programmed or stored information in the digital
instrument cluster. When the batteries are connected again
the instrument cluster will remember and use all stored
information such as tyre size code number, etc.

235
Electrical system

Connecting a booster battery OPERATION 5

IMPORTANT: When connecting a booster battery to the Start the tractor engine. See correct procedure in this
tractor battery(s), make sure the batteries are the same manual.
voltage (i.e. 12 Volt) and the electrolyte is at the correct
level. DO NOT connect auxiliary battery cables across the OPERATION 6
terminals of the starter. Always start the engine from the
operator's seat. When the tractor engine has started, disconnect the nega-
tive booster cable from the tractor frame and the booster
WARNING: Always connect the ground cable battery negative first, then the positive cable from the
last and disconnect the ground cable first tractor battery and the booster battery.
so you do not cause a spark at the battery.
A spark can cause a battery explosion and
cause injury.

Auxiliary battery terminal (if

Procedure equipped)
Remove the red protection cap (1), from the positive
terminal (2); and connect the positive (red) cable clamp
2 from the auxiliary battery to the terminal.

Connect the negative (black) cable clamp from the auxiliary

battery to a good ground on the tractor frame.

1 3
4

1. BOOSTER BATTERY
2. POSITIVE CABLE
3. TRACTOR BATTERY
4. NEGATIVE CABLE

OPERATION 1

Position the machine with the booster battery next to the

tractor so that the booster cables can be connected easily.
MAKE SURE THE MACHINES ARE NOT TOUCHING.

OPERATION 2

Turn off all electrical components on both machines.

OPERATION 3

Connect the booster battery positive (+) to the

tractor battery positive (+) and the negative (-)
to a good ground on the tractor frame, not to the
tractor battery terminal.

OPERATION 4 Install the red protection cap on the positive terminal after
the starting operation has been completed. (The position
Start the engine of the machine with the booster battery of the terminal depends on tractor model)
and run the engine for approximately 2 minutes.

236
 Electrical system
Battery system servicing
Follow these general rules to prevent damage to the - If electric welding is necessary, do the following to
electrical system. protect the electrical components:
- Before working on the electrical system, disconnect the
battery cables, ground cable first, or A. Disconnect the battery(s) or turn off the master switch
turn off the master switch (if equipped) and remove the (if equipped).
key.
- Do not make a reverse battery connection. B. Disconnect the instrument cluster harness.
- When you use a booster battery for starting, connect
negative (-) to negative (-) and positive (+) to positive C. Disconnect the Powershift controller (if equipped).
(+). Use the booster battery connections provided on
the tractor (if equipped). D. Disconnect the alternator.
See Booster Battery Connections in this manual.
- When charging the tractor batteries, use the auxiliary E. Disconnect all ECUs and in particular the engine EDC
battery connections on the tractor (if equipped). Do not unit.
attach directly to the battery terminals. Do not use a
battery charging machine for starting the Put the welding equipment ground cable as close as
tractor. you can to the weld area.
- Never try to start the tractor when the battery cables
are disconnected. Do not put the ground cable where the current can
- When you carry out maintenance on the engine, cover flow through bearings or along channels with wiring
the alternator to prevent foreign material from enter- harnesses.
ing.

Electrical system - Warnings

It is absolutely forbidden to make changes or connections As a principle, the grounding connections of the tractor
to the data interconnecting lines between control units may not be changed.
(CAN-BUS lines). They are to be considered as INVIOLA- If the creation of further grounding points is required, the
BLE. All diagnostic and maintenance operations may only holes already provided on the frame must be used, taking
be carried out by authorized technicians, with specific care of the following
appliances approved by McCormick. - remove lacquer from the frame
Use only fuses with the rated capacity for their specific - use a suitable highly conductive lacquer between frame
function. Do not ever use fuses with higher rated capac- and cable terminal
ity. Replace a blown fuse only after correcting the rela- - connect the ground within 5 minutes from lacquer ap-
tive malfunction and turn off any keys and users before plication.
replacing.
Please keep in mind that electrical systems made by un- THE POINTS PROVIDED FOR ENGINE CONNECTION
qualified persons might severely damage the systems on TO GROUND MUST BE ABSOLUTELY AVOIDED FOR
board the tractor (control units, harnesses, sensors etc.), GROUND CONNECTIONS.
and jeopardize the riding safety and good operation of
the tractor. Such damages ARE NOT COVERED BY OUR 1- Ground connection; A. Efficient grounding point; B. Not
CONTRACT WARRANTY. efficient grounding point.
Never disconnect control unit and sensor connectors
while the engine is running and the control units are
2- Cable fastening: A. Screw; B. Cable terminal; C. Washer;
D. Nut. 8
powered. 3- Correctly grounded cable.
Negative conductors connected to a grounding point of
the system must be as short as possible and star con-
nected with each other.

237
Electrical system

FUSE LOCATION AND IDENTIFICATION

The fuses give protection to the electrical circuits of

Fuses on dashboard - View from the front
the tractor and cab.

To service the fuses remove the left hand side panel

from the front console. To replace a fuse, pull the
fuse out of the clips and push a new fuse in.

IMPORTANT: Make sure the new fuse has the same

ampere rating as the fuse being replaced.

Fuse Function Amps

FC Electric fan supply AC cab 40

FA1 Starter motor 25

FA2 Ignition key feed line 5
FA3 Pre-engineered MC unit 15
FA4 Light bar field lights, feed line 10
FA5 Front field lights on roof, feed line 10
FA6 Field lights on front handle bars, feed line 10
FA7 Rear field lights on roof and NAO rear field light, feed line 15
FA8 Rear field lights on fenders, feed line 10
FA9 Turn indicators 7.5
FA10 Dipped beams, driving beams, flashing beams, horn feed line,
NAO card feed line 10
FA11 General side lights 7.5
FA12 Emergency switch feed line 15
FA13 Front loader feed line (if installed) 7.5
FA14 DIA1 diagnostic socket and instrument feed line 3
FA15 Rh side lights + license plate 5
FA16 Lh side lights + license plate, night lighting of controls and console 5
FA17 Driving beams feed line 15
FA18 Dipped beams feed line 10
FA19 STD fog light and NAO accessories (7-pole socket) feed line 5
FA20 MC suspended axle (if provided) 15

FB1 Direct power supply from battery to 7-pole socket 20

FB2 Brake lights feed line 10
FB3 Rotating beacon on cab and trailers, feed line 7.5
FB4 Free -
FB5 Rear windscreen wiper and washer 7.5
FB6 Front window wiper and washer 10
FB7 Pneumatic seat feed line 10
FB8 Radio, key-operated feed line 7.5
FB9 Air conditioner compressor 7.5
FB10 Auxiliary socket, cab rh lining 20
FB11 Auxiliary socket, dashboard and cab rh lining 7.5
FB12 Auxiliary socket , dashboard 20
FB13 Direct feed line battery to radio and roof light on cab entry 5
FB14 Engine power supply 7.5
FB15 Front PTO (if equipped) 5
FB16 Trailer brake and air brakes control (if equipped) 5
FB17 Instrument, buzzer and parking brake coil feed line 5
FB18 Transmission power unit and Powershift control with mechanical reverse shuttle 15
FB19 Cigarette lighter feed line 10
FB20 Electronic power lift unit 15

238
 Electrical system

Relays on dashboard - View from the front

Relays Function
KA1 Starter motor relay Relay 30A
KA2 Electronic power lift unit accessories relay Relay 30A
KA3 Field lights corner light, on front of roof and front safety handles Relay 30A
KA4 Rear field lights, rear fenders, NAO socket Relay 30A
KA5 Power unit relay, NAO relay, turn indicators, bonnet beams relay, NAO socket, fog lights,
STD 7-pole socket and front PTO (if equipped) Relay 30A
KA6 Relay for radio, pneumatic seat, window wiper, rear and front window washer,
and trailer brakes (if equipped) Relay 30A

KB1 Air conditioning safety relay, Deluxe roof and Low Profile roof Relay 30A
KB2 Mechanical Powershift solenoid control relay Relay 30A
KB3 Instrument, transmission power unit & engine relay Relay 30A
KB4 Front loader control pre-engineering relay (if provided) Relay 30A
KB5 Free -
KB6 Electronic power lift relay Relay 30A

KC1 Driving beam relay Relay 30A

KC2 Dipped beam relay Relay 30A
KC3 Parking brake microswitch relay for hydraulic and air trailer brake Relay 30A
KC4 Brake lights control relay Relay 30A



KC5
KC6
MFD control relay
Free
Relay 30A
- 8
KD1 Auxiliary socket on dashboard, auxiliary socket on rh lining and cigarette lighter relay Relay 70A
KD2 Air conditioning solenoid relay Relay 40A

239
Electrical system

Fuses and battery relays

Battery switch

Fuse Function Amps

F1 Alternator protection 100
F2 Power to cab protection 125
F3 Grid heater power supply 50

Relays Function
K1 Glow plug relay Relay 50A

240
 Technical specifications

ARGO TRACTORS constantly updates its range of products and

therefore reserves the right to undertake modifications, if appro-
priate ad necessary, without prior notice.
All data and information contained in this publication could be
subject to changes.
Dimensions and weights are only approximate values and the
equipment shown by the pictures could not correspond to stan-
dard models.
Precise data and information about models and equipment are
available at your ARGO TRACTORS Dealer.

Section 9
Technical specifications 9

241
Technical specifications

ENGINE

CX90
Type.............................................................................1104D-44T Turbocharged, direct injection, four-cylinder, four-stroke
Power output................................................................................................................................................................ 60 kW
Max. torque................................................................................................................................................................345 Nm
Governed engine speed without load.........................................................................................................2325 +/- 25 RPM
Rated engine speed................................................................................................................................................ 2200 rpm

CX100
Type........................................................1104D-44TA Turbocharged Aftercooler, direct injection, four-cylinder, four-stroke
Power output................................................................................................................................................................ 68 kW
Max. torque................................................................................................................................................................384 Nm
Governed engine speed without load.........................................................................................................2325 +/- 25 RPM
Rated engine speed................................................................................................................................................ 2200 rpm

CX110
Type........................................................1104D-44TA Turbocharged Aftercooler, direct injection, four-cylinder, four-stroke
Power output............................................................................................................................................................. 74.9 kW
Max. torque................................................................................................................................................................412 Nm
Governed engine speed without load.........................................................................................................2325 +/- 25 RPM
Rated engine speed...............................................................................................................................................2200 RPM

CX100SWB
Type.............................................................................1104D-44T Turbocharged, direct injection, four-cylinder, four-stroke
Power output................................................................................................................................................................ 68 kW
Max. torque................................................................................................................................................................384 Nm
Governed engine speed without load.........................................................................................................2325 +/- 25 RPM
Rated engine speed...............................................................................................................................................2200 RPM

CX105SWB
Type.............................................................................1104D-44T Turbocharged, direct injection, four-cylinder, four-stroke
Power output............................................................................................................................................................. 72.5 kW
Max. torque................................................................................................................................................................384 Nm
Governed engine speed without load.........................................................................................................2325 +/- 25 RPM
Rated engine speed...............................................................................................................................................2200 RPM

242
 Technical specifications

Air Intake System

Air filter........................................................................................................................ Two dry elements, with dust ejector

Engine cooling system

Type .................................................................... Pressure system, thermostat controlled bypass, centrifugal type pump

Radiator ......................................................................................................................................... In-line tube and fin type

Thermostat................................................................................................... Starts to open at approximately -85°C (180°F)

Fully open at 92-98 °C (203°F)

Radiator cap pressure.............................................................................................................................................. 1.03 Bar

Fan Drive Type ......................................................................................................................................................... Viscous

Engine lubrication system

Oil Pump.................................................................................................................................................................Gear type
Oil filter . .................................................................................................................................................................. Full flow

Engine fuel system

......................................................................................................................................................................... Fuel injectors

Bosch
Fuel primer pump . ..................................................................................................................................... Diaphragm type
Fuel filter type ......................................................................................................................................................... Full flow
Water trap and drain location.................................................................................................................Bottom of fuel filter
Fuel tank capacity ................................................................................................................................................ 155 Litres
Cold starting aid .............................................................................................................................................Thermostarter

243
Technical specifications

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

General Specifications
Type of system............................................................................................................................... 12 volt, negative ground

Battery................................................................................................................one 12 volt battery, low maintenance type

TYPE SAE (COLD START IEC DIN AMPERE CAPACITY

CAPACITY) HOUR RESERVE

644 660 Amps 440 Amps 400 Amps 95 180 mins
664 770 Amps 515 Amps 465 Amps 105 210 mins

Alternator ................................................................................................................................................... 12 volt, 65 Amp

Starter motor, with solenoid switch . .......................................................................................................... 12 volt, 2.8 kW

Fuses
See Electrical System section.

Accessory connectors
7-pin electrical outlet . ................................................................................................ Equipped for directional turn lamps,
brake light lamps, tail light lamps

Single auxiliary socket (NON available on tractors for North America)

(next to 7-pin socket) ................................................................................................................................................... 12 volt
for implements with circuit protection

3-pin cab connector ........................................................................................................12 volt power through key switch

and also direct with ground for implement
controllers and monitors

244
 Technical specifications

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Brakes
Brake type...................................................................................................................................... Hydraulic, self-adjusting
Wet 4 brake discs (2 discs per side)

Trailer brake................................................................................................Hydraulic, or air system with one and two lines

Differential lock
Lock type................................................................................................................................................................Multi-disc

Control type.................................................................................................. Electro-hydraulic by a switch on side console

Drawbar and auto hitch

Standard drawbar or yoke type . ..................................................................................................... slide mount, full swing

Max. load with pin in the rear hole (single or double shaft PTO)
- Basic..........................................................................................................................................................................880 kg
- Heavy duty.............................................................................................................................................................1,240 kg
Max. load with pin in the front hole (shiftable PTO)
- Basic..........................................................................................................................................................................790 kg
- Heavy duty.............................................................................................................................................................1,070 kg
Max. static draft on auto hitch:
- Hook.......................................................................................................................................................................2,250 kg
- Drawbar..................................................................................................................................................................1,500 kg

Auto hitch lift capacity - EEC approved [Directive 89/173/EEC, Annex IV, Appendix 2 (dynamic test method)]

Height adjustable hitches

Maximum vertical load . ..........................................................................................................................................1,500 kg

Piton-Fixe..................................................................................................................................................................3,000 kg

IMPORTANT: The maximum loads stated for all the above hitch types may vary depending upon restrictions due to capacity
of rear tyres fitted and/or legal requirements.

Hydrostatic steering system

Pump ............................................................................................................................................ Gear type, engine driven

Capacity..............................................................................................................................................................30 litres/min

Steering pump .......................................................................................Hydrostatic type, actuated by the steering wheel

Steering Cyl..................................................................................................................................................... Double acting

9

245
Technical specifications

Front axle differential and planetaries

Axle type..................................................................................................................................................................... Carraro
Inter axle ratio................................................................................................................................................................1:407

Transmission
Gearbox types
- XtraShift: .........................................................................................................................................24 forward, 24 reverse
- 2-speed Powershift: . ........................................................................................................................16 forward, 8 reverse
- Synchroniser: ......................................................................................................................................8 forward, 8 reverse

Optional creeper on all gearbox versions

Oil cooler................................................................................................................................... Transmission/hydraulic fluid

Gearshift clutch
Clutch friction disc diameter.....................................................................................................................................305 mm

Front hitch (if equipped)

Valve type ....................................................................................................................................................... Four position
.................................................................................................................................................................. Double acting

Type of lower links......................................................................................................................................Claw ends, fixed

Type of hitch.....................................................................................................................................Three point, Category II

Maximum lift capacity,

...............................................................................................................................................................................................
Zuidberg hitch..........................................................................................................................................................3,075 kg

Rear power lift

Type of Sensing . ....................................................................................................................................... 3rd point top link

Type of lower links.................................................................................................. Eye or claw ends, fixed or telescoping

Type of hitch.................................................................................................................................... Three point, Category II

Maximum lift capacity

CX90; CX100-105SWB with 1 auxiliary cylinder . ............................................................................... 2,957 kg

CX90; CX100-105SWB with 2 auxiliary cylinders................................................................................ 4,100 kg
CX90 since September 2009; CX100-110 with 1 auxiliary cylinder.................................................... 3,200 kg
CX90 since September 2009; CX100-110 with 2 auxiliary cylinders................................................. 4,450 kg

246
 Technical specifications

Remote hydraulic system

Pump type..............................................................................................................................................................Gear type

Maximum system pressure................................................................................................................................. 17.237 kPa
Remote valves..........................................................................................................................Manual control, open centre
Auxiliary couplers..................................................................................................................ISO standard, Breakaway type
Flow rate of remote valves................................................................................................................................59 litres/min

Front power takeoff (if equipped)

PTO type............................................................................................................................................................ Independent
Clutch type............................................................................................................................................. Hydraulic operation
Output shaft size................................................................................................................. 6 splines, 34.925 mm diameter
PTO speed.............................................................................................................................................................1000 RPM
Engine speed for 1000 PTO speed.......................................................................................................................2200 RPM

Rear power take-off

PTO type............................................................................................................................................................ Independent

Versions............................................................................................................Single shaft, double shaft, two-speed shaft

Clutch type............................................................................................................................................. Hydraulic operation

Control.............................................................................................................................................lever type, basic version
.......................................................................................... with engagement switch (optional only with Xtrashift gearbox)

Rotation.............................................................................................................................. To the right, from rear of tractor

PTO speed.................................................................................................................... 540, 540/540ECO or 540/1000 RPM

Output shaft size........................................................................................................ 6 or 21 splines, 34.925 mm diameter

Engine speed for 540/1000 RPM PTO speed (double shaft)

- 540 RPM..............................................................................................................................................................1954 RPM
- 1000 RPM............................................................................................................................................................2000 RPM

Engine speed for 540/750 RPM PTO speed (two speeds)

- 540 RPM..............................................................................................................................................................2007 RPM
- 540ECO RPM......................................................................................................................................................1448 RPM
(750 RPM with engine at 2011 RPM)

Engine speed for 540/1000 RPM PTO speed (two speeds)

- 540 RPM..............................................................................................................................................................1994 RPM
- 1000 RPM............................................................................................................................................................2000 RPM

247
Technical specifications

TRAVEL SPEEDS
Ground speed tables
1. Select the table corresponding to the gearbox type you own, e.g.:
XtraShift Gearbox
Two-speed Powershift gearbox
Synchronized (mechanical)

2. Using the speeds shown in the matching table and the correction factor (see page 236), the correct speed can be
calculated for the tyre size (RR = rolling radius*) mounted on the tractor.
* Rolling radius may change depending on manufacturer, tyre pressure and load capacity. For greater precision, the
dynamic procedure illustrated in this manual should be followed.

IMPORTANT: The following travel speeds are only an approximate guide, and are calculated at 2200 rpm engine speed.
Speeds will vary according to make of tyre, tyre pressure and tyre wear. No allowance is made for wheel slip.

Synchronized (mechanical)

The following speeds are calculated for an engine rated speed of 2200 RPM.

SPEED
REAR 18.4-30
TYRES (RR 720)

FORWARD DRIVE

Range Gear kph mph

LO 1 2.57 1.60
LO 2 4.18 2.60
LO 3 5.65 3.51
LO 4 8.11 5.04

HI 1 9.64 5.99
HI 2 15.67 9.74
HI 3 21.18 13.16
HI 4 30.41 18.90

REVERSE

Range Gear kph mph

LO 1 2.50 1.66
LO 2 4.07 2.53
LO 3 5.50 3.42
LO 4 7.90 4.91

HI 1 9.39 5.83
HI 2 15.26 9.48
HI 3 20.63 12.82
HI 4 29.62 18.41

LO = low range,
HI = high range,
RR = rolling radius

248
 Technical specifications

2-speed Powershift gearbox, 30 kph transmission

The following speeds are calculated for an engine rated speed of 2200 RPM.

STANDARD SPEEDS CREEPER SPEEDS

REAR 16.9-34 REAR 16.9-34

TYRES 480/70R34 TYRES 480/70R34
540/65R34 540/65R34
15.5-38 15.5-38
(RR 745) (RR 745)

FORWARD DRIVE FORWARD DRIVE

Range Gear P/shift kph mph Range Gear P/shift kph mph

LO 1 1.88 1.17 1 0.30 0.19

2.27 1.41 0.36 0.22

LO 2 3.31 2.06 2 0.53 0.33

3.99 2.48
0.64 0.40
LO 3 5.35 3.32
3 0.85 0.53
6.45 4.01
1.03 0.64
LO 4 6.88 4.27
4 1.10 0.68
8.30 5.16
1.33 0.83

HI 1 7.04 4.37 REVERSE

8.50 5.28
Range Gear kph mph
HI 2 12.41 7.71
1 033 0.21
14.96 9.29
2 0.58 0.36
HI 3 20.07 12.47
3 0.94 0.58
24.21 15.04
4 1.21 0.75
HI 4 25.81 16.04

31.14 19.35
LO = low range,
HI = high range,
RR = rolling radius
REVERSE
Range Gear kph mph
9
LO 1 2.07 2.07 = SPEED REDUCTION
LO 2 3.64 3.64
LO 3 5.89 5.89 = DIRECT
LO 4 7.58 7.58
= CREEPER
HI 1 7.76 7.76
HI 2 13.66 8.49
HI 3 22.10 13.73
HI 4 28.43 17.66

249
Technical specifications

2-speed Powershift gearbox, 40 kph transmission

The following speeds are calculated for an engine rated speed of 2200 RPM.

STANDARD SPEEDS CREEPER SPEEDS

REAR 18.4-34 REAR 18.4-34
TYRES 500/70R34 TYRES 500/70R34
520/70R34 520/70R34
(RR 770) (RR 770)

FORWARD DRIVE FORWARD DRIVE

Range Gear P/shift kph mph Range Gear P/shift kph mph

LO 1 2.12 1.32 1 0.34 0.21

2.56 1.59 0.41 0.26

LO 2 3.73 2.32 2 0.60 0.37

4.50 2.80 0.72 0.45

LO 3 5.53 3.44 3 0.88 0.55

6.67 4.14 1.07 0.66

LO 4 8.67 5.39 4 1.38 0.86

10.46 6.50 1.67 1.04

REVERSE
HI 1 7.95 4.94
Range Gear kph mph
9.59 5.96
1 0.37 0.23
HI 2 14.00 8.70
2 0.65 0.40
16.88 10.49
3 0.96 0.60
HI 3 20.75 12.89
4 1.51 0.94
25.02 15.55

HI 4 32.52 20.21
LO = low range,
39.22 24.37
HI = high range,
RR = rolling radius

REVERSE
Range Gear kph mph
= SPEED REDUCTION
LO 1 2.31 1.44
LO 2 4.07 2.53
= DIRECT
LO 3 6.04 3.75
LO 4 9.46 5.88
= CREEPER
HI 1 8.67 5.39
HI 2 15.28 9.49
HI 3 22.63 14.06
HI 4 35.48 22.05

250
 Technical specifications

XtraShift gearbox with 40 kph transmission

The following speeds are calculated for an engine rated speed of 2200 RPM.

FORWARD SPEEDS REVERSE SPEED

REAR 18.4-34 REAR 18.4-34
TYRES 500/70R34 TYRES 500/70R34
520/70R34 520/70R34
(RR 770) (RR 770)

Range Gear P/shift kph mph Range Gear P/shift kph mph

LO 1 1 2.12 1.32 LO 1 1 2.11 1.31

2 2.61 1.62 2 2.60 1.62
3 3.08 1.91 3 3.07 1.91

LO 2 1 3.30 2.05 LO 2 1 3.28 2.04

2 4.06 2.52 2 4.04 2.51
3 4.79 2.98 3 4.77 2.96

LO 3 1 4.94 3.07 LO 3 1 4.92 3.06

2 6.08 3.79 2 6.06 3.77
3 7.17 4.46 3 7.14 4.44

LO 4 1 7.28 4.52 LO 4 1 7.25 4.51

2 8.97 5.57 2 8.93 5.55
3 10.58 6.57 3 10.536 .54

HI 1 1 7.95 4.94 HI 1 1 7.92 4.92

2 9.79 6.08 2 9.75 6.06
3 11.55 7.18 3 11.50 7.15

HI 2 1 12.36 7.68 HI 2 1 12.31 7.65

2 15.22 9.46 2 15.16 9.42
3 17.95 11.15 3 17.88 11.11

HI 3 1 18.52 11.51 HI 3 1 18.45 11.46

2 22.81 14.17 2 22.81 14.17
3 26.90 16.71 3 26.79 16.65

HI 4 1 27.31 16.97 HI 4 1 27.20 16.90

2* 33.63 20.90 2* 33.49 20.81
3* 39.66 24.64 3* 39.50 24.54

LO = low range, (*) NOTE: On XtraShift tractors with 30 kph transmission,

HI = high range, the latter is electronically controlled and allows no ground
RR = rolling radius speeds over 30 kph.
9

251
Technical specifications

XtraShift gearbox with 30 kph and 40 kph transmission with creeper

The following speeds are calculated for an engine rated speed of 2200 RPM.

REDUCED FORWARD SPEEDS REDUCED REVERSE SPEEDS

REAR 18.4-34 REAR 18.4-34
TYRES 500/70R34 TYRES 500/70R34
520/70R34 520/70R34
(RR 770) (RR 770)

Range Gear P/shift kph mph Range Gear P/shift kph mph

1 1 0.33 0.21 1 1 0.33 0.21

2 0.41 0.25 2 0.40 0.25
3 0.48 0.30 3 0.48 0.30

2 1 0.51 0.32 2 1 0.51 0.32

2 0.63 0.39 2 0.63 0.39
3 0.74 0.46 3 0.74 0.46

3 1 0.77 0.48 3 1 0.77 0.47

2 0.95 0.59 2 0.94 0.59
3 1.12 0.70 3 1.11 0.69

4 1 1.13 0.70 4 1 1.13 0.70

2 1.39 0.86 2 1.39 0.86
3 1.64 1.02 3 1.64 1.02

LO = low range,
HI = high range,
RR = rolling radius

252
 Technical specifications

APPROXIMATE TRACTOR DIMENSIONS

IMPORTANT: The dimensions shown on the following pages are only approximate. They depend on many factors, such as
tyre size, ballast, amount of fuel, tyre pressure etc.
ALL dimensions are in mm.

DIMENSIONS in mm

De Luxe Low Profile

A - Height at cab roof

Height may change according to tyres
- CX90; CX100-105SWB 2748 2498
- CX100-110 2748 2499

B - Wheelbase
- CX90-MFD; CX100-105SWB MFD 2356 2356
- CX100-110-MFD 2452 2452
- CX90-MFD from September 2009 2452 2452

C - Overall length
(Front ballast - Hitch lower links)
- CX90; CX100-105SWB 4229 4229
- CX100-110 4325 4325
- CX90 from September 2009 4325 4325

D - Ground clearance (max.) 480 480
under pick-up hitch 345 345

9

E - Overall width at rear fenders
- Wide fenders 2147 2147
- Narrow fenders 1964 1964
Overall width may change according to tread widths and tyres

The above mentioned dimensions are rough values, as they may change according to tyres.

NOTE: Overall width of the tractor may change according to the type of axle and to the track width settings.

NOTE: (only for EEC Member States): An overall width of 2,500 mm to 3,000 mm (8 to 10 feet) MAY REQUIRE local au-
thorization for use on the highway. An overall width over 3,000 mm (10 feet) a local authorization is MANDATORY.

253
Technical specifications

Noise levels as perceived by the operator

THE FOLLOWING TABLES GIVE THE NOISE LEVEL VALUES, MEASURED FROM THE DRI-
VER’S SEAT IN INSTANTANEOUS CONDITIONS IN COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS EEC
77/311 (DBA) - ANNEX II (WITHOUT LOAD) - AND WHEN DRIVING IN COMPLIANCE WITH
STANDARD EEC 74/151 (DBA).

Tractors with cab

Model Test report Noise level at driver’s seat Noise level at
numbers EEC 77/311 - dBA driving by
EEC 2003/37 Closed doors Open windows + EEC 74/151
rear doors dBA
CX90 74 81 82

CX100 76 81 82

CX110 79 82 82
All models
CX100SWB 76 81 82

CX105SWB 76 81 82

254
 Technical specifications

INFORMATION PAGE ON VIBRATION LEVELS OF THE TRACTOR

EXPOSITION TO VIBRATIONS

WARNING: The vibration level transmitted IMPORTANT: More information on Whole Body Vibra-
to the body as a whole depend on different tion (WBV) on agricultural tractors can be found in more
parameters, some of them relating to the ma- specific publications and the relative risks can be taken
chine, others to the terrain and many specific into account following the laws of the country. In order
for the operator. The prevailing parameters to correctly estimate statistical values based on your
are the type of terrain or work surface and daily work on the tractor, a specific measure instrument
the ground speed. is required, such a three-axis accelerometer applied to
the seat.
WARNING:
- Vibrations cause discomfort for the opera- NOTE: Visit the dedicated Internet web sites for further
tor and in some cases put his/her health and information and documentation on risks of whole body
safety at risk. vibration.
- Make sure that the tractor is in good condi-
tion and that all routine servicing is correctly
and regularly carried out.
- Check tyre pressure and the steering and
braking systems.
- Check that the operator’s seat and adjustment
systems are in good condition, then adjust the
seat to the operator’s weight and size.

In accordance to EU Directive 78/764/EC the following table shows vibration levels measured on seats, in aws.

Seat type Vibrations * m/s2 at the (applied test weights)

Light-weight operator Heavy-weight operator

CX Sears MCS 3000 aws* = 1,24m/s2 aws* = 1,06m/s2

(Mechanical)
Sears SST 1500 aws* = 1,21m/s2 aws* = 0,96 m/s2
(Air suspension)

* aws = correct weighted value of the vibration acceleration (m/s2)

255
Technical specifications
‘CE’ DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
“ Every tractor is accompanied by a CE Declaration of Conformity to Directive 2006/42/EC that you should receive in
original together with the tractor.
This Declaration indicates with which European Directive the machine complies”.

The following picture is a fac-simile copy of such CE Declaration of Conformity.

Argo Tractors S.p.A.

42042 Fabbrico [RE] Italia
via G. Matteotti, 7
t. +39.0522.656111 E
IL
f. +39.0522.656476
IM

[email protected]
www.argotractors.com
S
C
FA

256
 Technical specifications

Issue of authorization
To install any type of mounted or semi-mounted equipment not provided for by road traffic laws, it is mandatory to
request the express written authorization of the vehicle manufacturer.
We insist at any rate on our recommendation to mount always exclusively CE marked equipment complying with the
Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC.

Weights

Maximum weight declared by the manufacturer for road circulation

IMPORTANT: DO NOT exceed the maximum load capacity of the tyres on your tractor. See Loads and Inflation Pressures
recommended by tyre manufacturers.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT exceed the local legal limitations of the axle loads and the total weight on the road.

Maximum permitted tractor operating weight

The MAXIMUM PERMITTED TRACTOR OPERATING WEIGHT includes the tractor, tractor equipment and ballast.

The MAXIMUM PERMITTED AXLE OPERATING WEIGHT includes the tractor, tractor equipment, ballast and three-point
hitch mounted equipment.

Model Front kg Rear kg Total kg

CX90 3O00 4800 7200

CX100 3O00 4800 7200
CX110 3O00 4800 7200
CX100SWB 3O00 4800 7200
CX105SWB 3O00 4800 7200

IT IS RECOMMENDED to use the tractor always with a load on front axle over 25% or not under 55% of the total
weight.

CAUTION: Use exclusively the provided hooks to tow CAUTION: Refer to licensing documents issued by the
the machine. Ministry of Transport to know data relating to max.
vertical and horizontal loads on tow hooks and max.
trailer weights.

257
Technical specifications

This page has been left blank intentionally

258
 Alphabetical index

A I
Air conditioner . ......................................................... 57 Indicator lamps and warning lamps............................ 63
Air conditioner............................................................. 57 Instrument cluster . .................................................... 61
Air conditioning system ....................................192, 193 Instrument panel......................................................... 62
Auxiliary electrical power sockets..............................122
Axle - Steering stops .................................................168 L
Lubricants and fuels . ................................................188
B Lubricants...................................................................188
Batteries ................................................................... 234
Before starting the engine ......................................... 92 M
Brakes......................................................................... 51 Maintenance .............................................................185

C N
Cab air filter .......................................................192, 193 Noise levels ...............................................................254
Clock/hour meter ............................................... 90, 190
Cold starting procedure ............................................. 95
O
Cold Temperature Operation .................................... 94
Operation ................................................................... 91
Controls . ................................................................... 39

P
D Passenger seat . ........................................................ 47
Declaration of conformity ........................................ 256
Pneumatic trailer brakes ...........................................120
Differential lock .........................................................148
Programming the instrument cluster.......................... 61
Dimensions ...............................................................253
Pull hooks .................................................................112
Drawbar . ...................................................................108
Putting the tractor into storage . ...............................230
Engine air intake system....................................192, 193
Engine cooling system .....................................192, 193
Engine oil filter ................................................. 192, 193
R
Rear power take-off...................................................125
Rear three-point hitch.........................................131-137
F Rear tracks, flanged axle . .........................................174
Front axle track width, MFD . ....................................169
Regular service intervals .................................. 192, 193
Front power take-off..................................................130
Remote valves............................................................154
Front PTO oil filter ............................................ 192, 193
Run in procedure ...................................................... 92
Fuel . ..........................................................................194
Fuel filters . ....................................................... 192, 193
Fuel system bleeding ....................................... 211, 212
S
Safety ........................................................................... 9
Fuses ........................................................................ 237
Safety belts................................................................. 46
Safety decals..........................................................30, 34
G Safety notes ............................................................... 13
Gearbox, Powershift .................................................102
Safety precautions before servicing..........................186
Gearbox, synchronised .............................................104
Seats .......................................................................... 42
Gearbox, XtraShift .....................................................100
Starting procedure ..................................................... 93
Hand brake.................................................................. 55
Starting the engine................................................. 92-94
Hazardous chemicals.................................................201
Hydraulic hitch...........................................................138
Hydraulic trailer brakes .............................................121

259
Alphabetical index
T
Technical specifications.............................................241
To the owner ............................................................... 8
Towing the tractor .....................................................107
Track width adjustment, front .................................. 169
Tractor ballast . ..........................................................176
Tractor identification .................................................... 6
Tractor transport .......................................................107
Tractor weights .........................................................256
Transmission/hydraulic oil filter ....................... 192, 193
Travel speed ..............................................................248
Turning off the engine ............................................... 97
Tyres...........................................................................159

U
Use of the tractor........................................................ 91

W
Wheel track width adjustment, rear ........................ 174

260
 Alphabetical index

NOTE: This manual has been published for worldwide circulation.

The standard and optional equipment and the availability of individual
models may vary from one country to the next. McCormick reserves the
right to undertake modifications without prior notice to the design and
technical equipment at all times without this resulting in any obligation
whatsoever to make such modifications to units already sold. Whilst
every effort is made to ensure that the specifications, descriptions, pho-
tographs and illustrations in this manual are correct at the time of going
to print, these are also subject to change without prior notice. The
photographs and illustrations used in this manual may show optional
equipment or may not show all standard equipment. Any reproduction
or translation, even partial, is forbidden without the written authorization
of McCormick.

261
 2 holes 1/2 UNC-2B Engine axis
6 holes 5/8 UNC-2B

262
CX100-CX110
Detail A

Engine axis Detail B

CX90 from September 2009

Implement attachment points
Detail B
Scale 1:5
Alphabetical index

Engine axis
2+2 holes 5/8 UNC-2B

Replace shims with relative mounting

brackets for front loader/hitch

Scale 1:4
8 studs

View from C
Detail A
Scale 1:5
Scale 1:5

Partial section A--A

Scale 1:5
Interflange
Front 1640

Engine axis
Scale 1:4

8 holes for studs 5/8-18 UNF

6 holes M20

Interflange Front wheel axis 11+11 holes 5/8 UNC-2B

Rear 1563.5 4+4 holes M20
Front view
Scale 1:10
 2 holes 1/2 UNC-2B Engine axis

6 holes 5/8 UNC-2B

Detail A

CX100SWB-CX110SWB
Engine axis Detail B

CX90 up to September 2009

Engine axis

Implement attachment points

Detail B
Scale 1:5

PTO 2+2 holes 5/8 UNC-2B

Replace shims with relative mounting
brackets for front loader/hitch

Scale 1:4
4 screws M20
8 studs
4 screws M20

Detail A
Scale 1:5
Partial section A--A
Scale 1:5 Engine axis

Front interflange 1640

Scale 1:4

8 holes for studs 5/8-18 UNF

Front wheel axis 6 holes M20

11+11 holes 5/8 UNC-2B

263
Interflange 4+4 holes M20 Front view
Alphabetical index

Rear 1563.5 Scale 1:5

View from C
Scale 1:5
Alphabetical index

264